19.06.2013 Views

here - 5th International Conference on Bantu Languages

here - 5th International Conference on Bantu Languages

here - 5th International Conference on Bantu Languages

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

Remarks <strong>on</strong> the nasal classes in Mungbam and Naki<br />

Mungbam and Naki are two n<strong>on</strong>-Grassfields Bantoid languages spoken al<strong>on</strong>g the northwest<br />

fr<strong>on</strong>tier of the Grassfields area to the north of the Ring languages. Until recently, they were<br />

poorly described, but new data reveals them to show significant nasal noun class patterns,<br />

some of which do not appear to have been previously noted for Bantoid. The key patterns are:<br />

1. Like many other languages of their regi<strong>on</strong> (see Good et al. 2011), they make productive<br />

use of a mysterious diminutive plural prefix with a form like mu-, with associated<br />

c<strong>on</strong>cords in m, <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> referred to as Class 18a (see Hyman 1980:187).<br />

2. The five dialects of Mungbam show a level of variati<strong>on</strong> in their nasal classes that <strong>on</strong>e<br />

might normally expect of distinct languages.<br />

a. Two dialects show no evidence for nasals in Class 6. Two other dialects, Munken and<br />

Ngun, show a Class 6 prefix <strong>on</strong> nouns of form a- but nasal c<strong>on</strong>cords. In Munken Class<br />

6, this nasal is n, clearly distinct from an m associated with 6a; in Ngun, both 6 and 6a<br />

are associated with m c<strong>on</strong>cords. The Abar dialect shows a different pattern, with Class<br />

6 nasal c<strong>on</strong>cords in m and nasal prefixes <strong>on</strong> some Class 6 nouns.<br />

b. The Abar, Biya, and Ngun dialects show a Class 18a prefix with form mN-, rather than<br />

the more regi<strong>on</strong>ally comm<strong>on</strong> mu-. This reducti<strong>on</strong> is presumably c<strong>on</strong>nected to<br />

perseveratory nasalizati<strong>on</strong> attested throughout the languages of the regi<strong>on</strong> with a<br />

diachr<strong>on</strong>ic pathway al<strong>on</strong>g the lines of mu- > mũ- > mN- perhaps providing a partial<br />

example for the development of <strong>Bantu</strong> Class 9/10.<br />

3. Naki shows nasals in Classes 6a, 18a, and an apparent Class 6, which has plural semantics<br />

and pairs with plurals of words that can be associated with Classes 3 and 5. Class 6 is<br />

formally coded by either no nominal class marker or an -ŋ suffix (not obviously archaic or<br />

innovative) <strong>on</strong> stems ending in a vowel and has c<strong>on</strong>cord forms in n, while Classes 6a and<br />

18a show m. The nasal classes are all unified, however, in showing back vowels in<br />

c<strong>on</strong>cord forms rather than fr<strong>on</strong>t vowels, e.g., pr<strong>on</strong>ominals nú (Class 6) and mú (Class 18a)<br />

against wí (Class 3) and fí (Class 19).<br />

Taken together, these facts, if anything, make coming to a historical understanding of the<br />

nasal classes in Bantoid even more difficult than previously thought (Hyman 1980). For<br />

instance, the fact that some Mungbam dialects show nasal c<strong>on</strong>cords, but n<strong>on</strong>-nasal noun<br />

prefixes, runs counter to a more general pattern w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> mismatches involve n<strong>on</strong>-nasal noun<br />

c<strong>on</strong>cords associated with nasal prefixes (Hyman 1980:193). Perhaps more striking is the<br />

presence of nasal Class 6 in Munken and Naki associated with n c<strong>on</strong>cords that are distinct<br />

from Class 6a c<strong>on</strong>cords in m, suggesting that the development of nasal Class 6 need not<br />

always be directly c<strong>on</strong>nected to a merger with Class 6a.<br />

More generally, the data from Mungbam suggests that the Greenberg-Crabb criteri<strong>on</strong> may<br />

have been based <strong>on</strong> a false historical assumpti<strong>on</strong> that the development of nasal classes should<br />

somehow be c<strong>on</strong>strued as a rare historical event. The Mungbam dialects are probably not<br />

more than two hundred years old, but, nevertheless show striking differences in the presence<br />

of nasal classes, with recent language c<strong>on</strong>tact being the most plausible route through which<br />

this differentiati<strong>on</strong> developed (Di Carlo 2011). If c<strong>on</strong>tact could cause such differentiati<strong>on</strong> in<br />

Mungbam dialects, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> would seem to be little reas<strong>on</strong> to believe it could not have resulted in<br />

similar effects numerous times in different languages as well.<br />

References<br />

Good, J., Lovegren, J., Mve, J. P., Tchiemouo, N. C., Voll, R., and Di Carlo, P. (2011). The languages of the<br />

Lower Fungom regi<strong>on</strong> of Camero<strong>on</strong>: Grammatical overview. Africana Linguistica 17:101–164.<br />

Di Carlo, P. (2011). Lower Fungom linguistic diversity and its historical development: Proposals from a<br />

multidisciplinary perspective. Africana Linguistica 17:53–100.<br />

Hyman, L. M. (1980). Reflecti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> the nasal classes in <strong>Bantu</strong>. In Hyman, L. M (ed.), Noun classes in the<br />

Grassfields <strong>Bantu</strong> borderland, 179–210. Los Angeles: University of Southern California.<br />

WS1


Les classes nominales à nasales en proto-bantu dans le c<strong>on</strong>texte de Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go<br />

Ce problème est formulé en détail dans l’appelle à communicati<strong>on</strong>s et, précédemment, dans<br />

l’article largement c<strong>on</strong>nu de Larry Hyman (1980) qui écrit :<br />

Dans cette communicati<strong>on</strong>, j’analyse quelques d<strong>on</strong>nées (principalement des d<strong>on</strong>nées des<br />

langues atlantiques nord et sud) qui peuvent présenter un intérêt pour traiter les questi<strong>on</strong>s<br />

posées.<br />

Inventaire des classes nominales à nasales<br />

WS1<br />

Il semble admis par la majorité des chercheurs que la classe *ma- (6А), qui regroupe les noms<br />

de masses et de liquides sans corrélati<strong>on</strong> de nombre et des noms à sémantique duelle peut être<br />

rec<strong>on</strong>struite en proto-Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go (main, jambe, probablement oreille, genou ainsi que lune,<br />

le trait duel étant lié dans ce dernier cas à la structure à deux phases du calendrier lunaire).<br />

Ainsi, nous aborder<strong>on</strong>s la questi<strong>on</strong> de la nasalisati<strong>on</strong> des marqueurs de classes dans les classes<br />

nominales proto-bantu 1, 3, 4, 9, 10 (excepté les sous-systèmes de classes locatives).<br />

Un des nos objectifs est, sur la base de d<strong>on</strong>nées externes au bantu, de tenter d’élargir le<br />

groupe des classes à nasales à deux classes supplémentaires, en c<strong>on</strong>sidérant deux autres<br />

classes possibles à un stade proto-bantu précoce.<br />

Premièrement, la classe potentielle N (2A) du pluriel de certains termes de parenté : la langue<br />

sud-atlantique sherbro présente une oppositi<strong>on</strong> (qui est loin d’être unique dans des langues<br />

Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go) avec, en face de la classe plurielle standard des humains *ba-/*be-/*а- (2), une<br />

classe de pluriel N- (groupes d’humains, collectifs) incluant notamment certains termes de<br />

parenté au pluriel.<br />

Deuxièmement, il s’agit de la classe *mu-. L. Hyman fournit du matériau bantu susceptible de<br />

permettre sa rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>, l’appelle c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>nellement classe «18», et la définit comme<br />

une classe pl. corresp<strong>on</strong>dant à la classe sg. des diminutifs 19 :<br />

Le matériau externe au bantu permet de c<strong>on</strong>sidérer qu’en proto-Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go, il a peut-être<br />

existé une classe * mu- / Nu- , notamment pour les désignati<strong>on</strong>s du feu (probablement sans<br />

corrélati<strong>on</strong> de nombre), peut-être, également pour fumée et moelle : dans une série de langues<br />

Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go, où s<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>servés ses reflexes, le mot signifiant feu est singularia tantum, et<br />

dans d’autres pluralia tantum. En proto-bantu cette classe a probablement fusi<strong>on</strong>né avec la<br />

classe 3.


En ce qui c<strong>on</strong>cerne le couple 9/10, les d<strong>on</strong>nées Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go c<strong>on</strong>firment clairement pour la<br />

classe 10 la rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> *si-, et ce, n<strong>on</strong> seulement pour l’accord, mais également comme<br />

préfixe dans le nom lui-même.<br />

Quelques hypothèses expliquant la nasalisati<strong>on</strong> des marqueurs de classe dans les noms<br />

en proto-bantu<br />

Les hypothèses les plus plausibles <strong>on</strong>t été détaillées par L. Hyman. Nous les examin<strong>on</strong>s une<br />

nouvelle fois en apportant du matériau nouveau.<br />

1. Influence du pr<strong>on</strong>om objet 3sg. *mù PB. D’après L.Hyman :<br />

Et plus loin:<br />

WS1<br />

“The most striking evidence that *mu- goes bey<strong>on</strong>d NB comes from Fula. . Arnott (1970) indicates that the<br />

c<strong>on</strong>cord for the human singular class varies betxeen –o, -jo and -d’o. However, the form of the human subject and<br />

object pr<strong>on</strong>oun is [mo], which also appears in interrogatives. It may not be too wild to speculate that *mu was a<br />

human pr<strong>on</strong>oun ‘him/her’ in Proto-Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go and was independent of the noun class system. It may, in<br />

additi<strong>on</strong>, have been “a fourth pers<strong>on</strong>” form… This m- would have been dropped before all prefixes except<br />

classes 1, 3, 4 and 6 (a) – and possibly 9/10, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> its presence before a stem-initial c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant would be caused<br />

its development into N-. The motivati<strong>on</strong> for this distributi<strong>on</strong> would be that classes 1, 3, 4 and 6 (a) had vowel<br />

prefixes and the syllabified <strong>on</strong>to this vowels to produce mu-, mi- and ma. …he simplest soluti<strong>on</strong>: an<br />

additi<strong>on</strong>al prefix was added to nouns with perhaps the functi<strong>on</strong> of definitizing them”.<br />

Tout d’abord, apport<strong>on</strong>s de nouveaux éléments pour la comparais<strong>on</strong> de ce pr<strong>on</strong>om PB<br />

en Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go.<br />

Dans les langues atlantiques il est signalé n<strong>on</strong> seulement en fula, mais aussi en bijogo<br />

(mɔ-), également dans la f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong> Objet (pour les humains), en sua (mo) – dans la<br />

f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong> de Possessif et enfin en wolof (mu) – dans la f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong> de Sujet. Ces d<strong>on</strong>nées<br />

s<strong>on</strong>t très fragmentées pour rec<strong>on</strong>struire *mu ou bien *mo pour 3sg. spécifique dans le<br />

proto-atlantique. Cette forme est absente dans les langues sud-atlantiques. D’après la<br />

base de d<strong>on</strong>nées des marques pers<strong>on</strong>nelles dans les langues d’Afrique (Segerer, 2004-<br />

2010), la forme mo/mu 3sg. est largement représentée dans les langues Benue-C<strong>on</strong>go<br />

mais elle est presque introuvable dans les autres branches NC à l’excepti<strong>on</strong> des formes<br />

isolées dans 4 langues kwa et dans une seul langue gur :


c<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>p<strong>on</strong> (chrep<strong>on</strong>g) Kwa m ɔ̀ 3s P<br />

g<strong>on</strong>ja Kwa mò 3s TO<br />

nchumuru-banda Kwa m ʊ̀ 3s TO<br />

nchumuru-bejamso-grubi Kwa m ʊ̰̀ 3s TOP<br />

lyele Gur mɔ 3s O<br />

Il semble que nulle part en-dehors de bantu il ne soit possible d’identifier une<br />

corrélati<strong>on</strong> entre l’existence dans le système du pr<strong>on</strong>om 3sg à nasale et une structure<br />

nasale ou vocalique des réflexes des classes corresp<strong>on</strong>dantes. C'est-à-dire que, si l’<strong>on</strong><br />

accepte le scenario proposé, il s’agit clairement d’une innovati<strong>on</strong> bantu.<br />

2. Hyman discute comme source alternatif les lexèmes signifiant humain ou animal :<br />

Et plus loin : “According to the argument, ne- would have developed into N- and then spread to other nouns<br />

(and perhaps also to 9/10 w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> agentives may have bel<strong>on</strong>ged”.<br />

Après examen des arguments pour et c<strong>on</strong>tre cette hypothèse, Hyman c<strong>on</strong>clut qu’elle<br />

est « difficult to support with c<strong>on</strong>fidence » et « seems implausible ».<br />

Nous pens<strong>on</strong>s toutefois que les arguments en faveur de cette hypothèse ne s<strong>on</strong>t pas<br />

épuisés.<br />

Premièrement, not<strong>on</strong>s que dans les langues sud-atlantiques, il semble que nous ay<strong>on</strong>s<br />

affaire à un cas rare où un lexème signifiant humain est grammaticalisé et intégré dans<br />

un système des classes à modèle d’accord spécifique. De plus, la nouvelle classe<br />

singulier pour les humains comprend bien une c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ne nasale. Dans le groupe sud<br />

des langues mel (kisi, sherbro), la forme nɔ ‘pers<strong>on</strong>ne’ est peut-être empruntée aux<br />

langues mandé sud-ouest (nu). C’est justement en kisi et en sherbro qu’est apparue la<br />

nouvelle classe nɔ pour le singulier des humains, classe qui a progressivement<br />

remplacé dans cette f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong> la proto-classe *o.<br />

On découvre un autre exemple intéressant en laal (une branche isolée de NC ?) dans<br />

laquelle, tout comme dans les langues sud-atlantiques, <strong>on</strong> relève le lexème no<br />

«homme, être humain». Pour cette langue, Pascal Boyeldieu (1982) menti<strong>on</strong>ne une<br />

série d’oppositi<strong>on</strong>s de nombre qu’il analyse comme supplétives :<br />

Sg.<br />

nam / nɨm<br />

namy-/nɨmy<br />

nar / nɨr<br />

na:ra<br />

niini<br />

no<br />

nuruŋ<br />

Pl.<br />

wum<br />

wumañ<br />

yɨgər<br />

wura<br />

yinan<br />

muaŋ<br />

mari<br />

frère / soeur<br />

<strong>on</strong>cle maternel, neveu / nièce<br />

fils / fille<br />

homme (vir)<br />

femme, épouse<br />

pers<strong>on</strong>ne<br />

jeune fille<br />

WS1


Pourtant, la segmentati<strong>on</strong> morphématique de ces noms permet une autre interprétati<strong>on</strong> :<br />

Sg.<br />

n-a/ɨ-m<br />

n-a/ɨ-my-<br />

n-a/ɨ-r<br />

n-a:-ra<br />

n-i:-ni<br />

no<br />

n-u-r-uŋ<br />

Pl.<br />

wu-m<br />

*wu-my-añ<br />

yɨ-gə-r<br />

wu-ra<br />

yi-n-an<br />

mu-aŋ<br />

ma-ri<br />

frère / sœur<br />

<strong>on</strong>cle maternel, neveu / nièce<br />

fils / fille<br />

homme (vir)<br />

femme, épouse<br />

pers<strong>on</strong>ne<br />

jeune fille<br />

Ainsi, il est possible que dans la langue laal nous ay<strong>on</strong>s affaire à une structure<br />

particulièrement intéressante, à savoir :<br />

sg. : pers<strong>on</strong> + gender marker + root<br />

pl. : class marker + root<br />

3) Nous examiner<strong>on</strong>s également une autre voie possible de nasalisati<strong>on</strong> des marqueurs de<br />

classe en questi<strong>on</strong> dans les langues proto-bantu. Dans un certain nombre de langues<br />

atlantiques <strong>on</strong> observe l’appariti<strong>on</strong> d’un morphème spécifique pour marquer les classes<br />

d’hommes et d’animaux, aussi bien au singulier qu’au pluriel. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un<br />

t<strong>on</strong> spécifique (tout comme en proto-bantu où le t<strong>on</strong> bas des marqueurs de classes 1 et 9 peut<br />

être légitimement c<strong>on</strong>sidéré comme une marque des classes prototypiques d’êtres vivants) ou<br />

encore d’une c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ne nasale (par exemple en limba, le suffixe *-ni que l’<strong>on</strong> retrouve dans<br />

les noms des humains et d’animaux). On examinera entre autre l’hypothèse suivante, f<strong>on</strong>dée<br />

sur une des interprétati<strong>on</strong>s existantes de la sémantique prototypique des classes nominales<br />

(Pozdniakov 1993). En accord avec cette interprétati<strong>on</strong>, la classe 3 inclut des noms d’objets<br />

n<strong>on</strong> vivants, mais « actifs », c’est-à-dire d’objets de dimensi<strong>on</strong> et de forme variables – tout ce<br />

qui bouge, change sa forme et ses dimensi<strong>on</strong>: outre les noms d’arbres généralement signalés<br />

pour cette classe, <strong>on</strong> y trouve les noms des esprits et des génies, rivière, cheveu, cœur, queue,<br />

doigt, ombre, fumée et une série d’autres noms porteurs du trait « actif ». Si <strong>on</strong> admet cette<br />

interprétati<strong>on</strong>, il devient possible d’envisager l’hypothèse (c<strong>on</strong>firmée par les d<strong>on</strong>nées des<br />

langues atlantiques) de l’existence au stade proto-bantu précoce d’un morphème spécifique (N<br />

homorganique réalisé m- devant u, c’est-à-dire dans les classes 1, 3, 4 - et n- devant i – c’està-dire<br />

dans les classes 9, 10 et peut-être 2А) pratiquement dans toutes les classes à trait<br />

« actif », à l’excepti<strong>on</strong> de la classe 2.<br />

Références :<br />

Boyeldieu, Pascal. Deux études laal (Moyen-Chari, Tchad). Berlin : Dietrich Reimer Verlag, 1982.<br />

Hyman, Larry M. 1980b. Reflecti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> the nasal classes in <strong>Bantu</strong>. In Hyman (1980a), 179-210 // Hyman, Larry<br />

M. (ed.). 1980a. Noun classes in the Grassfields <strong>Bantu</strong> borderland. Southern California Occasi<strong>on</strong>al Papers in<br />

Linguistics 8. Los Angeles: University of Southern California. (http://gsil.scling.org/pubs/SCOPILS_6_7_8_9/Noun_classes_in_the_grassfields_bantu_borderland.pdf)<br />

Pozdniakov, K<strong>on</strong>stantin. 1993. Сравнительная грамматика атлантических языков. М., «Наука», 1993.<br />

(http://pozdniakov.free.fr)<br />

Segerer, Guillaume. Base de d<strong>on</strong>nées «Les marques pers<strong>on</strong>nelles dans les langues africaines »<br />

(http://sumale.vjf.cnrs.fr/Pr<strong>on</strong>oms/)<br />

WS1


Mande evidence for nasal class prefixes<br />

WS1<br />

Valentin Vydrin<br />

INALCO – LLACAN, UMR 8135 CNRS<br />

vydrine@gmail.com<br />

0. In modern Mande languages, no noun prefixes are observed. However, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are certain<br />

evidences in favor of the rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> of two nasal prefixes for Proto-Mande, *N1- and *N2-.<br />

1. The evidence for *N1-, a marker for elder kin names, is rather indirect: this prefix<br />

manifests itself mainly “negatively”, through exempti<strong>on</strong> of such nouns from adjoining a regular<br />

article suffix in numerous Western Mande languages: Maninka, Koranko, Susu, S<strong>on</strong>inke.<br />

Besides, in Maninka such names seem to carry a prefixed low t<strong>on</strong>e which can be a trace of an<br />

archaic segmental prefix.<br />

The nasal character of the Proto-Mande prefix can be tentatively postulated <strong>on</strong> the basis of<br />

the Southwestern Mande evidence. In three languages of this group (Mende, Loko, Bandi) elder<br />

kin names are exempt from the initial c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant alternati<strong>on</strong>, otherwise quite regular<br />

phenomen<strong>on</strong>. Their initial c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant is invariably “str<strong>on</strong>g” (unvoiced or voiced prensalized).<br />

With other words, a str<strong>on</strong>g (unvoiced or voiced prenasalized) initial c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant appears as a result<br />

of fusi<strong>on</strong> with another nasal morpheme coming back to the 3SG pr<strong>on</strong>oun (easily rec<strong>on</strong>structable<br />

for the Proto-South-Western level), *Ǹ. By analogy, it can be assumed that the elder kin prefix<br />

was also a homorganic nasal, *Ǹ-.<br />

2. The evidence for *N2- is found in:<br />

– several varieties of the Manding branch (Bamana, Mandinka, Kagoro, Wasol<strong>on</strong>, some<br />

Ivoirean dialects) and Mokole (Kakabe) have more or less numerous nouns with initial<br />

prenasalized c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants, mainly plant and animal names, insects, names for smal and/or<br />

dangerous objects, uncountable and mass nouns. The nasal element of the prenasalized<br />

c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants carries usually a low t<strong>on</strong>e;<br />

– in Southwestern Mande languages, a group of nouns is exempt from the initial c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant<br />

alternati<strong>on</strong>, and their initial c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant are invariably “weak” (fricative or s<strong>on</strong>ants). These nouns<br />

form semantic groups similar to those formed by the nouns with initial prenasalizati<strong>on</strong> in<br />

Manding; sometimes, their roots are also etymologically identical. The invariably weak initial<br />

c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants can be interpreted as an incompatibility of these nouns with the archaic article *Ǹ- in<br />

the Proto-Southwestern language;<br />

– in Susu and S<strong>on</strong>inke, this morpheme may have been reflected indirectly: t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is a number<br />

of nouns whose semantics is similar to that of prenasalized Manding nouns and who are exempt<br />

from adjoining a regular article-like suffix (otherwise rather obligatory).<br />

Both prefixes, *N1- and *N2-, seem to have been marked with the same low t<strong>on</strong>e in the<br />

proto-language and to be in complementary distributi<strong>on</strong> with an article marking all other nouns.<br />

Their interpretati<strong>on</strong> as archaic noun class markers is not impossible (even if it cannot be yet<br />

regarded as sufficiently proved).


Nasal Noun Class Prefixes in <strong>Bantu</strong>:<br />

C<strong>on</strong>siderati<strong>on</strong>s from Bantoid and Cross-River languages<br />

John R. Watters, SIL <str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g> john_watters@sil.org<br />

The purpose of this study is to answer the questi<strong>on</strong>: Is it possible that nasal noun<br />

class prefixes found in <strong>Bantu</strong> were neither inherited from Proto Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go (Miehe 1991)<br />

WS1<br />

nor innovated within <strong>Bantu</strong> (Hyman 1980), but were instead inherited from Proto Bantoid-<br />

Cross, Proto-Bantoid, or some level within Bantoid that preceded <strong>Bantu</strong>?<br />

To answer this questi<strong>on</strong> the study will first c<strong>on</strong>sider evidence from Bantoid<br />

languages relative to the nasal noun class prefixes, and then c<strong>on</strong>sider evidence from the<br />

Cross River languages. Hyman (1980) did c<strong>on</strong>sider evidence from some Bantoid languages<br />

outside <strong>Bantu</strong> in c<strong>on</strong>cluding that nasal noun prefixes were a <strong>Bantu</strong> innovati<strong>on</strong>. The evidence<br />

that Hyman used will be revisited and expanded up<strong>on</strong> as much as possible.<br />

This study will also benefit from a more elaborate understanding of Bantoid than<br />

was available thirty years ago. This understanding comes from 1) recent lexicostatistical<br />

studies regarding the internal classificati<strong>on</strong> of Bantoid languages (Pir<strong>on</strong> 1995, 1997, and<br />

Grollemund (2012), 2) the plausible proposal that the Bantoid languages form a unit with<br />

the Cross-River languages (Williams<strong>on</strong> and Blench 2000), and 3)the implicati<strong>on</strong>s from a<br />

study of the distributi<strong>on</strong> of tense-aspect systems within Bantoid languages (Watters 2012).<br />

Grollemund, Rebecca. 2012. Nouvelles approaches en classificati<strong>on</strong>: applicati<strong>on</strong> aux langues<br />

bantu du nord-ouest. Thèse pour Docteur en Sciences du Langage, Université Lumière<br />

Ly<strong>on</strong> 2.<br />

Hyman, Larry M. 1980. Reflecti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> the nasal classes in <strong>Bantu</strong>. In Hyman (1980a), 179-<br />

210.<br />

Miehe, Gudrun. 1991. Die Präfixnasale im Benue-C<strong>on</strong>go und im Kwa. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.<br />

Pir<strong>on</strong>, Pascale. 1995. Identificati<strong>on</strong> lexicostatistique des groupes bantoïdes stables. Journal<br />

of West African <strong>Languages</strong> 25.2:3-39.<br />

Pir<strong>on</strong>, Pascale. 1997. Classificati<strong>on</strong> interne du groupe Bantoid. 3 vols. Munich, Newcastle:<br />

LINCOM Europa.<br />

Watters, John R. 2012. Towards the rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> of the tense-aspect-mood (TAM) system<br />

in early Bantoid, with particular attenti<strong>on</strong> to the category “tense”. Paper presented<br />

at the Proto Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go C<strong>on</strong>gress, Paris, September 2012.<br />

Williams<strong>on</strong>, K. and R. Blench. 2000. Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go. In B. Heine and D. Nurse eds., African<br />

<strong>Languages</strong>. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 1-41


Can’t express ‘3 days ago’ anymore! Loss of P3 in Bemba<br />

Nancy C. Kula, University of Essex, nckula@essex.ac.uk<br />

Sharman (1956) describes Bemba as having 4 pasts and 3 future tenses as follows: P1<br />

for an immediate past; P2 for a past of today; P3 for a recent past of within a few days<br />

ago; and P4 for a remote past. The future is almost similarly symmetrical but lacks the<br />

equivalent of P3 and instead distinguishes an F1 for immediate future, F2 for a future<br />

of today and F3 for a future after today. This paper discusses the loss of P3 within this<br />

system. The table below shows the morphological markers including c<strong>on</strong>joint and<br />

disjoint forms w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> relevant.<br />

TENSE CONJ DISJ CONJ/DISJ<br />

P1 -á- -a -áa- -a F1 -alaa- -a<br />

P2 -ácí- -a F2 -lée- -a/-lee- -a<br />

P3<br />

P4<br />

-á-<br />

-a-<br />

-ile<br />

-ile<br />

-álii-<br />

-alí-<br />

-a<br />

-ile<br />

F3 -ka- -a<br />

The Bemba tense system is currently undergoing a change that is resulting the loss of<br />

P3 which is now hardly used by speakers both in the Copperbelt and the Northern<br />

Provinces. P3 was used to refer to a past bey<strong>on</strong>d today but less than a week ago i.e. a<br />

recent past bey<strong>on</strong>d today. One notable fact about P3 is its similarity in morphological<br />

form with P4 with the <strong>on</strong>ly difference in the c<strong>on</strong>joint form being <strong>on</strong>e of t<strong>on</strong>e w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as<br />

the disjoint form also differs in its ending. One explanati<strong>on</strong> for the loss of P3 is in this<br />

respect as the result of t<strong>on</strong>al neutralisati<strong>on</strong> rendering P3 and P4 indistinct. With a<br />

high-t<strong>on</strong>ed verb and subject marker, for example, P3 and P4 are <strong>on</strong>ly distinguished by<br />

a downstep which with downdrift in P3 is further neutralised: P3: bá-á-lásh-ílé [2SM-<br />

P3-throw-P3] vs. P4: bá -á-!lásh-ílé [2SM-P4-throw-P4] for ‘they threw (at)’.<br />

Seen from the Botne (2012) cognitive perspective, the Bemba tense system<br />

can be analysed as having P1 and P2 (as well as F1 and F2) in the P-Domain with<br />

P3/P4 and F3 <strong>on</strong> different D-domains. This reas<strong>on</strong>ing is motivated by the fact that P1<br />

and P2 both refer to a past of within today, parallel with F1 and F2 referring to futures<br />

within today. The time domain of today is c<strong>on</strong>trasted with time after today. For the<br />

future this coincides with <strong>on</strong>e form (F3) while for the past this coincides with two<br />

forms that are minimally distinct both in terms of form and functi<strong>on</strong>. Thus in usage it<br />

is noted that P4 can be used for all events after today and in this sense has begun to<br />

overlap with P3 with which it is adjacent in the same domain. This then creates a<br />

parallel representati<strong>on</strong> with F3 which <strong>on</strong>ly has <strong>on</strong>e form for after today. This provides<br />

an explanati<strong>on</strong> for why P3 is being lost. Furthermore the disjoint form of P3 is also<br />

being partially lost, at least its t<strong>on</strong>al aspect so that an alternative P4 (disjoint) form is<br />

now also used: -alí- -a, i.e. with an -a ending. This means that while the specific<br />

functi<strong>on</strong> of P3 has been lost the forms of P4 have been expanded from two to three<br />

retaining the unique ending of the lost P3. P4 is thus now expressed by -a- -ile; -alí- -<br />

ile; and -alí- -a. These changes are clearly intertwined with the now ph<strong>on</strong>ologized<br />

c<strong>on</strong>joint-disjoint system and this paper will dem<strong>on</strong>strate that Botne’s (2012) model<br />

provides sufficient insight to capture the interacti<strong>on</strong> between ph<strong>on</strong>ological change,<br />

paradigm uniformity and tense-aspect evoluti<strong>on</strong> in Bemba that explains the functi<strong>on</strong><br />

merger seen between P3 and P4 with some form retenti<strong>on</strong> of P3. Although P1/P2 and<br />

F1/F2 reside <strong>on</strong> the same domain owing to their shared general time span (with<br />

adjacent time regi<strong>on</strong>s in the same domain) no merger is observed in these cases as<br />

their distributi<strong>on</strong> in the model creates a parallelism between the pasts and futures.<br />

Sharman, J.C. 1956. The tabulati<strong>on</strong> of tenses in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages (Bemba: Northern Rhodesia). Africa<br />

26: 29-46.<br />

WS2


Toward an understanding of TAM in Makaa verbal c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s<br />

ABSTRACT<br />

Makaa (A 83) is a Narrow <strong>Bantu</strong> language spoken in Camero<strong>on</strong>, precisely in the upper<br />

Ny<strong>on</strong>g Divisi<strong>on</strong> of the Eastern regi<strong>on</strong> (Messamena, Ab<strong>on</strong>g-Mbang, Doume, Nguelemendouka<br />

subdivisi<strong>on</strong>s) and in the Center Regi<strong>on</strong>, in the Ny<strong>on</strong>g and Mfoumou Divisi<strong>on</strong> (Ak<strong>on</strong>olinga<br />

and Endom). It counts four major dialects viz: Mbwanz, Bebend, Shikunda and Besep and it<br />

is spoken by about 110 000 people (Crystal 2010:476).<br />

The present paper attempts an in-depth examinati<strong>on</strong> of TAM in Makaa verbal<br />

c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s with the aim of elucidating curiosities I came across since 2004, year I started<br />

working <strong>on</strong> the subject language.<br />

Literature available <strong>on</strong> Makaa c<strong>on</strong>fined in Heath, T<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>sa (2003), Heath, Daniel<br />

(1991), Heath and Heath (1996, 1998, 2000); Hews<strong>on</strong> (2010) reveals that Makaa distinguishes<br />

five tenses, namely, distant past (P2) /á /; recent past (P1) /ámə̀/; present (Po) /ø/; near future<br />

F1) /é/ and distant future (F2) /bá/. However, following an intuiti<strong>on</strong> from Ibirahim (2007)<br />

and (2009), and relying <strong>on</strong> additi<strong>on</strong>al data, I suggest that instead of five tenses, Makaa counts<br />

seven tenses. Three past and three future tenses nicely symmetrical in additi<strong>on</strong> to a present<br />

tense. Heath’s anterior aspect mə́ is included in my list of tenses as P1. Her P1 and P2<br />

becoming my (P2) and (P3) respectively. I propose an additi<strong>on</strong>al remote future (F3) /é bá/.<br />

Sec<strong>on</strong>dly, I further Teresa Heath’s (2003) and Daniel Heath’s (1991) analyses <strong>on</strong><br />

Aspect and mood in Makaa. Relying <strong>on</strong> the analysis of some intriguing verbal c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s, I<br />

show that Makaa distinguishes at least seven aspects. Thus, In additi<strong>on</strong> to the three-way<br />

aspectual distincti<strong>on</strong> in Makaa as proposed by Heath and Heath, perfective (zero marked ø-),<br />

progressive (ŋgə̀), and habitual or iterative (d ̀); I propose the persistive ná, the anterior mú,<br />

the inceptive wál/zə̀, the completive ʃîn. Moreso, I show that Makaa makes use of three<br />

varieties of reduplicati<strong>on</strong> viz: partial reduplicati<strong>on</strong>, total reduplicati<strong>on</strong> and triplicati<strong>on</strong> to<br />

denote certain aspects namely: progressive and repetitive.<br />

WS2<br />

A study of mood in Makaa reveals that the progressive aspect and the habitual marker<br />

derive rather from the verbs d ́lə́ (to be used to) and ŋgə̀lə́ (to be in the process of) which<br />

c<strong>on</strong>text of occurrence is restricted nowadays to imperative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s or infinitival clauses.


Temporal domains, temporal dimensi<strong>on</strong>ality, and narrative management in Yeyi and Nalu<br />

WS2<br />

Frank Seidel, University of Florida, frank.zidle@gmail.com<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> languages, and many other African languages, are characterized by the use of a specialized marker to<br />

indicate narrative sequence. Grammarians employ variant terminology that ranges from narrative, c<strong>on</strong>secutive, to<br />

sequential tense to describe these verb tenses. Carls<strong>on</strong> (1992) noticed the frequent correlati<strong>on</strong> of this type of<br />

narrative morphology with simultaneous adopti<strong>on</strong> for ‘subjunctive’, ‘injunctive’, ‘optative’ etc. functi<strong>on</strong>s. Several<br />

attempts at explaining this have been put forward from Carls<strong>on</strong>’s “reducti<strong>on</strong> in finiteness” through Robert’s (1992,<br />

2010) subsumati<strong>on</strong> under the c<strong>on</strong>cept of ‘aoriste’ or ‘null tense’ to Cover’s (2010) argumentati<strong>on</strong> for a modal<br />

interpretati<strong>on</strong> of narrative markers in Badiaranke.<br />

What is often not noticed is the flipside of this behavior in languages that employ this type of morphology. As an<br />

excepti<strong>on</strong> to this, Cover (2010:106ff) noticed that in Badiaranke, an Atlantic language of West Africa, morphology<br />

indicating perfective type semantics cannot be used in c<strong>on</strong>secutive taxis. Similar phenomena were noticed in<br />

Yeyi (<strong>Bantu</strong>) and Nalu (Atlantic). In fact, relating events that are obviously in sequence with this type of<br />

morphology was perceived as inco<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>nt. While both languages exhibit temporal encoding that seems to be<br />

much easier to deal with using Botne and Kershner’s (2008) cognitive model rather than employing more<br />

traditi<strong>on</strong>al ways of looking at linguistic time, the fact that predicates marked by past (perfective) type morphology<br />

cannot be employed to indicate a sequence of events seems to escape ready explanati<strong>on</strong> using this model.<br />

In the case of both Nalu and Yeyi it seems that the verb tenses are adopted in a ‘create and then elaborate’<br />

pattern (cf. Dinsmore 1992). A past temporal domain is first created and then ‘filled in’ with events. In other<br />

words, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is str<strong>on</strong>g evidence that in Yeyi as well as Nalu a sequence of events is not c<strong>on</strong>strued as a set of<br />

clearly bounded sequential events but rather as a clearly bounded and ‘dimensi<strong>on</strong>alized’ past temporal domain<br />

which c<strong>on</strong>tains events whose boundedness is left for the c<strong>on</strong>text to be determined.<br />

The temporal dimensi<strong>on</strong>ality c<strong>on</strong>tained in perfective semantics as discussed by Waugh and M<strong>on</strong>ville Burst<strong>on</strong><br />

(1986) can deliver a variety of textual functi<strong>on</strong>s indicating foregrounded, (rarely) backgrounded, and sequential<br />

events. In the case of Nalu and Yeyi it precludes c<strong>on</strong>secutivity in most situati<strong>on</strong>s and is used in complementary<br />

distributi<strong>on</strong> with narrative tenses to create narrative ‘macro events’ similar but not c<strong>on</strong>gruent to what Wolfsohn<br />

(1982) calls events. It is in this way that they provide narrative structure.<br />

Some aspectual noti<strong>on</strong>s have been incorporated into Botne and Kershner’s model using the c<strong>on</strong>cept of tenor<br />

relati<strong>on</strong>ships, but little is said about the structure of the temporal spaces (or domains) created in the past. This<br />

paper is an attempt at incorporating Waugh and M<strong>on</strong>ville Burst<strong>on</strong>’s c<strong>on</strong>cept of temporal dimensi<strong>on</strong>ality into Botne<br />

and Kershner’s model using examples from Yeyi and Nalu. The aim <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is to make this model more adaptable<br />

for the use of analyzing both temporal referential functi<strong>on</strong>s as well as textual functi<strong>on</strong>s of tense-aspect<br />

morphology.<br />

References:<br />

Botne, Robert & Tiffany L. Kershner. 2008. Tense and cognitive systems: <strong>on</strong> the organizati<strong>on</strong> of tense/aspect<br />

systems in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages and bey<strong>on</strong>d. Cognitive Linguistics 19.145–218.<br />

Cover, Rebecca T. 2010. Aspect, Modality, and Tense in Badiaranke. (Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, University of<br />

California, Berkeley).<br />

Dinsmore, John. 1991. Partiti<strong>on</strong>ed Representati<strong>on</strong>s. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Press.<br />

Robert, Stéphane. 1995. Aoristique et mode subordinatif: liens entre aspect et prédicati<strong>on</strong>. In: J. Bouscaren, J.-J.<br />

Franckel & S. Robert (eds), Langues et langage. Problèmes et rais<strong>on</strong>nement en linguistique (Mélanges offerts à<br />

Antoine Culioli). Linguistique Nouvelle. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France :373-389.<br />

Robert, Stéphane. 2010. Clause chaining and c<strong>on</strong>jugati<strong>on</strong>s in Wolof. In: I. Bril (ed.), Clause hierarchy and Clause<br />

linking: the Syntax and pragmatics interface, (Studies in Language Compani<strong>on</strong> Series 121). Amsterdam, New<br />

York: Benjamins:469–498.<br />

Waugh, Linda and M<strong>on</strong>ique M<strong>on</strong>ville Burst<strong>on</strong> 1986. Aspect and discourse functi<strong>on</strong>: The French simple past in<br />

Newspaper Usage. Language, 62: 846-877.<br />

Wolfs<strong>on</strong>, Nessa. 1982. The C<strong>on</strong>versati<strong>on</strong>al Historical Present in American English Narrative, (Topics in<br />

Sociolinguistics 1). Dordrecht: Reidel?Cinnams<strong>on</strong>, N.J.: Foris.


Persistence and Remoteness in the <strong>Bantu</strong> tense<br />

Silvester R<strong>on</strong> Simango<br />

Rhodes University, South Africa<br />

Abstract<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> languages are well known for the robustness of their tense systems, with some<br />

languages endowed with up to ten or more tenses – each tense presumably<br />

representing a specific area <strong>on</strong> the timeline. This paper explores the manner in<br />

which <strong>Bantu</strong> tenses encode degrees of remoteness and seeks to show that certain<br />

properties associated with <strong>Bantu</strong> tenses do not directly relate to degrees of<br />

remoteness. C<strong>on</strong>sider, as a starting point the expressi<strong>on</strong> of a past situati<strong>on</strong> in<br />

Babanki. In this language t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are no less than four ways of expressing the sense<br />

c<strong>on</strong>veyed by the sentence in (1).<br />

(1) Maureen closed the door<br />

(a) mòrín ə̀ yì chíʔ ə̀-chʉ̀ ə̀ ø-ŋgə̀ŋ<br />

(b) mòrín ə̀ yî chíʔ ə̀-chʉ̀ ə̀ ø-ŋgə̀ŋ<br />

(c) mòrín ə̀ tə̀ chíʔ ə̀-chʉ̀ ə̀ ø-ŋgə̀ŋ<br />

(d) mòrín ə̀ tə̂ chíʔ ə̀-chʉ̀ ə̀ ø-ŋgə̀ŋ<br />

Gloss: Maureen SM PST close c3-mouth AM c9-house<br />

The choice between the four forms depends <strong>on</strong> (i) how far removed the event is<br />

situated from utterance time and (ii) whether at utterance time the door is (or is<br />

assumed to be) closed or is (or assumed to be) open. If the event occurred <strong>on</strong> the<br />

day of utterance then either (a) or (b) would be used. However, if the event<br />

occurred the day before utterance time then either (c) or (d) would be used. Now, if<br />

at utterance time, the door is (or is assumed to be) closed then either (a) or (c)<br />

would be used. However, if at utterance time the door is (or is assumed to be) open<br />

then either (b) or (d) would be used. Thus what look like four different tense forms<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly pick out two distinct temporal points, but this is coupled with asserti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

regarding whether or not the effects of the said events persist at the time of<br />

utterance. These differences in meaning have sometimes been mistaken to all<br />

represent different degrees of remoteness in the tense systems of <strong>Bantu</strong> languages.<br />

This paper seeks to dem<strong>on</strong>strate that the patterns observed <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are widespread in<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong>: in additi<strong>on</strong> to Babanki, data is drawn from Lubukusu, Limbum, ciNsenga,<br />

Chichewa, and isiXhosa. The paper also argues that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is cross-linguistic<br />

variati<strong>on</strong> within <strong>Bantu</strong> with respect to (i) the precisi<strong>on</strong> with which temporal<br />

boundaries are marked by means of tense and (ii) the degree of flexibility in the use<br />

of the various tenses.<br />

WS2


Impact of Late Holocene Palaeoclimatic Changes <strong>on</strong> the <strong>Bantu</strong> Expansi<strong>on</strong>:<br />

A Multidisciplinary View<br />

Bernard Clist (Ghent University)<br />

Koen Bostoen (Ghent University)<br />

Charles Doumenge (CIRAD – Université de M<strong>on</strong>tpellier 2)<br />

Jean-Marie Hombert (DDL-Université Ly<strong>on</strong> 2)<br />

Rebecca Grollemund (University of Reading)<br />

Joseph K<strong>on</strong>i Muluwa (Ghent University)<br />

Jean Maley (IRD – Université de M<strong>on</strong>tpellier 2)<br />

Central-African vegetati<strong>on</strong> history is characterized by important changes of forest cover and compositi<strong>on</strong>. Global climatic<br />

changes throughout the Pleistocene and the Holocene had a major impact <strong>on</strong> flora distributi<strong>on</strong> in the tropics. During cold and<br />

dry periods, such as the Pleistocene glaciati<strong>on</strong>s, savanna vegetati<strong>on</strong> types were predominant in the Central-African<br />

landscape (Colyn et al. 1991; Maley 1996). Climate-induced vegetati<strong>on</strong> dynamics also had an important effect <strong>on</strong> prehistoric<br />

human settlement, migrati<strong>on</strong> and subsistence. Central-Africa is a key regi<strong>on</strong> for <strong>on</strong>e of the major demographic events in<br />

African prehistory (Pakendorf et al. 2011), i.e. the so-called ‘<strong>Bantu</strong> Expansi<strong>on</strong>’, which started not earlier than ca. 4000-5000<br />

BP from a homeland in the Nigerian-Camero<strong>on</strong>ian borderland (Blench 2006: 134, 136; Nurse and Philipps<strong>on</strong> 2003: 164;<br />

Vansina 1995: 52).<br />

This rapid expansi<strong>on</strong> of <strong>Bantu</strong> speech communities over large parts of sub-Saharan Africa has fascinated generati<strong>on</strong>s of<br />

scholars from a wide variety of disciplines. Linguists, archaeologists, palynologists, molecular anthropologists and many<br />

more have debated <strong>on</strong> the driving forces behind the <strong>Bantu</strong> Expansi<strong>on</strong>. Two interc<strong>on</strong>nected factors that have received<br />

relatively little attenti<strong>on</strong> in this debate – certainly compared to agriculture and ir<strong>on</strong> producti<strong>on</strong> – are climate change and<br />

vegetati<strong>on</strong> dynamics.<br />

WS3<br />

As argued by Schwartz (1992, 2003), Maley (2001) and Oslisly (2001), the opening of the rain forest in the course of the first<br />

millennium BC may have given a boost to the migrati<strong>on</strong> of <strong>Bantu</strong>-speaking farming, pottery-making and ir<strong>on</strong>-producing<br />

populati<strong>on</strong>s into regi<strong>on</strong>s that had been more difficult to access until then. The situati<strong>on</strong> is probably more complex than<br />

previously thought: it is <strong>on</strong>ly after a first expansi<strong>on</strong> of villages without much influence from <strong>on</strong>going palaeoclimatic changes<br />

that the climate-induced emergence of more open landscapes, i.e. forest-savanna mosaics, may have facilitated the spread<br />

of ir<strong>on</strong> smelting through Central Africa (e.g. Clist 2006).<br />

In this paper, we focus <strong>on</strong> the questi<strong>on</strong> whether these Late Holocene palaeoclimatic changes in western Central-Africa<br />

indeed had an impact <strong>on</strong> the <strong>Bantu</strong> Expansi<strong>on</strong>, and we wish to do this from a multidisciplinary perspective. We wish to<br />

c<strong>on</strong>fr<strong>on</strong>t the results of earlier historical linguistic study <strong>on</strong> <strong>Bantu</strong> names for pi<strong>on</strong>eer tree species (Bostoen et al. forthcoming ),<br />

with evidence provided by archaeology, palynology and phytogeography.<br />

References<br />

Blench, R. 2006. Archaeology, Language and the African Past. Lanham: Altamira Press.<br />

Bostoen, K., R. Grollemund and J. K<strong>on</strong>i Muluwa. forthcoming. Climate-induced Vegetati<strong>on</strong> Dynamics and the <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

Expansi<strong>on</strong>: Evidence from <strong>Bantu</strong> Names for Pi<strong>on</strong>eer Trees (Elaeis guineensis, Canarium schweinfurthii and Musanga<br />

cecropioides). submitted to CR Geoscience:<br />

Clist, B. 2006. Mais où se s<strong>on</strong>t taillées nos pierres en Afrique Centrale entre 7.000 et 2.000 bp? In H.-P. Wotzka (ed),<br />

Grundlegungen. Beiträge zur europäischen und afrikanischen Archäologie für Manfred K.H. Eggert, 291-301. Tübingen :<br />

Francke Attempto Verlag GmbH and Co. KG.<br />

Colyn, M., A. Gautier-Hi<strong>on</strong> and W. Verheyen. 1991. A re-appraisal of the palaeoenvir<strong>on</strong>mental history in Central Africa:<br />

evidence for a major fluvial refuge in the Zaire Basin. Journal of Biogeography 18:<br />

Maley, J. 1996. The African rain forest – main characteristics of changes in vegetati<strong>on</strong> and climate from the Upper<br />

Cretaceous to the Quaternary. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. Secti<strong>on</strong> B. Biological Sciences 104: 31-<br />

73.<br />

Maley, J. 2001. The impact of arid phases <strong>on</strong> the African rain forest through geological history. In W. Weber, L.J.T. White, A.<br />

Vedder & L. Naught<strong>on</strong>-Treves (eds.), African Rain Forest Ecology and C<strong>on</strong>servati<strong>on</strong>. An Interdisciplinary Perspective,<br />

68-87. New Haven: Yale University Press.<br />

Nurse, D. and G. Philipps<strong>on</strong>. 2003. Towards a historical classificati<strong>on</strong> of the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. In D. Nurse & G. Philipps<strong>on</strong><br />

(eds.), The <strong>Bantu</strong> <strong>Languages</strong>, 164-181. L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>; New York: Routledge.<br />

Oslisly, R. 2001. The history of the human settlement in the middle Ogoué Valley Gab<strong>on</strong>. Implicati<strong>on</strong>s for the envir<strong>on</strong>ment. In<br />

W. Weber, L.J.T. White, A. Vedder & L. Naught<strong>on</strong>-Treves (eds.), African Rain Forest Ecology and C<strong>on</strong>servati<strong>on</strong>. An<br />

Interdisciplinary Perspective, 101-118. New Haven: Yale University Press.


WS3<br />

Pakendorf, B., K. Bostoen and C. de Filippo. 2011. Molecular Perspectives <strong>on</strong> the <strong>Bantu</strong> Expansi<strong>on</strong>: A Synthesis. Language<br />

Dynamics and Change 1: 50-88.<br />

Schwartz, D. 1992. Assèchement climatique vers 3000 B.P. et expansi<strong>on</strong> <strong>Bantu</strong> en Afrique centrale atlantique: quelques<br />

réflexi<strong>on</strong>. Bulletin de la Societé Géologique de France 163: 353-361.<br />

Schwartz, D. 2003, Changements climatiques holocènes en Afrique centrale. In A.Froment & J. Guffroy (eds), Peuplements<br />

anciens et actuels de des forêts tropicales (= Actes du séminaire-atelier Orléans 15-16 octobre 1998): 157-168. Paris :<br />

IRD Editi<strong>on</strong>s, Collecti<strong>on</strong> Colloques et Séminaires..<br />

Vansina, J. 1995. New Linguistic Evidence and the <strong>Bantu</strong> Expansi<strong>on</strong>. Journal of African History 36: 173-195.


An abstract for WS3: New Interdisciplinary perspectives <strong>on</strong> <strong>Bantu</strong> Expansi<strong>on</strong><br />

Cultural phylogeography of the <strong>Bantu</strong> Expansi<strong>on</strong><br />

Thomas E. Currie<br />

Human Evoluti<strong>on</strong>ary Ecology Group, Department of Anthropology, UCL, UK<br />

t.currie@ucl.ac.uk<br />

WS3<br />

T<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is disagreement about the routes taken by early populati<strong>on</strong>s speaking <strong>Bantu</strong> languages as they<br />

expanded to cover much of sub-Saharan Africa. Here I use lexical data and Bayesian phylogenetic<br />

methods to build trees showing the historical relati<strong>on</strong>ships between <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. We then explicitly<br />

map these trees <strong>on</strong>to geographical space in order to assess the most likely pathway of expansi<strong>on</strong> and<br />

test between dispersal scenarios. The results clearly support a scenario in which groups first moved<br />

south through the rainforest from a homeland somew<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> near the Nigeria-Camero<strong>on</strong> border. Emerging<br />

the other side <strong>on</strong>e branch moved south and west. Another branch moved towards the Great Lakes,<br />

eventually giving rise to the m<strong>on</strong>ophyletic clade of East <strong>Bantu</strong> languages that inhabit East and South-<br />

Eastern Africa. These analyses highlight the benefits that computati<strong>on</strong>al methods can have in making<br />

assumpti<strong>on</strong>s about classificati<strong>on</strong> schemes explicit, and providing quantitative assessments of competing<br />

ideas. I will discuss the role that these spatially-explicit phylogenies can play in testing further specific<br />

hypotheses about <strong>Bantu</strong> prehistory, as well as the general ecological processes involved in the<br />

diversificati<strong>on</strong> of human populati<strong>on</strong>s in to distinct ethnolinguistic groups.


New Bayesian <strong>Bantu</strong> phylogeny<br />

Rebecca Grollemund 1 (r.b.grollemund@reading.ac.uk), Sim<strong>on</strong> Branford 1 (s.j.branford@reading.ac.uk),<br />

Andrew Meade 1 (a.meade@reading.ac.uk), Mark Pagel 1 (m.pagel@reading.ac.uk)<br />

1 Evoluti<strong>on</strong>ary Biology Group, University of Reading<br />

During the past few years, several classificati<strong>on</strong>s of <strong>Bantu</strong> languages have been established involving<br />

different methods and leading in part to different results. The study c<strong>on</strong>ducted by Bastin, Coupez and<br />

Mann (1999), based <strong>on</strong> lexicostatistics and the study of 500 languages has divided the <strong>Bantu</strong> area<br />

into four groups: <strong>Bantu</strong> Mbam‐Bubi, North‐Western <strong>Bantu</strong>, <strong>Bantu</strong> Central‐Western and <strong>Bantu</strong> East‐<br />

Southern. More recently, new sophisticated statistical methods adapted from the biological field<br />

have been used in linguistics to produce phylogenetic trees. Holden (2002), Holden and Gray (2006)<br />

and Rexová, Bastin, and Frynta (2006) have proposed classificati<strong>on</strong>s of <strong>Bantu</strong> languages based <strong>on</strong><br />

phylogenetic methods (i.e. distance based methods, parsim<strong>on</strong>y and Bayesian methods). However,<br />

these three classificati<strong>on</strong>s are all based <strong>on</strong> Bastin, Coupez and Mann’s (1999) data: use of the same<br />

languages and the same cognacy judgment (based <strong>on</strong> the principle of resemblance).<br />

The main objective of this study is to propose a new classificati<strong>on</strong> of <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. This work is<br />

based <strong>on</strong> the study of 200 words bel<strong>on</strong>ging to the basic vocabulary documented in 400 <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages covering the entire <strong>Bantu</strong>‐speaking area (z<strong>on</strong>es A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, R and<br />

S). In order to establish our classificati<strong>on</strong>, we have identified for each word the cognate sets (the<br />

cognacy judgment was made by applying the comparative method). In order to infer our tree, we<br />

have used advanced computati<strong>on</strong>al phylogenetic methods. We applied to our data a likelihood<br />

model of lexical evoluti<strong>on</strong> (that allows different rates of evoluti<strong>on</strong> for the words studied) and<br />

Bayesian inference of phylogeny (using Markov chain M<strong>on</strong>te Carlo ‐MCMC) with a relaxed clock<br />

dating methods, which provides us with a topology and date estimates for all nodes.<br />

The new classificati<strong>on</strong> will be analysed and discuss during our presentati<strong>on</strong>. In additi<strong>on</strong>, the results<br />

will be interpreted in relati<strong>on</strong> with the <strong>Bantu</strong> migrati<strong>on</strong> (proposal of new migrati<strong>on</strong> paths).<br />

References<br />

WS3<br />

Bastin, Y., Coupez, A. & Mann, M. 1999. C<strong>on</strong>tinuity and divergence in the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages:<br />

perspectives from a lexicostatistic study, Tervuren, Musée Royal de l’Afrique Centrale (MRAC),<br />

Annales, Série in‐8°, Sciences humaines 162, 225 pp.<br />

Grollemund, R. 2012. Nouvelles approches en classificati<strong>on</strong>: Applicati<strong>on</strong> aux langues bantu du<br />

Nord‐Ouest. Thèse en Sciences du Langage, Université Lumière Ly<strong>on</strong> 2, 550 pp.<br />

Holden, C. J. 2002. <strong>Bantu</strong> language trees reflect the spread of farming across sub‐Saharan<br />

Africa: a maximum‐parsim<strong>on</strong>y analysis. Proceedings of the Royal Society of L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>. Series B:<br />

Biological Sciences, 269:1493, pp. 793‐799.<br />

Holden, C. J. & Gray, R. D. 2006. Rapid radiati<strong>on</strong>, borrowing and dialect c<strong>on</strong>tinua in the <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages. In: Forster, P. & Renfrew, C. (eds.) Phylogenetic Methods and the Prehistory of <strong>Languages</strong>.<br />

Cambridge: MacD<strong>on</strong>ald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 19‐31<br />

Huelsenbeck, J. P., R<strong>on</strong>quist, F., Nielsen, R. & Bollback, J. P. 2001. Bayesian inference of<br />

phylogeny and its impact <strong>on</strong> evoluti<strong>on</strong>ary biology. Science 294, pp. 2310‐2314.<br />

Rexová, K., Frynta, D. & Zrzavý, J. 2005. Cladistic analysis of languages: Indo‐European<br />

classificati<strong>on</strong> based <strong>on</strong> lexicostatistical data. Cladistics, 19:2, 120‐127 pp.<br />

Pagel, M., Atkins<strong>on</strong>, Q. D. & Meade, A. 2007. Frequency of word‐use predicts rates of lexical<br />

evoluti<strong>on</strong> throughout Indo‐European history. Nature, 449:7163, pp. 717‐720.


For WS 3<br />

Folk tax<strong>on</strong>omic categories and noun class allocati<strong>on</strong><br />

Karsten Legère<br />

Institut für Afrikawissenschaften, Universität Wien<br />

karsten.legere@univie.ac.at<br />

WS3<br />

The presentati<strong>on</strong> discusses the categories applied in establishing folk tax<strong>on</strong>omic hierarchies in the<br />

plant kingdom and the latter’s morpho-syntactic reflecti<strong>on</strong> in selected <strong>Bantu</strong> languages from various<br />

z<strong>on</strong>es. Own research data illustrates the situati<strong>on</strong> in Guthrie’s G z<strong>on</strong>e (e.g. Dowe, Swahili, Vidunda)<br />

as well as in z<strong>on</strong>es K and R (Nd<strong>on</strong>ga/Kwanyama, Kwangali, Lozi). Reference is also made to authors<br />

who c<strong>on</strong>tributed ethnobotanic informati<strong>on</strong> about categories traced in z<strong>on</strong>e A, B and E. Some relevant<br />

aspects are sketched below:<br />

From a c<strong>on</strong>temporary perspective the lexical equivalent of the unique beginner ‘PLANT’ being the<br />

most inclusive unit in the plant kingdom exists in some <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, but it is rarely understood in<br />

this capacity. Together with other lexical items (e.g. tree, bush/shrub, grass) the term ‘plant’ (i.e. often<br />

meaning something which is planted) is mainly found at the life form level that is in some sample<br />

languages further specified in habitat related sub-life forms (w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> a m<strong>on</strong>omial life form term is<br />

modified by e.g. an adnominal c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>). The noun class allocati<strong>on</strong> of a variety of life form terms<br />

is dem<strong>on</strong>strated with TREE being frequently identified in class 3/4. However, judging from languages<br />

like Kwangali and Vidunda, this singular/plural pairing has been replaced by alternate versi<strong>on</strong>s. This is<br />

also the case at the generics level which portrays, <strong>on</strong> the <strong>on</strong>e hand, a noun class allocati<strong>on</strong> similar to<br />

the life form term, as well as, <strong>on</strong> the other hand, much variati<strong>on</strong>. In the case of TREE generics<br />

Kwangali includes class 7/8 (which has obviously become an alternative of class 3/10), 14/6, and even<br />

1a/2a. The modificati<strong>on</strong>s of the noun class allocati<strong>on</strong> at the life form and generics levels or the lack of<br />

the unique beginner category are important issues that need to be further studied in z<strong>on</strong>es other than<br />

those covered in the presentati<strong>on</strong>, as well as from a Proto-<strong>Bantu</strong> perspective.


Remarques sur l’introducti<strong>on</strong> du ‘lexique spécialisé’ dans quelques langues<br />

chasseurs-cueilleurs du domaine bantu<br />

WS3<br />

L‟objectif de cette étude est d‟examiner l‟introducti<strong>on</strong> du „lexique spécialisé‟, dans les<br />

langues chasseurs-cueilleurs qui se situent dans la z<strong>on</strong>e bantu (Afrique centrale). D‟après<br />

Bahuchet (2012), aucune famille linguistique „pygmée‟ n‟est attestée (“No Pygmy linguistic<br />

family exists”), dans ce sens que les langues de ces derniers s<strong>on</strong>t toujours reliées à d‟autres<br />

langues, qui elles-mêmes s<strong>on</strong>t parlées par des populati<strong>on</strong>s d‟agriculteurs. Deux familles de<br />

langues s<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>cernées : la famille Niger-C<strong>on</strong>go et la famille Nilo-Saharienne. Ce scénario<br />

linguistique semble être très différent de celui des chasseurs d‟Afrique orientale ou d‟Afrique<br />

australe. Ainsi, des études récentes <strong>on</strong>t mis en évidence que des langues comme le hadza, le<br />

sandawe, le kwadi ou le hoan c<strong>on</strong>stituent des isolats linguistiques (cf. Sands & Güldemann<br />

2008 ; Sands 2009).<br />

La présente étude repose sur l‟examen du „lexique spécialisé‟ de six groupes de chasseurscueilleurs<br />

qui, pour la plupart, parlent des langues bantu : Koya, B<strong>on</strong>go, Baka, Aka, Gyeli (ou<br />

Kola), Twa. Elle s‟appuie sur les lexiques suivants : mammifères, oiseaux, reptiles, poiss<strong>on</strong>s,<br />

insectes, arbres, plantes comestibles, sais<strong>on</strong>s et éléments, parenté. Les d<strong>on</strong>nées <strong>on</strong>t été<br />

recueillies dans le cadre du projet CLHASS.<br />

L‟étude a mis en évidence la grande hétérogénéité du „lexique spécialisé‟ dans les langues<br />

chasseurs-cueilleurs d‟Afrique centrale. Elle m<strong>on</strong>tre aussi que la plupart des chasseurscueilleurs<br />

<strong>on</strong>t dû emprunter ces lexiques spécialisés à leurs voisins <strong>Bantu</strong>, y compris les<br />

termes de la flore et de la faune. Cependant, il n‟est pas exclu que certaines langues bantu <strong>on</strong>t<br />

pu de leur côté emprunter du lexique à certains chasseurs-cueilleurs, qui eux-mêmes parlaient<br />

peut-être des langues très différentes. Par ailleurs, elle c<strong>on</strong>firme le lien entre les chasseurscueilleurs<br />

Aka (<strong>Bantu</strong>) et Baka (Oubanguiens).<br />

L‟hétérogénéité de la nomenclature suggère néanmoins que tous ces groupes de chasseurscueilleurs<br />

pourraient davantage se caractériser par leur diversité plutôt que par leur unité.<br />

Nos d<strong>on</strong>nées linguistiques s<strong>on</strong>t d<strong>on</strong>c en c<strong>on</strong>cordance avec les d<strong>on</strong>nées récentes obtenues aussi<br />

bien en anthropologie (Bahuchet 2012) qu‟en génétique des populati<strong>on</strong>s (Verdu & Destro-<br />

Bisol 2012). Elles permettent de mieux cerner l‟histoire du peuplement bantu.


WS3<br />

Oral or Poster in WorkShop 3:<br />

Genomes of western and eastern Pygmies reveal early admixture with<br />

expanding <strong>Bantu</strong>s<br />

Etienne Patin 1 , Katie Siddle 1 , Hélène Quach 1 , Christine Harmant 1 , Guillaume Laval 1 , Noémie Becker 2 ,<br />

Sim<strong>on</strong> Gravel 3 , Béatrice Régnault 4 , Laure Lemée 4 , Jean-Marie Hombert 5 , Lolke Van der Veen 5 , Alain<br />

Froment 2 , Luis Barreiro 6 , Nathaniel J. Dominy 7 , George Perry 8 , Paul Verdu 2 , Evelyne Heyer 2 , Lluís<br />

Quintana-Murci 1<br />

1 Human Evoluti<strong>on</strong>ary Genetics, CNRS URA3012, Institut Pasteur, Paris, France; 2 Ecoanthropology and<br />

Ethnobiology, CNRS/MNHN/Université P7 UMR 5145, Paris, France; 3 Department of Genetics, Stanford<br />

University, Stanford, USA; 4 Genotyping Platform, Institut Pasteur, Paris, France; 5 Département de Dynamique<br />

du Langage, CNRS UMR 5596, Université Lumière-Ly<strong>on</strong> 2, Ly<strong>on</strong>, France; 6 Université de M<strong>on</strong>tréal, Centre de<br />

recherche CHU Sainte-Justine, M<strong>on</strong>tréal, Canada; 7 Anthropology department, Dartmouth college, Hanover,<br />

USA; 8 Department of Human Genetics, University of Chicago, Chicago, USA<br />

Hunter-gathering Pygmies and food-producing <strong>Bantu</strong> villagers have coexisted al<strong>on</strong>g the central<br />

African belt for hundreds of years. Their present-day complex relati<strong>on</strong>ships result from l<strong>on</strong>g-term<br />

socio-cultural and ec<strong>on</strong>omic exchanges. The degree at which these interacti<strong>on</strong>s impacted the history of<br />

admixture of each populati<strong>on</strong> group remains nevertheless largely unknown. To shed new light <strong>on</strong> these<br />

neglected aspects of the early African history, we genotyped <strong>on</strong>e milli<strong>on</strong> markers in the entire genome<br />

of a large sample of 327 individuals from eight Pygmy and n<strong>on</strong>-Pygmy <strong>Bantu</strong> populati<strong>on</strong>s of both<br />

western and eastern Africa. Populati<strong>on</strong> structure analyses revealed a clear isolati<strong>on</strong> between Pygmies<br />

and farmers, western and eastern Pygmies, and more surprisingly, between groups of eastern Pygmies.<br />

Despite str<strong>on</strong>g isolati<strong>on</strong> between hunter-gat<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>rs and farmers stemming from cultural taboos, our<br />

results clearly showed that genetic admixture has c<strong>on</strong>tinuously occurred between the two<br />

communities. We estimated that historical gene flow started as early as 4,000 years ago, c<strong>on</strong>comitant<br />

with the first <strong>Bantu</strong> expansi<strong>on</strong>s. Interestingly, the Pygmy populati<strong>on</strong>s who were first reached by<br />

expanding <strong>Bantu</strong>-speakers show today higher stature, and str<strong>on</strong>ger social integrati<strong>on</strong> and levels of<br />

admixture with neighboring farmers, with respect to other Pygmy groups. Our study provides the first<br />

genetic evidence that farmers’ expansi<strong>on</strong>s in Africa did not lead to the endangerment of autochth<strong>on</strong>ous<br />

hunter-gat<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>rs, but rather to the establishment of early genetic exchanges accompanying complex<br />

socio-cultural interacti<strong>on</strong>s.


The origin and genetic affiliati<strong>on</strong> of P30 languages<br />

Gérard Philipps<strong>on</strong>, INALCO, Paris _ gerard.philipps<strong>on</strong>@ish-ly<strong>on</strong>.cnrs.fr<br />

Rozenn Guérois, DDL, Université Ly<strong>on</strong> 2 _ rozennguerois@hotmail.com<br />

Starting from the early 80's certain c<strong>on</strong>siderati<strong>on</strong>s (mainly ph<strong>on</strong>ological) led various<br />

researchers to posit some sort of relati<strong>on</strong>ship between Makhuwa and the S30 languages of<br />

Southern Africa (Moehlig 1981; Louw & Finlays<strong>on</strong> 1991, etc.). The most forceful proposal<br />

was put forward by T. Jans<strong>on</strong> (1991-92), who examines in detail the ph<strong>on</strong>ological<br />

corresp<strong>on</strong>dences between the two sets of languages (particularly the excepti<strong>on</strong>al<br />

development *mb, *nd, *ŋg > p, t, k) and c<strong>on</strong>cludes to their genetic relati<strong>on</strong>ship 1 .<br />

Strangely enough, Jans<strong>on</strong> does not refer to Lobedu, although some data had been<br />

published by Tucker (1932). This language is particularly interesting since it shares with<br />

S30 languages the denasalizati<strong>on</strong> process, but not the devoicing (*mb, *nd, *ŋg > b, ɖ, g;<br />

see also Kotzé & Zerbian (2008) <strong>on</strong> the ph<strong>on</strong>ological system of Lobedu).<br />

Recent research c<strong>on</strong>ducted by <strong>on</strong>e of us (R. Guérois) <strong>on</strong> the hitherto very poorly<br />

known Cwabo language of Mozambique has yielded a c<strong>on</strong>siderable amount of ph<strong>on</strong>ological<br />

data <strong>on</strong> the language and thus shown that beside sharing with Lobedu the denasalizati<strong>on</strong>minus-devoicing<br />

evoluti<strong>on</strong>, it exhibits divergent reflexes of proto-<strong>Bantu</strong> items to a degree<br />

rarely encountered in other <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, apart from trade languages such as Lingala.<br />

We will thus endeavour to set out the tabular corresp<strong>on</strong>dences of Cwabo with the<br />

other <strong>Bantu</strong> languages of the wider regi<strong>on</strong> (Guthrie's z<strong>on</strong>es N, P and S) and then to propose<br />

a hypothesis about the possible presence of a "Sotho-Makhuwa" group in Southern Central<br />

Africa, its interacti<strong>on</strong>s with neighbouring groups and its ultimate expansi<strong>on</strong> to the various<br />

locati<strong>on</strong>s w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> it is found today. The specific relati<strong>on</strong>ship of Cwabo with its neighbouring<br />

languages will be examined in terms of what is known of its history since the Portuguese<br />

c<strong>on</strong>quest.<br />

References<br />

Jans<strong>on</strong>, T. 1991/1992. Southern <strong>Bantu</strong> and Makua. SUGIA, 12/13: 63-106<br />

Kotzé, A.E. & S. Zerbian. 2008. On the trigger of palatalizati<strong>on</strong> in the Sotho languages.<br />

Journal of African <strong>Languages</strong> and Linguistics 29(1): 1-28<br />

Louw, J. A. & R. Finlays<strong>on</strong>. 1990. Southern <strong>Bantu</strong> origins as represented by Xhosa and<br />

Tswana. South African Journal of African <strong>Languages</strong>, 10, 4: 401-410<br />

Moehlig, W.J.G. 1981. Stratificati<strong>on</strong> in the history of the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. SUGIA, 3: 251-<br />

316<br />

Tucker, A.N. 1932. Some little known dialects of SePedi, MSOS, 35<br />

1<br />

One could add the combinati<strong>on</strong> of the -ni locative suffix with a locative prefix (cl. 16, 17 or 18), which is<br />

unique to Makhuwa and S30 to the best of our knowledge. Cf. also Makxoa 'Westerners' in S30 languages.<br />

WS3<br />

1


Modelling <strong>Bantu</strong> dispersals: using spatial simulati<strong>on</strong>s to interpret a new radiocarb<strong>on</strong> database of<br />

early agricultural settlement in sub‐Saharan Africa.<br />

Thembi Russell 1 , Fabio Silva 2 and James Steele 1,2<br />

1 School of Geography, Archaeology & Envir<strong>on</strong>mental Studies, University of the Witwatersrand, Wits<br />

2050, South Africa<br />

2 Institute of Archaeology, University College L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>, 31‐34 Gord<strong>on</strong> Square, L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong> WC1H 0PY, UK.<br />

We report a new compilati<strong>on</strong> of radiocarb<strong>on</strong> dates from sites associated with the expansi<strong>on</strong> of<br />

farming societies in sub‐Saharan Africa. We use spatial statistics and simulati<strong>on</strong> modelling to<br />

rec<strong>on</strong>struct routes and rates of spread. We derive a set of modelled populati<strong>on</strong> phylogenies for<br />

alternative dispersal scenarios, which can be compared to cultural and linguistic phylogenies<br />

rec<strong>on</strong>structed from other data sources. We illustrate the potential of this approach by comparing<br />

our modelled dispersal histories (estimated from radiocarb<strong>on</strong> dates) to published <strong>Bantu</strong> language<br />

phylogenies.<br />

WS3


Tracking the <strong>Bantu</strong> migrati<strong>on</strong>s in time and place<br />

Søren Wichmann (Max Planck Institute for Evoluti<strong>on</strong>ary Anthropology, wichmann@eva.mpg.de)<br />

Rebecca Grollemund (Evoluti<strong>on</strong>ary Biology Group, University of Reading, r.b.grollemund@reading.ac.uk)<br />

In recent work by scholars associated with the Automated Similarity Judgment Program (ASJP), methods have been<br />

developed which allow for calculating dates for proto-languages with a margin of error of some ±29% (Holman et<br />

al. 2011), as well as for generating hypotheses about homelands of proto-languages (Wichmann et al. 2010). The<br />

input for these methods are measures of lexical similarity which are calculated from 40-item word lists through a<br />

versi<strong>on</strong> of the Levenshtein distance<br />

We are presently processing lexical data which will provide us with word lists of from 661of the 691 Bantoid<br />

languages listed in Ethnologue, to be analyzed for the presentati<strong>on</strong>. Presently we have results based <strong>on</strong> 361<br />

languages.<br />

These preliminary data indicate a 5040 BP data for Bantoid and a 3693 BP date for Narrow <strong>Bantu</strong>. The speakers<br />

of the latter and their descendants appear to remain more-or-less in situ in the Nigeria-Camero<strong>on</strong> border area for<br />

around a millennium after the break-up of Narrow <strong>Bantu</strong>, but then, during 2600-2000 BP, <strong>Bantu</strong> languages move<br />

rapidly and largely reach their current extent. Homelands during the period 3000-2000 BP are depicted <strong>on</strong> Fig. 1.<br />

Fig. 1. Homelands of proto-languages within Bantoid during 3000-2600 BP (black), 2600-2500 BP (gray), 2500-<br />

2250 BP (silver), 2250-2000 BP (white).<br />

WS3<br />

According to our results, the initial migrati<strong>on</strong>s out of the homeland happen during 2600-2500 BP. This nicely fits<br />

current hypotheses about the triggering effect of climatic changes around 2500 BP (Maley 2001, Bostoen et al.<br />

2012)<br />

Our current results also indicate an initial west-to-east migrati<strong>on</strong>, followed by successi<strong>on</strong>s of migrati<strong>on</strong> waves<br />

from west to south. In our presentati<strong>on</strong> we will add more detail to these general results and discuss them in the light<br />

of extra-linguistic evidence for the timing of language spreads within the <strong>Bantu</strong> group.<br />

References<br />

Bostoen, K, Grollemund, R., Muluwa, J. (to appear). Climate-induced vegetati<strong>on</strong> dynamics and the <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

expansi<strong>on</strong>: evidence from <strong>Bantu</strong> names for pi<strong>on</strong>eer trees (Elaeis guineensis, Canarium schweinfurthii and Musanga<br />

cecropioides). CR Geoscience.<br />

Holman, E. W., Brown, C. H., Wichmann, S., Müller, A., Velupillai, V., Hammarström, H., Sauppe, S., Jung, H.,<br />

Bakker, D. & Brown, P. 2011. Automated dating of the world’s language families based <strong>on</strong> lexical similarity.<br />

Current anthropology 52: 841-875.<br />

Maley, J. 2001. La destructi<strong>on</strong> catastrophique des forêts d’Afrique centrale survenue il y a envir<strong>on</strong> 2500 ans exerce<br />

encore une influence majeure sur la répartiti<strong>on</strong> actuelle des formati<strong>on</strong>s végétales. Systematics and Geography of<br />

Plants 71: 777-796.<br />

Wichmann, S., Muller, A. & Velupillai, V. 2010. Homelands of the world's language families: a quantitative<br />

approach. Diachr<strong>on</strong>ica, 27:2, pp. 247-276.


Tumaré Abiikwabé 1<br />

Exchange of Wisdom and Language between the Ikoma and the Datooga<br />

Lotta Aunio<br />

Department of World Cultures, University of Helsinki<br />

lotta.aunio@helsinki.fi<br />

WS4<br />

Ikoma is a Lacustrine <strong>Bantu</strong> language (JE45) spoken in the Mara Regi<strong>on</strong> (Western Tanzania) by<br />

approximately 19,000 speakers. 2 Datooga is a Southern Nilotic language, spoken in Central Tanzania<br />

but also in the Mara Regi<strong>on</strong> close to w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> Ikoma is spoken.<br />

The Ikoma and the Datooga have been in c<strong>on</strong>tact probably for a l<strong>on</strong>g time, practising exchange,<br />

intermarrying, and possibly even uniting in defending their regi<strong>on</strong> against other groups. In <strong>on</strong>e of the<br />

Ikoma stories, the Maasai kill the s<strong>on</strong> of the Datooga medicine man. The Datooga go to the Ikoma<br />

for help, and a Ikoma hero helps them to get a revenge, and, according to the story, to “finish the<br />

Maasai”.<br />

Ikoma shows several features that are not found in the other <strong>Bantu</strong> languages of the area, and thus an<br />

outside source is possible. For example, Ikoma has a complicated vowel harm<strong>on</strong>y system 3 in which,<br />

for example, stem ATR features induce height harm<strong>on</strong>y in noun class prefixes and verbal prefixes.<br />

On the other hand, +ATR feature is spread from +ATR suffixes to the verb stems. It is suggested<br />

already by Nurse & Rottland (1991: 175) 4 that the vowel harm<strong>on</strong>y systems of E40 languages have<br />

been induced by a Southern Nilotic language, but this is not discussed in Higgins (2011).<br />

Ikoma nominal t<strong>on</strong>e system has been discovered to be more pervasive than in the other <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages of the area. This specifically applies to nouns that have three or more stem syllables:<br />

These l<strong>on</strong>ger nouns have, in additi<strong>on</strong> to the expected t<strong>on</strong>e classes (i.e. t<strong>on</strong>eless or a H <strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>e of the<br />

stem syllables), a t<strong>on</strong>e class in which all the stem syllables are realized as H (called the “all H”<br />

pattern). Many of the nouns showing the “all H” pattern seem to be loan words from Datooga. Also,<br />

t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are more trisyllabic and l<strong>on</strong>ger nouns in Ikoma than in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages in general.<br />

In this paper I will discuss the c<strong>on</strong>tacts between the Ikoma and the Datooga and present possible<br />

influence of Datooga language <strong>on</strong> Ikoma prosodic systems. When borrowing words from Datooga<br />

have the Ikoma imitated the t<strong>on</strong>al patterns of Datooga words to such an extent that a new t<strong>on</strong>al class<br />

has been established in Ikoma? And could Datooga influence explain some of the peculiar features of<br />

Ikoma vowel harm<strong>on</strong>y?<br />

1 ‘Let us finish the Maasai!’<br />

2 Muzale, Henry R.T. and Josephat M. Rugemalira 2008. Researching and Documenting the <strong>Languages</strong> of Tanzania.<br />

Language Documentati<strong>on</strong> & C<strong>on</strong>servati<strong>on</strong> 2(1):68–108.<br />

3 Described in: Higgins, Holly Ann. 2011. Ikoma Vowel Harm<strong>on</strong>y: Ph<strong>on</strong>etics and ph<strong>on</strong>ology. MA thesis, Trinity<br />

Western University.<br />

4 Nurse, Derek & Franz Rottland 1991. S<strong>on</strong>jo: Descripti<strong>on</strong>, Classificati<strong>on</strong>, History. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika<br />

12/13: 171–289.


WS4<br />

Lexical and grammatical t<strong>on</strong>e interacti<strong>on</strong>s in Cuwabo (P34)<br />

Rozenn Guérois, DDL, Université Ly<strong>on</strong> 2 _ rozennguerois@hotmail.com<br />

Gérard Philipps<strong>on</strong>, INALCO, Paris _ gerard.philipps<strong>on</strong>@ish-ly<strong>on</strong>.cnrs.fr<br />

It is a well-known fact that Guthrie’s “Z<strong>on</strong>e P” languages generally lack c<strong>on</strong>trastive lexical t<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong><br />

verb radicals. Instead, grammatical t<strong>on</strong>e is assigned <strong>on</strong> the basis of tense/aspect/mood to privileged<br />

positi<strong>on</strong>s in the stem (Kisseberth & Odden, 2003). For instance in the Enahara dialect of Makhuwa<br />

(Van der Wal, 2009), the following positi<strong>on</strong>s are targeted: M(acro)S(tem) 1 1 , MS 2, Penult, Final<br />

and n<strong>on</strong>e. These sites for grammatical t<strong>on</strong>e docking are generally present even in Eastern <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages with lexical verbal t<strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>trast - apart from MS1 which would otherwise interfere with<br />

lexical t<strong>on</strong>e assignment 2 (cf. Kisseberth & Odden, 2003).<br />

The Cuwabo language (P34 in Guthrie’s classificati<strong>on</strong>), is to the best of our knowledge the <strong>on</strong>ly<br />

language in z<strong>on</strong>es P and N 3 to have retained a lexical c<strong>on</strong>trast <strong>on</strong> verb stems, as seen already in the<br />

infinitive olíma < CB *-dɩ̀m- ‘cultivate’ / órumá < CB *-dúm- ‘send’, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as Makhuwa has the<br />

same pattern for both: olíma / orúma.<br />

However, al<strong>on</strong>gside lexical t<strong>on</strong>es, the Cuwabo verb stem also exhibits the same processes of<br />

grammatical t<strong>on</strong>e assignment - including MS1 - as menti<strong>on</strong>ed for Makhuwa. The interacti<strong>on</strong><br />

between these different t<strong>on</strong>es gives rise to sometimes quite opaque situati<strong>on</strong>s. In case t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is no<br />

grammatical t<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong> the stem, the lexical t<strong>on</strong>e of the H-t<strong>on</strong>ed radical emerges, but <strong>on</strong> the Penult:<br />

ɖáń#zugunuwéla ‘I was turning for (sb.)’ / ɖáń#roromeliha ‘I was promising (sb.)’. Whenever the<br />

grammatical t<strong>on</strong>e docks <strong>on</strong> MS2, lexical t<strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>trasts are always neutralized 4 : kaɖi#zugúnúwelile<br />

‘I haven't turned for’ / kaɖi#rorómélihile ‘I haven't promised’. When stems with a L-t<strong>on</strong>ed radical<br />

appear with a H <strong>on</strong> MS1, however, the situati<strong>on</strong> with H-t<strong>on</strong>ed radicals is much more opaque. If an<br />

OM is present, the lexical H clearly shifts to the penult, as seen above, but the syllable immediately<br />

preceding the OM is always H (doubling <strong>on</strong> the OM itself); compare L kaɖini#múlíbelela ‘I d<strong>on</strong>'t<br />

swear to him/her’ and H kaɖiní#múgabuléla ‘I d<strong>on</strong>'t rape him/her’. But if no OM is present, a Ht<strong>on</strong>e<br />

plateau extends from the H pre-stem to the penult: kaɖiní#gábúléla ‘I d<strong>on</strong>'t rape’.<br />

Now the genetic positi<strong>on</strong> of Cuwabo is by no means clear: its ph<strong>on</strong>ology, morphology and<br />

lexic<strong>on</strong> are partly Makhuwa-like and partly N40-N30-like (a case in point is 1sg. subject prefix ɖi-<br />

as seen above, with Makhuwa-like denasalizati<strong>on</strong> - but without devoicing -, applied to the 1sg.<br />

subject prefix *ndi- found in e.g. Mak<strong>on</strong>de, Sh<strong>on</strong>a or the N40 languages, vs. Makhuwa ki- < *ŋgi.).<br />

We will argue that a clue to the complex nature of Cuwabo t<strong>on</strong>e is found in its “mixed language”<br />

status, and we will try to clarify its real genetic relati<strong>on</strong>ship to Makhuwa.<br />

References<br />

HYMAN, L.M. & A. MTENJE. 1999. N<strong>on</strong>-etymological High t<strong>on</strong>es in the Chichewa verb. Malawian<br />

Journal of Linguistics 1, p.121-156.<br />

KISSEBERTH Ch. & D. ODDEN. 2003. T<strong>on</strong>e. In Nurse & Philipps<strong>on</strong> (eds.) The <strong>Bantu</strong> <strong>Languages</strong>,<br />

L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>: Routledge, p. 59-70.<br />

MEEUSSEN, A.E. 1959. Essai de grammaire rundi. Tervuren: MRAC.<br />

ODDEN, D. 2003. Rufiji-Ruvuma (N10, P10-20). In Nurse & Philipps<strong>on</strong> (eds.) The <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

<strong>Languages</strong>, L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>: Routledge, p.529-544.<br />

NURSE, D. 1988. The diachr<strong>on</strong>ic background to the language communities of Southwestern<br />

Tanzania. SUGIA, 9 : 15-115.<br />

VAN DER WAL, J. 2009. Word order and informati<strong>on</strong> structure in Makhuwa-Enahara. Ph.D.<br />

Thesis. Leiden University, LOT, Utrecht.<br />

1 The macro-stem is the verb stem + the OM if t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is <strong>on</strong>e.<br />

2 Rundi (Meeussen 1959) excepti<strong>on</strong>ally has a grammatical H assigned to MS1 in a few forms, almost all of which have<br />

the future marker -zóo (in case the marker is t<strong>on</strong>eless -zoo-, no H appears).<br />

3 Guthrie’s N10 has been shown by Nurse (1988) to bel<strong>on</strong>g with P10 (“Rufiji-Ruvuma”, cf. Odden 2003) apart from<br />

N15 T<strong>on</strong>ga which bel<strong>on</strong>gs with N20. N20 and N40 languages are t<strong>on</strong>eless, N30 languages have a lexical H/L c<strong>on</strong>trast in<br />

verb radicals, which however exhibit no relati<strong>on</strong>ship to Comm<strong>on</strong> <strong>Bantu</strong> t<strong>on</strong>es (Hyman & Mtenje, 1999).<br />

4 Note that t<strong>on</strong>e doubling applies in Cuwabo, albeit with certain restricti<strong>on</strong>s, detailed in our talk.


The influence of language c<strong>on</strong>tact <strong>on</strong> <strong>Bantu</strong> prosodic systems<br />

Laura J. Downing (Göteborg) & Maarten Mous (Leiden)<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> languages have been in c<strong>on</strong>tact with n<strong>on</strong>-<strong>Bantu</strong> (and <strong>Bantu</strong>) neighbors<br />

for centuries, and c<strong>on</strong>tact has clearly influenced aspects of the grammar of many<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> languages. Theories of language c<strong>on</strong>tact assume a distincti<strong>on</strong> between<br />

influence from a n<strong>on</strong>-dominant source language in borrowing against influence from a<br />

dominant source language in situati<strong>on</strong>s of language shift. But this dichotomy does not<br />

make clear predicti<strong>on</strong>s for prosodic systems. Lexical borrowing with lexical t<strong>on</strong>e can<br />

easily influence the complexity of the lexical prosodic system. For example, Salm<strong>on</strong>s<br />

(1992: 56) has proposed that when t<strong>on</strong>al languages (like most <strong>Bantu</strong> languages are)<br />

come into c<strong>on</strong>tact with n<strong>on</strong>-t<strong>on</strong>al languages, t<strong>on</strong>e usually yields to stress, passing<br />

through a pitch-accent stage. This is the scenario proposed for Swahili, which is now<br />

a stress language, and was in intense c<strong>on</strong>tact with Omani Arabic, a stress language, at<br />

a formative stage.On the other hand, int<strong>on</strong>ati<strong>on</strong> is often menti<strong>on</strong>ed as something we<br />

cannot switch off when speaking another language than our mother t<strong>on</strong>gue.<br />

We investigate a number of c<strong>on</strong>tact situati<strong>on</strong>s and their outcomes in terms of<br />

t<strong>on</strong>e/pitch accent, am<strong>on</strong>g them Chimwiini. We show that its accent system has been<br />

influenced by c<strong>on</strong>tact with Somali, and we critique the hypothesis (Philipps<strong>on</strong> 1993)<br />

that its pitch-accent system is a stage <strong>on</strong> a path to the development of a stress accent<br />

system like the <strong>on</strong>e found in Swahili. We c<strong>on</strong>clude with a number of research<br />

questi<strong>on</strong>s and a research agenda in this underresearched domain.<br />

WS4


Martine Adda-Decker 1 , Martial Embanga Aborob<strong>on</strong>gui 1, Annie Rialland 1 , &<br />

Lori Lamel 2<br />

annie.rialland@univ-paris3.fr, martine.adda-decker@univ-paris3.fr,<br />

aborob<strong>on</strong>gui@yahoo.fr , lamel@limsi.fr<br />

1 Laboratoire de Ph<strong>on</strong>étique et Ph<strong>on</strong>ologie (CNRS/Sorb<strong>on</strong>ne-Nouvelle, 2 LIMSI<br />

Embosi: automatic alignment with segments and words & ph<strong>on</strong>ological mining<br />

This c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong> describes <strong>on</strong>going research <strong>on</strong> Mbochi, a <strong>Bantu</strong> C language spoken<br />

by more than 100000 native speakers in C<strong>on</strong>go-Brazzaville.<br />

A first oral corpus has been collected as read speech corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to 3 folktales. It<br />

has been transcribed by <strong>on</strong>e of the co-authors, with t<strong>on</strong>es and even floating<br />

c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants (in parenthesis). This corpus will be extended to radio broadcasts. In<br />

order to align the corpus automatically into words and ph<strong>on</strong>emic segments, a speech<br />

automatic system developped for French (Gauvain & al. 2005) has been adapted to<br />

the Embosi ph<strong>on</strong>etic and ph<strong>on</strong>ological characteristics. The acoustic models have<br />

been borrowed from French. A pr<strong>on</strong><strong>on</strong>ciati<strong>on</strong> dicti<strong>on</strong>ary has been created from the<br />

words transcribed in the corpora and variants have been included in order to<br />

account for ph<strong>on</strong>ological processes, particularly elisi<strong>on</strong> at word juncti<strong>on</strong>s. Thus a<br />

word such as o yénga «to search for» has the following variants : o yenga, (o) yénga<br />

and oyéng(a) in the pr<strong>on</strong>unciati<strong>on</strong> dicti<strong>on</strong>ary.<br />

We performed an automatic study of the 584 vowel elisi<strong>on</strong> processes of the corpora.<br />

Vowel elisi<strong>on</strong>s are very frequent in Embosi, occurring almost whenever two vowels<br />

get into c<strong>on</strong>tact at word juncti<strong>on</strong>s. The accuracy of the automatic detecti<strong>on</strong>s of the<br />

elisi<strong>on</strong> and of the word alignments was checked manually <strong>on</strong> the third of the corpus<br />

and reached a percentage of 92%. This type of automatic alignement improved the<br />

analysis of elisi<strong>on</strong>s, as it enabled a rapid tracking down of excepti<strong>on</strong>s and helped<br />

defining rule applicati<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>texts <strong>on</strong> a large scale.<br />

The durati<strong>on</strong> of the resulting vowel after an elisi<strong>on</strong> was measured also<br />

automatically. We expected to find a l<strong>on</strong>ger durati<strong>on</strong> when a floating c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant<br />

separated the two vowels at the word juncti<strong>on</strong> (ex : (b)a-k<strong>on</strong>dzi + (b)á-sɛr-I<br />

“Cl2.chiefs+Cl2.Past-say-Recent”-> ak<strong>on</strong>dzaásɛri “the chiefs said”, with a l<strong>on</strong>g a).<br />

The results c<strong>on</strong>firmed <strong>on</strong>ly partly this hypothesis as a lengthening due to the elisi<strong>on</strong><br />

of a vowel in a V (C) V c<strong>on</strong>text was found but was smaller than expected (mean:<br />

20ms).<br />

Thus, this communicati<strong>on</strong> presents an attempt at providing a segment and word<br />

automatic alignment to a <strong>Bantu</strong> language, based <strong>on</strong> the adaptati<strong>on</strong> of a system<br />

designed for French and shows how it can be used for ph<strong>on</strong>etic and ph<strong>on</strong>ological<br />

mining, selecting elisi<strong>on</strong>s as a case study. Meanwhile, this automatic alignment<br />

system provides an embryo of a speech recogniti<strong>on</strong> system in Embosi.<br />

GS


Morpho-ph<strong>on</strong>ology and metrical structure in Nata<br />

Andrei Anghelescu<br />

University of British Columbia<br />

andrei.anghelescu@alumni.ubc.ca<br />

This talk has two goals; first, I will provide an initial descripti<strong>on</strong> of nominal t<strong>on</strong>e in Nata, a Lacustrine<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> language spoken in Tanzania. Sec<strong>on</strong>d, I will relate morpho-prosodic categories below<br />

the word level to metrical units. <strong>Bantu</strong> languages have been argued to provide evidence for sublexical<br />

prosodic domains such as the prosodic stem and the prosodic root, which are c<strong>on</strong>stituents of the prosodic<br />

word (Inkelas, 1989). Likewise, metrical structure has been argued to play an important role in t<strong>on</strong>al<br />

phenomen<strong>on</strong> (Downing, 1990). Recent work <strong>on</strong> the ph<strong>on</strong>ology-syntax interface has argued that a default<br />

mapping of syntactic c<strong>on</strong>stituents to prosodic c<strong>on</strong>stituents is mediated by prosodic c<strong>on</strong>straints (Selkirk,<br />

2011). I will argue that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is a <strong>on</strong>e-to-<strong>on</strong>e mapping of morphological to ph<strong>on</strong>ological domains and<br />

that this mapping is subject to metrical c<strong>on</strong>straints. I will focus <strong>on</strong> t<strong>on</strong>e patterns in the nominal and verbal<br />

domains, dem<strong>on</strong>strating first that they are both sensitive to the same type of morpho-ph<strong>on</strong>ological<br />

boundaries and then that metrical structure interacts with t<strong>on</strong>e mapping in the nominal domain.<br />

Take as illustrati<strong>on</strong> the example below. In the singular (1a, d) and plural (1b, e), high t<strong>on</strong>e is realized<br />

<strong>on</strong> the root initial syllable. In the diminutive singular (1c, f), we can observe that high t<strong>on</strong>e is no l<strong>on</strong>ger<br />

aligned with the left edge of the noun root, but instead falls <strong>on</strong> the third syllable of the word.<br />

(1) Nouns in the singular, plural and diminutive 1<br />

a. o-mo-téreBi ‘ladle’<br />

PPF-C3-ladle<br />

b. e-me-téreBi ‘ladles’<br />

PPF-C4-ladle<br />

c. /0-rii-teréBi ‘small ladle’<br />

PPF-C5-ladle<br />

d. e-Ge-só<strong>on</strong>tSo ‘plate’<br />

PPF-C7-plate<br />

e. e-Be-só<strong>on</strong>tSo ‘plates’<br />

PPF-C8-plate<br />

f. /0-rii-so<strong>on</strong>tSó ‘small plate’<br />

PPF-C5-plate<br />

In most noun classes, the third syllable is identical to the left edge of the noun root; however, in noun<br />

classes without a preprefix (such as class 5), the third syllable does not coincide with any morphological<br />

boundary. I argue that the third syllable has no special status, but rather that in the default case it<br />

corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to the left edge of the root; additi<strong>on</strong>ally, a metrical c<strong>on</strong>straint prevents high t<strong>on</strong>e from being<br />

root initial when t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are less than two syllables preceding the root.<br />

The key theoretical implicati<strong>on</strong> is that the mapping of morphological to ph<strong>on</strong>ological domains is<br />

the same as the mapping between syntactic and ph<strong>on</strong>ological domains; importantly, both mappings are<br />

subject to prosodic c<strong>on</strong>straints.<br />

References<br />

Downing, L. J. (1990). Local and metrical t<strong>on</strong>e shift in Nguni. Studies in African Linguistics, 21(3):261–<br />

317.<br />

Inkelas, S. (1989). Prosodic C<strong>on</strong>stituency in the Lexic<strong>on</strong>. PhD thesis, Stanford.<br />

Selkirk, E. (2011). The syntax-ph<strong>on</strong>ology interface. In Goldsmith, J., Riggle, J., and Yu, A. C. L.,<br />

editors, The Handbook of Ph<strong>on</strong>ological Theory, chapter 14, pages 435–484. Blackwell Publishing,<br />

sec<strong>on</strong>d editi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

1 Examples are provided in IPA transcripti<strong>on</strong>. C# refers to the noun class, PPF the preprefix (sometimes known as augment).<br />

Class 5 c<strong>on</strong>tributes a diminutive interpretati<strong>on</strong> to some nouns.<br />

1<br />

GS


Prosodic Phrasing in Copperbelt Bemba<br />

Lee Bickmore, University at Albany, l.bickmore@albany.edu<br />

Nancy C. Kula, University of Essex, nckula@essex.ac.uk<br />

This paper investigates the structure of prosodic phrases in Copperbelt Bemba with the goal of<br />

defining the mechanisms that determine these phrases (in particular, the ph<strong>on</strong>ological phase) and<br />

comparing them to those motivated in closely related languages. A number of syntactic<br />

c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s are investigated including verbal complementati<strong>on</strong> and nominal modificati<strong>on</strong>. A<br />

number of ph<strong>on</strong>ological rules have been found to be sensitive to phrase boundaries in Copperbelt<br />

Bemba: (i) Unbounded High Spreading (ii) Inter-word H Spreading and (iii) Inter-word H Fusi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Of these, Unbounded Spreading, is the <strong>on</strong>e which most clearly diagnoses ph<strong>on</strong>ological phrase<br />

boundaries. Specifically, the rightmost H in a word will undergo unbounded spreading if that word<br />

is ph<strong>on</strong>ological phrase-final, but will undergo bounded spreading if another word follows in the<br />

same p-phrase.<br />

Under this diagnostic, within the verbal domain a verb and its complement in V+Adv and<br />

V+Obj c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s phrase together in the same ph<strong>on</strong>ological phrase. However in cases w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> an<br />

object marker is present <strong>on</strong> the verb in V+Object, the object begins a new ph<strong>on</strong>ological phrase. And<br />

if the NP after the verb is not an object, but rather a post-posed subject, then they are also members<br />

of distinct p-phrases. For multiple complementati<strong>on</strong> in V+Obj+Adv and V+Obj+Obj structures, the<br />

verb and following object are part of <strong>on</strong>e p-phrase, but the following word begins a new <strong>on</strong>e. In a<br />

Subj+Verb c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong> the two words are part of different p-phrases.<br />

In the nominal domain the nominal head plus the first following modifier phrase together<br />

and this pattern holds not <strong>on</strong>ly for adjectives, but also for associative phrases. However, in the case<br />

of a sequence of more that <strong>on</strong>e modifier it is <strong>on</strong>ly the modifier immediately following the noun that<br />

phrases together with the noun. The phrasing of adjectives differs between those with and without<br />

the augment, with the former, which can also be regarded as reduced relatives, generally not<br />

phrasing with the nominal head. In cases w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> more than <strong>on</strong>e adjective is present, the first<br />

‘regular’ n<strong>on</strong>-augmented adjective phrases with the noun while following adjectives, with the<br />

augment, must phrase independently. In c<strong>on</strong>junctive phrases, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is a ph<strong>on</strong>ological phrase break<br />

between the first NP and the c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong>, while the c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong> phrases with the following NP.<br />

In terms of defining these phrases with respect to the syntax, we will show that, as has been<br />

claimed for a variety of other <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, ph<strong>on</strong>ological phrase boundaries (within both verbal<br />

and nominal c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s) are generally found at the right edges of maximal projecti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

While Copperbelt Bemba is quite similar to other related languages, such as Cilungu<br />

(Bickmore 1997), in how p-phrases are formed, it has several interesting properties which are not<br />

shared. First, the phrasal spreading properties of a H <strong>on</strong> a final or penultimate syllable are distinct<br />

from those <strong>on</strong> a pre-penultimate syllable. We will show that this is due to the fact that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are<br />

word-level t<strong>on</strong>al rules which apply first (Kula & Bickmore forthcoming), which feed the phraselevel<br />

<strong>on</strong>es. Sec<strong>on</strong>d, the other two phrase level processes menti<strong>on</strong>ed above, Inter-Word Spreading<br />

and Inter-Word Fusi<strong>on</strong>, are shown to operate between words of distinct p-phrases, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as in, e.g.<br />

Cilungu, they would not. Finally, we show that the spreading properties of a H depend not <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong><br />

its overall prosodic c<strong>on</strong>text, but also partially <strong>on</strong> its morphological status, e.g. whether it is an<br />

augment H versus a Root H.<br />

References:<br />

Bickmore, Lee. 2007. Cilungu Ph<strong>on</strong>ology. Stanford: Center for the Study of Language and<br />

Communicati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Kula, Nancy & Lee Bickmore. Forthcoming. Ternary Spreading and the OCP in Copperbelt Bemba.<br />

Studies in African Linguistics.<br />

GS


Tense in Gyeli<br />

Nadine Borchardt, Humboldt Universität zu Berlin<br />

nadineborchardt@gmail.com<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> languages typically have rich tense systems (Dahl 1985, Nurse 2008). For instance, the vast<br />

majority of <strong>Bantu</strong> languages make multiple time divisi<strong>on</strong>s in the past tense (Nurse 2008). A sec<strong>on</strong>d<br />

comm<strong>on</strong> characteristic is that <strong>Bantu</strong> languages mark tense via inflecti<strong>on</strong>al morphology, often with<br />

corresp<strong>on</strong>ding t<strong>on</strong>e changes especially in northwestern <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. This talk investigates<br />

Gyeli, an excepti<strong>on</strong> to both these characteristics. Gyeli is a <strong>Bantu</strong> A80 language spoken by<br />

“Pygmy” hunter-gat<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>rs in southern Camero<strong>on</strong> and Equatorial Guinea whose tense system is<br />

remarkable for its minimality in terms of tense distincti<strong>on</strong>s made and morphological material. The<br />

Gyeli system c<strong>on</strong>trasts both with closely related/neighboring farmer languages, which have fuller<br />

tense systems, and with other known languages which have reduced tense systems, in that they are<br />

vehicular languages (Nurse 2008: 22).<br />

Language Situati<strong>on</strong>: Gyeli is an endangered and under-described language that is currently being<br />

documented. Data used in this paper stem mainly from my own fieldwork since previously<br />

published literature <strong>on</strong> Gyeli (Renaud 1976) is very limited and does not c<strong>on</strong>sider the verbal system<br />

at all. The hunting and gathering Gyeli speakers are in close c<strong>on</strong>tact with various groups of <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

farmers. Due to increasing sedentarizati<strong>on</strong> and adopti<strong>on</strong> to a farming lifestyle, the Bagyeli are<br />

currently shifting to their neighboring farmer languages.<br />

Reduced Tense Distincti<strong>on</strong>s: While the other (farmer) languages of the area usually display three<br />

distincti<strong>on</strong>s for past tense and two for future, Gyeli <strong>on</strong>ly possesses three tenses altogether: present,<br />

past and future without any further distincti<strong>on</strong>s as to temporal proximity (e.g. recent vs. far past).<br />

Also, the tense systems of neighboring languages (see Hyman (2003) for Basaa and Alexandre<br />

(1955) for Bulu) and of closely related languages (see Ngue Um (2002) for Mvoumbo, Heath<br />

(1991) for Makaa, and Beav<strong>on</strong> (1991) for Koozime) mark tense by inflecti<strong>on</strong>al morphemes while<br />

Gyeli expresses tense distincti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong>ly t<strong>on</strong>ally as illustrated in (1) through (3).<br />

(1) mɛ́ djìì (2) mɛ̀ djìí (3) mɛ́ɛ́ djíì<br />

1S.PRES open.PRES 1S.PST open.PST 1S.FUT open.FUT<br />

'I open' 'I opened' 'I will open'<br />

Expressi<strong>on</strong> of Tense: Gyeli verb roots are either m<strong>on</strong>o- or bisyllabic and are preceded by subject<br />

pr<strong>on</strong>ouns. The marking of tense affects the t<strong>on</strong>al pattern of both the subject pr<strong>on</strong>oun and the verb<br />

root. In my analysis within the autosegmental and metrical approach, I show that in the present<br />

tense a floating H t<strong>on</strong>e attaches leftwards to the underlyingly L subject pr<strong>on</strong>oun if the verb stem has<br />

an initial L t<strong>on</strong>e as in (1). If the stem initial t<strong>on</strong>e is H, the floating H attaches rightwards and does<br />

not surface. In the past tense, the last L mora of the verb stem receives a H t<strong>on</strong>e as in (2). If the last<br />

mora of a bisyllabic verb stem is already H, the H spreads leftwards. Finally, in the future tense,<br />

another mora is added to the subject pr<strong>on</strong>oun as shown in (3). This sec<strong>on</strong>d mora receives its vowel<br />

and t<strong>on</strong>e specificati<strong>on</strong>s from the first mora. At the same time, the verb stem usually takes a HL for<br />

m<strong>on</strong>osyllabic and a H L t<strong>on</strong>al pattern for bisyllabic verb roots.<br />

Broader Outlook: While Nurse explains other reduced tense systems <strong>on</strong> the grounds that they are<br />

vehicular languages, this is not the case for Gyeli. Instead, I address the questi<strong>on</strong> whether 'Pygmy'<br />

languages are systematically different from farmer languages. The findings about the Gyeli tense<br />

system provide evidence in favor of this often informally made assumpti<strong>on</strong> and add important<br />

informati<strong>on</strong> to the scarce literature <strong>on</strong> this issue.<br />

References: Alexandre, P. 1955. Manuel élémentaire de langue bulu. CHEAM. Beav<strong>on</strong>, K. 1991.<br />

Koozime verbal structure. In Tense and Aspect in Eight <strong>Languages</strong> of Camero<strong>on</strong>, SIL. Dahl, Ö. 1985. Tense<br />

and Aspect Systems. Blackwell. Heath, D. 1991. Tense and Aspect in Makaa. In Tense and Aspect in Eight<br />

<strong>Languages</strong> of Camero<strong>on</strong>, SIL. Hyman, L. 2003. Basaa (A43). The <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, Routledge. Ngue Um,<br />

E. 2002. Morphologie verbale du mvoumbo, Université de Yaoundé I. Ngue Um, E. 2011. Sketch grammar<br />

GS


of Bakola. Unpublished Ms. Nurse, D. 2008. Tense and Aspect in <strong>Bantu</strong>, OUP. Renaud, P. 1976. Le Bajeli.<br />

Ph<strong>on</strong>ologie, morphologie nominale, ALCAM.<br />

GS


Power Talk: from royal K<strong>on</strong>go words to royal K<strong>on</strong>go origins<br />

Koen Bostoen 1 , Birgit Ricquier 2 , Gilles-Maurice de Schryver 1<br />

1K<strong>on</strong>goKing Research Group, Department of <strong>Languages</strong> and Cultures, Ghent University<br />

2K<strong>on</strong>goKing Research Group, Service of Linguistics, Royal Museum for Central Africa, Tervuren<br />

The history of the K<strong>on</strong>go Kingdom is excepti<strong>on</strong>ally well known from 1500 <strong>on</strong>wards, thanks to its early<br />

involvement in the Trans-Atlantic trade and its early introducti<strong>on</strong> to literacy. At the same time, very little<br />

is known about the origins and early history of the Kingdom. Gaining new insights <strong>on</strong> the growth of the<br />

K<strong>on</strong>go Kingdom through an interdisciplinary approach combing archaeology and historical linguistics<br />

is the central aim of the interuniversity K<strong>on</strong>goKing research group (UGent, ULB, RMCA;<br />

http://k<strong>on</strong>goking.org). Central in the historical linguistic research is the study of cultural vocabulary as<br />

a source for early K<strong>on</strong>go history. In this paper we focus <strong>on</strong> K<strong>on</strong>go words revolving around royal titles<br />

and insignia as attested in the historical sources from the 16th to the 20th century. Preliminary research<br />

<strong>on</strong> the blacksmith term and royal K<strong>on</strong>go title ngangula has been especially rewarding in this respect. It<br />

not <strong>on</strong>ly testifies to the old Central-African symbolic associati<strong>on</strong> between leadership and ir<strong>on</strong> working,<br />

the so-called ‘smith’s myth’ (de Maret 1985), but also allows to reopen the debate <strong>on</strong> the origins of the<br />

K<strong>on</strong>go Kingdom. This debate was more or less closed when Vansina (1963) argued in a short account<br />

<strong>on</strong> K<strong>on</strong>go origins that its founders had their origin north of the C<strong>on</strong>go river in the current-day Mayombe<br />

regi<strong>on</strong>, and not east of the Inkisi river, as a number of scholars, such as Ravenstein (1901) and van<br />

Wing (1959), had argued before. Diachr<strong>on</strong>ic ph<strong>on</strong>ological evidence points out that the royal K<strong>on</strong>go title<br />

ngangula can <strong>on</strong>ly have its origin in K<strong>on</strong>go languages spoken east of the Inkisi river, giving new<br />

credibility to the earlier hypothesis that K<strong>on</strong>go kingship originated in a regi<strong>on</strong> known as K<strong>on</strong>go dia<br />

Nlaza between the Inkisi and Kwango rivers (Thornt<strong>on</strong> 2001).<br />

However, ever since Trier (1934) introduced the Saussurian principles of c<strong>on</strong>trast and inclusi<strong>on</strong><br />

into semantics, it has been accepted that individual words <strong>on</strong>ly acquire meaning through c<strong>on</strong>trast with<br />

other words bel<strong>on</strong>ging to the same semantic field. As a c<strong>on</strong>sequence, it is necessary to look at sets of<br />

semantically related words to understand lexical meaning, not simply at words in isolati<strong>on</strong> (Lehrer<br />

1985). That is why we study the linguistic evidence with respect to the royal title ngangula in relati<strong>on</strong> to<br />

other ‘royal K<strong>on</strong>go vocabulary’ as found in the rich body of historical evidence <strong>on</strong> the K<strong>on</strong>go Kingdom<br />

since the 16th century.<br />

References<br />

De Maret, P. 1985. The smith's myth and the origin of leadership in Central Africa. In R. Haaland & P.<br />

L. Shinnie (eds.), African ir<strong>on</strong> working, ancient and traditi<strong>on</strong>al. Oslo; New York: Norwegian<br />

University Press; OUP.<br />

GS


Lehrer, A. 1985. The Influence of Semantic Fields <strong>on</strong> Semantic Change. In J. Fisiak (ed.), Historical<br />

Semantics, Historical Word formati<strong>on</strong>, vol. 29 (Trends in Linguistics, Studies and M<strong>on</strong>ographs),<br />

283-96. Berlin-New York: Mout<strong>on</strong> Publishers.<br />

Ravenstein, E. G. (ed.) 1901. The strange adventures of Andrew Battell, of Leigh, in Angola and the<br />

adjoining regi<strong>on</strong>s. Reprinted from "Purchas his pilgrimes". L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>: Printed for the Hakluyt Society.<br />

Thornt<strong>on</strong>, J. K. 2001. The origins and early history of the kingdom of K<strong>on</strong>go, c.1350-1550.<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g> Journal of African Historical Studies 34, 89-120.<br />

Trier, J. 1934. Das sprachliche Feld. In L. E. Schmidt (ed.), Zur Geschichte und Theorie des<br />

sprachlichen Feldes, 428-49. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftlichte Buchgesellschaft.<br />

Van Wing, J. 1959. Études Bak<strong>on</strong>go : sociologie, religi<strong>on</strong> et magie. Brugge: Desclée De Brouwer.<br />

Vansina, J. 1963. Notes sur l'origine du royaume de K<strong>on</strong>go. Journal of African History 4, 33-8.<br />

GS


Resultative, remoteness, and innovati<strong>on</strong> in some <strong>Bantu</strong> T/A systems<br />

Robert Botne, Indiana University (botner@indiana.edu)<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> language T/A systems often present challenging analytical c<strong>on</strong>undrums, as is the case, for<br />

example, with languages in z<strong>on</strong>es F and S, whose systems are representative of the kinds of c<strong>on</strong>trasts<br />

found across the <strong>Bantu</strong> landscape. First, as can be observed in Table 1, several F and S languages<br />

resemble <strong>on</strong>e another more than they do their geographical neighbors. Hence, for example, Sibhende and<br />

Ikalanga exhibit comparable Resultative, Hodiernal, and Remote past forms that differ from those for the<br />

languages in (b) and (c), just as Kimbugwe and Isizulu resemble each other more than their neighbors.<br />

Sec<strong>on</strong>d, the dialects and languages in (b) exhibit a puzzling reversal of forms and temporal ranges (in<br />

bold outlined box), such that the K<strong>on</strong>doa dialect of Kilangi resembles Kinyaturu more than it does the<br />

more closely related M<strong>on</strong>do dialect. Yet, in Xir<strong>on</strong>ga and Isizulu, we find <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e of the forms, but not<br />

the same <strong>on</strong>e, in the two languages. Third, in the K<strong>on</strong>doa dialect and Kinyaturu we find a n<strong>on</strong>-c<strong>on</strong>tinuous<br />

"split" of the -IRE forms, reflected as well in Ikalanga RSLT and REM, counter Comrie's (1985)<br />

proposal that a possible universal of tense systems is that "time reference of each tense is a c<strong>on</strong>tinuity".<br />

Table 1. Tense/aspect forms in some z<strong>on</strong>e F and S languages<br />

P4 - REM2 P3 - REM P2 - pre-HOD P1 - HOD RSLT<br />

a. F12 Sibhende -a-ká-B-a -a-B-a -Ø-B-ílé<br />

S16 Ikalanga -á-ká-B-a -á-B-a -Ø-B-ile<br />

-á-ka-B-a<br />

b. F33 Kilangi: Bolisa -a-B-áa -á-B-iré -a-B-ire<br />

M<strong>on</strong>do -a-B-áa -a-B-á -á-B-iré -a-B-ire<br />

K<strong>on</strong>doa -a-B-á -a-B-ire -a-B-á -a-B-ire<br />

F32 Kinyaturu -a-B-ié -á-B-aa -á-B-a -Ø-B-ie<br />

F34 Kimbugwe -áa-B-á -áa-B-íye -Ø-B-iyé<br />

c. S54 Xir<strong>on</strong>ga -a-B-ile -Ø-B-ile<br />

S42 Isizulu -áa-B-a -Ø-B-il2.e -Ø-B-il1.e<br />

Working within the dissociative domain temporal model proposed in Botne and Kershner (2008) and<br />

Botne (2010, 2012), I provide an explanati<strong>on</strong> for why this striking variati<strong>on</strong> occurs. In particular, the<br />

paper addresses several specific issues: (1) how a remote c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>, such as that in Ikalanga (a), can<br />

become a resultative (a semantic path not menti<strong>on</strong>ed by Bybee et al. 1994), c<strong>on</strong>trasting this with the<br />

remote/resultative split in Kinyaturu (b), and why they are not counterexamples to Comrie's proposal; (2)<br />

why the similar REM -IRE forms in K<strong>on</strong>doa and Kinyaturu are c<strong>on</strong>ceptually distinct; (3) why the<br />

identical REM2 forms in the Bolisa and M<strong>on</strong>do dialects are c<strong>on</strong>ceptually distinct; and (4) why the HOD,<br />

pre-HOD, and REM forms in Kinyaturu and Kimbugwe are reversed. The analysis presumes an original<br />

c<strong>on</strong>trast between a resultative -Ø-B-ILE c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> and a perfect -A-B-A c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>. Innovati<strong>on</strong> that<br />

has led to the peculiar differences pointed out above finds an explanati<strong>on</strong> and motivati<strong>on</strong> in differences in<br />

time scales, time regi<strong>on</strong>s, and time scope. Thus, for example, K<strong>on</strong>doa <strong>on</strong>ly superficially distinguishes<br />

four tenses, a c<strong>on</strong>sequence of a simple linear analysis. Rather, the -ire forms denote a Current Time<br />

Regi<strong>on</strong>, the -á forms a Distal Time Regi<strong>on</strong>, the remoteness distincti<strong>on</strong> deriving from an implicit<br />

difference in time scales of use, days vs. years.<br />

Botne, R. 2010. “Perfective and perfects and pasts, oh my! On the semantics of -ile in <strong>Bantu</strong>.” Africana Linguistica<br />

16: 31-64.<br />

Botne, R. 2012. “Remoteness distincti<strong>on</strong>s.” In The Oxford Handbook of Tense and Aspect, R. Binnick (ed.),<br />

Oxford:OUP. Pp. 536-562.<br />

Botne, R. and T. Kershner. 2008. “Tense and cognitive space: On the organizati<strong>on</strong> of tense/aspect systems in <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages and bey<strong>on</strong>d.” Cognitive Linguistics 19,2: 145-218.<br />

Comrie, B. 1985. Tense. Cambridge: CUP.<br />

Bybee, J., R. Perkins, and W. Pagliuca. 1994. The Evoluti<strong>on</strong> of Grammar. Chicago: Univ. of Chicago Press.<br />

GS


Negati<strong>on</strong> and cartography in Tiriki<br />

Vicki Carstens University of Missouri carstensv@missouri.edu<br />

In Tiriki, negati<strong>on</strong> is most often expressed in a morpheme mba or tawe at the<br />

right edge of the clause (see Marlo 2012, henceforth MM). Like right‐edge<br />

adverbs, mba/tawe permit some scopal ambiguities. This can be seen in the two<br />

interpretati<strong>on</strong>s available for m<strong>on</strong>o‐clausal example (1), and bi‐clausal (2).<br />

(1) Múúndú y‐áá‐ny‐áánza mba/tawe<br />

1pers<strong>on</strong>3sgSA‐ASP‐1sgOA‐like NEG<br />

‘Somebody doesn’t like me’ OR<br />

‘Nobody likes me’ MM: (815)<br />

(2) A‐mányi Músásá a‐kúlí málwa mba/tawe<br />

3sgSA‐know 3sgSA buy‐PST 6beer NEG<br />

‘She knows that Musasa didn’t buy beer’ OR<br />

‘She doesn’t know that Musasa bought beer’ MM:(799)<br />

Disambiguati<strong>on</strong> is possible through the use of an opti<strong>on</strong>al preverbal negator sh‐.<br />

(3) Sh‐a‐mányí Músásá a‐kúl‐í málwá mba.<br />

Neg‐3sgSA‐know 3sgSA‐buy‐PST 6beer NEG<br />

‘She doesn’t know that John bought beer’ (unamibiguous) MM:(799)<br />

An emphatic particle khú can appear post‐verbally in either positive or negative<br />

clauses. Curiously, a negative reading for khú seems available whether mba/tawe<br />

functi<strong>on</strong>s to negate the clause c<strong>on</strong>taining khú or a clause embedded under it.<br />

(4) a. M‐bool‐í khú a‐ts‐ííré b. M‐bool‐í khú a‐ts‐ííré mba<br />

1sgSA‐say‐PST KHU 3sgSA‐go‐PST 1sgSA‐said KHU 3sgSA‐go‐PST NEG<br />

‘I really did say he went’ ‘I never said he didn’t go’ MM: (797)<br />

The goal of this paper is to map Tiriki’s negative morphemes into clausal<br />

architecture. I will argue for the following c<strong>on</strong>clusi<strong>on</strong>s:<br />

Mba/tawe are adverbs right‐adjoined at heights corresp<strong>on</strong>ding to their scopes.<br />

Shu‐ heads a functi<strong>on</strong>al category in the spine of the clause, but must be licensed<br />

by a c‐commanding mba/tawe (thus hierarchy and left‐right order do not have a<br />

universal mapping, c<strong>on</strong>tra Kayne 1994 and Cinque 1999).<br />

Khú has negative force whether it c‐commands or is c‐commanded by NEG.<br />

Unlike parasitic licensing (Den Dikken 2002) and sec<strong>on</strong>dary triggering (Horn<br />

1996) this suggest a bi‐directi<strong>on</strong>al feature‐checking Agree relati<strong>on</strong> is at work<br />

across clause boundaries (Boskovic 2007).<br />

(5) [[NegP sh‐ [TP [PolarityP khú [vP SU [VP …]]]]] mba/tawe] Merge locati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Lastly, the paper compares negati<strong>on</strong> in Tiriki with better‐studied Indo‐European<br />

languages (Haegeman 1995; Zanuttini 1997) and explores some implicati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

References Boskovic, Z. 2007. On the locality of Move and Agree. LI 38:589‐644 den<br />

Dikken, M. 2006. Direct and parasitic polarity item licensing. JCGL 4:2. Cinque, G. 1999.<br />

Adverbs and Functi<strong>on</strong>al Heads. New York: Oxford. Haegeman, L.The Syntax of Negati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Cambridge UP. 1995. Horn, L. 1989. A Natural History of Negati<strong>on</strong>.Kayne, R. 1994. The<br />

Antisymmetry of Syntax. Cambridge: MIT Press. Marlo, M. 2012. Structure and T<strong>on</strong>e in<br />

Tiriki. Ms., University of Missouri. Zanuttini, R. 1997. Negati<strong>on</strong> and Clausal Structure.<br />

Oxford.<br />

GS


N<strong>on</strong>-deleti<strong>on</strong> of penultimate vowels and reduplicati<strong>on</strong> in Zulu<br />

T<strong>on</strong>i Cook, University of Pennsylvania, t<strong>on</strong>icook@gmail.com<br />

Penultimate lengthening in Zulu has been well-documented since Doke (1927), and it<br />

interacts with vowel-deleti<strong>on</strong> in a range of c<strong>on</strong>texts including the infinitival prefix úku-. In<br />

speech, the underlined vowel in uku- deletes in all cases except when preceding m<strong>on</strong>osyllabic<br />

stems; if the sec<strong>on</strong>d syllable of the infinitival prefix occurs in the penultimate positi<strong>on</strong>, the /u/<br />

is pr<strong>on</strong>ounced, otherwise it deletes (underlying t<strong>on</strong>e marked):<br />

(1) a. úku-fúnda → úk-fú:nda ‘to study’<br />

b. úku-sébenza → úk-sébe:nz-a ‘to work’<br />

c. úku-fa → úku:-fa ‘to die’<br />

* uk-fa<br />

It is clear that the n<strong>on</strong>-deleti<strong>on</strong> of the uku- vowel in uku-fa is related to it occupying the<br />

penultimate positi<strong>on</strong> in the verb. Penultimate lengthening is assumed to be a late rule in Zulu<br />

morphoph<strong>on</strong>ology (Khumalo 1981), so the same should be true of the related process of<br />

vowel deleti<strong>on</strong> that is shown in (1a-b). Another point arguing for vowel deleti<strong>on</strong> as a late rule<br />

is that it creates c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant sequences that are not licit given Zulu ph<strong>on</strong>otactics; Zulu is<br />

strictly (C)VCV, and does not permit underlying forms to c<strong>on</strong>tain any c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant clusters,<br />

such as the [k-f] or [k-s] that are the result of the deleti<strong>on</strong> rule operating <strong>on</strong> the infinitival<br />

prefix. While it seems legitimate to classify deleti<strong>on</strong> of the uku- vowel as a late rule just like<br />

the related process of penultimate lengthening, data from reduplicati<strong>on</strong> argues otherwise.<br />

New data show that certain morphemes to the left of the stem are permitted to<br />

reduplicate, <strong>on</strong>e of these being uku- (t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is evidence that the uku- c<strong>on</strong>sists of 2 morphemes,<br />

u- and -ku though it is descriptively c<strong>on</strong>venient to refer to it as a single c<strong>on</strong>stituent, the<br />

infinitival prefix). The reduplicant is a disyllabic c<strong>on</strong>stituent (CVCV) that is prefixed to the<br />

verb stem (Doke, Downing (2009)). The RED+base complex is bracketed, a ‘+’ separates the<br />

c<strong>on</strong>stituents:<br />

(2) a. úku-fúnda → úku-[fúnda+funda] → úk-[fúnda+fu:nda]<br />

b. úku-fa → ú-[ku-fá+ku-fa] → ú-[ku-fá+ku:-fa]<br />

* u-[k-fa+ku:-fa]<br />

In (2b) it is important that the n<strong>on</strong>-deleti<strong>on</strong> of the ku- vowel in the reduplicant (the lefthand<br />

c<strong>on</strong>stituent) cannot be explained through reference to vowel perseverati<strong>on</strong> as a correlate of<br />

penultimate lengthening. In n<strong>on</strong>-reduplicated forms, the n<strong>on</strong>-deleti<strong>on</strong> of ku- before<br />

m<strong>on</strong>osyllabic stems can be explained by taking lengthened vowels to be stressed, and<br />

c<strong>on</strong>sequently resistant to deleti<strong>on</strong>. However, the same is not true under reduplicati<strong>on</strong> since<br />

the lefthand ku- does not undergo lengthening. In derivati<strong>on</strong>al analyses reduplicati<strong>on</strong> is<br />

classified as an early rule for a variety of reas<strong>on</strong>s, including sensitivity to morphological<br />

structure.<br />

Ordering reduplicati<strong>on</strong> prior to penultimate lengthening/n<strong>on</strong>-deleti<strong>on</strong>, ku- is copied to<br />

the reduplicant template before the late rules targeting the penult. This means that if the<br />

vowel in ku- is <strong>on</strong>ly preserved because of penultimate lengthening, its n<strong>on</strong>-deleti<strong>on</strong> in the<br />

reduplicant is unexpected. Treating reduplicati<strong>on</strong> as a copying operati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>ly, the ku- in the<br />

reduplicant is simply a ph<strong>on</strong>ological string lacking any morphosyntactic status, and it is<br />

unrelated to the infinitival ku- whose vowel can delete in n<strong>on</strong>-reduplicative c<strong>on</strong>texts.<br />

References<br />

Doke, C.M. (1927) Textbook of Zulu Grammar. L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>: L<strong>on</strong>gman.<br />

Downing, L. (2009) “Linear Disorder in <strong>Bantu</strong> Reduplicati<strong>on</strong>” Workshop <strong>on</strong> the Divisi<strong>on</strong> of<br />

Labor between Morphology & Ph<strong>on</strong>ology, 4 th Meeting. Amsterdam: Meertens Instituut.<br />

GS


Khumalo, J.S.M. (1981) Zulu t<strong>on</strong>ology, part 1. African Studies. 40: 53-130.<br />

GS


Preverbal focus strategies in Kik<strong>on</strong>go: a preliminary typology<br />

Jasper De Kind, Gilles-Maurice de Schryver & Koen Bostoen (K<strong>on</strong>goKing Research Group, Ghent University)<br />

As part of recently started PhD research <strong>on</strong> the expressi<strong>on</strong> of IS in Kik<strong>on</strong>go, dedicated fieldwork was carried out<br />

<strong>on</strong> focus strategies in a number of Kik<strong>on</strong>go varieties of the Lower C<strong>on</strong>go Province in the DRC (August-September<br />

2012). In c<strong>on</strong>trast to eastern and southern <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> postverbal focusing strategies have been<br />

abundantly reported, Kik<strong>on</strong>go tends to focus arguments by moving them into the preverbal domain. Such is the<br />

case in other closely related western <strong>Bantu</strong> languages w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> preverbal focusing strategies have recently been<br />

described (Bostoen & Mundeke 2012). In this paper, we aim to provide a typology of focus positi<strong>on</strong>s in the<br />

preverbal domain with special attenti<strong>on</strong> for micro-variati<strong>on</strong> in IS strategies across the Kik<strong>on</strong>go dialect c<strong>on</strong>tinuum.<br />

Preliminary research points out that both new informati<strong>on</strong> and c<strong>on</strong>trastive argument focus happen preverbally.<br />

However, different kinds of arguments tend to be focused in different linear positi<strong>on</strong>s in the clause. Objects are<br />

focused in IBV positi<strong>on</strong> (1).<br />

(1) Ncyá cìlíílì nkhóngà? Ngùlùngù kàlíílì [Ciwoyo]<br />

ncya ci-li-ili N-k<strong>on</strong>ga N-gulungu ka-li-ili<br />

What PP7-eat-PFV NP9.hunter NP9.antelope SC1-eat-PFV<br />

‘What did the hunter eat?’ ‘He ate an antelope’<br />

Peripheral arguments are also focused in the preverbal domain, but not necessarily IBV (2-3):<br />

(2) Bwé lìsòdádì kàlììlíílì ? Nzácì nzácì kalììlíílì [Ciwoyo]<br />

bwe li-sodadi ka-li-il-ili? Nzaci nzaci ka-li-il-ili.<br />

how NP5-soldier SC1-eat-APPL-PFV rapidly rapidly SC1-eat-APPL-PFV<br />

‘How did the soldier eat?’ ‘He ate rapidly.’<br />

(3) Kà kyúmà àdììdíídì? Mù lótò àdììdíídì [Kisol<strong>on</strong>go]<br />

ka ki-uma a-di-id-idi? mu loto a-di-id-idi.<br />

with NP7-thing SC1-eat-APPL-PVF NP18 spo<strong>on</strong> SC1-eat-APPL-PVF<br />

‘With what did the woman eat?’ ‘She ate with a spo<strong>on</strong>.’<br />

As is illustrated in the examples above, the focalizati<strong>on</strong> of peripheral arguments comm<strong>on</strong>ly involves<br />

applicativizati<strong>on</strong>, as was observed in other <strong>Bantu</strong> languages (Creissels 2004; De Kind & Bostoen 2012).<br />

Argument focus in the preverbal domain corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to predicate focus, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> by the focalized finite verb is<br />

preceded by its infinitive (4).<br />

(4) Sónìkà kákà bàsónìkénì [Kimbeko]<br />

Ø-s<strong>on</strong>ik-a kaka ba-s<strong>on</strong>ik-idi<br />

NP15-write-FN <strong>on</strong>ly SC2-write-PFV<br />

‘They <strong>on</strong>ly wrote (a rapport).’<br />

References:<br />

Bostoen, K. & L. Mundeke. 2012. Subject marking, object-verb order and focus in Mbuun (<strong>Bantu</strong>, B87), Southern African<br />

Linguistics and Applied Language Studies, 30:2, 139-154.<br />

Creissels D. 2004. N<strong>on</strong>-can<strong>on</strong>ical applicatives and focalizati<strong>on</strong> in Tswana. Paper presented at Syntax of the World’s<br />

<strong>Languages</strong>, Leipzig. Available at: http://email.eva.mpg.de/~cschmidt/SWL1/handouts/Creissels.pdf [accessed 15 March 2012].<br />

De Kind, J. & K. Bostoen. 2012. The Applicative in ciLubà Grammar and Discourse: A Semantic Goal Analysis. Southern<br />

African Linguistics and Applied Language Studies, 30:1, 101-124.<br />

GS


Nasal prefix evoluti<strong>on</strong> in Kik<strong>on</strong>go between the 17 th and 20 th century<br />

Jasper De Kind, Gilles-Maurice de Schryver & Koen Bostoen (K<strong>on</strong>goKing Research Group, Ghent University)<br />

Most present-day K<strong>on</strong>go varieties have two sets of nasal prefixes, i.e. syllabic homorganic nasal prefixes of classes 1, 3, and 4 and n<strong>on</strong>syllabic<br />

homorganic nasal prefixes of classes 9/10 and 1SG. The n<strong>on</strong>-syllabic nasals are reflexes of prefixes rec<strong>on</strong>structed in Proto-<strong>Bantu</strong><br />

with a NV structure: *mʊ̀- (1, 3) and *mɪ̀- (4). Homorganic syllabic prefixes of classes 1 and 3 (not of class 4) also exist in certain Sabaki<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> languages, such as Mwani, but not in Standard Swahili (Nurse & Hinnebusch 1993: 525). The syllabicity of the nasal prefix of classes<br />

1, 3 and 4 is linked with morpho-ph<strong>on</strong>ological behaviour that deviates from that of the n<strong>on</strong>-syllabic nasal prefixes of classes 9/10 and 1SG.<br />

Although they undergo regressive assimilati<strong>on</strong> to the point of articulati<strong>on</strong> of the following c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant, they do not exert progressive<br />

assimilati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> it as class 9/10 and 1SG prefixes do in several ways: (a) aspirati<strong>on</strong> of the following unvoiced stop, as in (1); (b) fortificati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

the following liquid, as in (2); and (c) triggering of the so-called ‘K<strong>on</strong>go Rule’ when the following morpheme starts with a nasal, as in (3).<br />

(1) nkháfí zí ǹlúngù (Kimbata: K<strong>on</strong>goKing fieldwork data 2012)<br />

N-kafi zi N’-lungu<br />

NP10-paddle PP10 NP3-pirogue<br />

‘The paddles of the pirogue.’<br />

(2) mèndrámbìlà lòsó ùnlámbìlà lòsó (Cilinji: K<strong>on</strong>goKing fieldwork data 2012)<br />

Ø‐me-N-lamb-il-a loso u-N’-lamb-il-a loso<br />

SC1-PVF-OC1SG-cook-APPL-FV NP11.rice SC1-OC1-cook-APPL-FV NP11.rice<br />

‘She cooked me some rice.’ ‘She cooks him some rice.’<br />

(3) mbwèné mpfúmù mpfùmú kìmmwénè kò (Kimbata: K<strong>on</strong>goKing fieldwork data 2012)<br />

N-m<strong>on</strong>-ili N-fumu N-fumu ki-N’-m<strong>on</strong>-ili ko<br />

SC1SG-see-PFV NP9-chief NP9-chief NEG.SC1SG-OC1-see- PFV NEG<br />

‘I’ve seen the chief.’ ‘I haven’t seen the chief.’ (lit.: ‘The chief, I haven’t seen him’)<br />

This reducti<strong>on</strong> of prefixes with a NV structure to syllabic nasals happens to be a recent development. In the 17 th century Vocabularium<br />

c<strong>on</strong>gense (Van Gheel 1652), the oldest <strong>Bantu</strong> dicti<strong>on</strong>ary (De Kind et al. 2012, Van Wing & Penders 1928), most Kisik<strong>on</strong>go nouns bel<strong>on</strong>ging<br />

to classes 1 and 3/4 still had direct reflexes of PB *mʊ̀- and *mɪ̀-, such as muquila/miquila in (4), even if some nouns were already noted<br />

with both the full and reduced prefix, such as mucanda/m’canda in (5). At this stage, the process of nasal reducti<strong>on</strong> had <strong>on</strong>ly started.<br />

Moreover, the syllabic nasal prefix was not homorganic yet. A similar allomorphy is observed in the 18 th century Kik<strong>on</strong>go variety as spoken in<br />

Kak<strong>on</strong>go (Bleyenberg 2012). It is <strong>on</strong>ly in late 19 th century Kisik<strong>on</strong>go that all class 1 and 3/4 nouns have a syllabic nasal prefix, which is fully<br />

homorganic, as attested in the dicti<strong>on</strong>ary of Bentley (1887), cf. example (6).<br />

(4) cauda. a. cola. muquila. pl. mi&. (‘tail’)<br />

(5a) epistola. a. carta. mucanda. pl. mi&. (‘letter’)<br />

(5b) charta. a. papela. erā m'canda. (‘letter, paper’)<br />

(6) Letter, n., nkanda, 4 (“book”) (Bentley 1887: 128)<br />

In this paper, we discuss the different steps of this diachr<strong>on</strong>ic Kik<strong>on</strong>go process of prefix reducti<strong>on</strong>, which is historically documented thanks to<br />

the existence of a unique sequence of language documents between the 17 th and 20 th century and which is part of a wider phenomen<strong>on</strong> of<br />

prefix reducti<strong>on</strong> and loss (Bittremieux 1943-44).<br />

GS


References<br />

Bentley, W. H. 1887. Dicti<strong>on</strong>ary and Grammar of the K<strong>on</strong>go language as spoken at San Salvador, the Ancient Capital of the Old K<strong>on</strong>go<br />

empire, West Africa. L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>: Baptist Missi<strong>on</strong>ary Society and Trübner & Co.<br />

Bittremieux, L. 1943-44. De spraakkundige prefixen en het wegvallen van sommige prefixen in het Kik<strong>on</strong>go. Aequatoria 6-7, 104-11, 1-13,<br />

81-88.<br />

Bleyenberg, E. 2012. Sound Change in Kik<strong>on</strong>go as spoken in 18th century Kak<strong>on</strong>go. BA thesis dissertati<strong>on</strong>, University of Helsinki.<br />

De Kind, J., G.-M. De Schryver & K. Bostoen. 2012. Pushing back the origin of <strong>Bantu</strong> lexicography: the Vocabularium C<strong>on</strong>gense of 1652,<br />

1928, 2012. Lexikos 22, 159-94.<br />

Nurse, D. & T. J. Hinnebusch. 1993. Swahili and Sabaki. A Linguistic History (with a Special Addendum by Gérard Philipps<strong>on</strong>). Berkeley:<br />

University of California Press.<br />

Van Gheel, J. 1652. Vocabularium Latinum, Hispanicum, e C<strong>on</strong>gense. Ad Usum Missi<strong>on</strong>ariorû transmittendorû ad Regni C<strong>on</strong>go Missi<strong>on</strong>es.<br />

Ms. Rome: Nati<strong>on</strong>al Central Library, Fundo Minori 1896, MS Varia 274.<br />

Van Wing, J. & C. Penders. 1928. Le plus ancien dicti<strong>on</strong>naire bantu. Het oudste <strong>Bantu</strong>-Woordenboek. Vocabularium P. Georgii Gelensis.<br />

Louvain: J. Kuyl-Otto.<br />

GS


Lost, retained or reintroduced:nasals in Shangaci class 9 and 10 nouns<br />

Koti and Shangaci, <strong>Bantu</strong> languages spoken in the Nampula province of Mozambique, are the result of<br />

a c<strong>on</strong>tact situati<strong>on</strong> involving a form of Swahili and a form of Makhuwa.One of the striking<br />

ph<strong>on</strong>ological features of Mozambican dialects of Makhuwais the replacement ofprenasalized voiced<br />

stops by voiceless stops (Kisseberth 2003). As a c<strong>on</strong>sequence, initial prenasalized c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants, which<br />

are abundant in classes 9 and 10 in closely related languages, are absent in Makhuwa. In Standard<br />

Swahili classes 9 and 10 nouns typically have prenasalizati<strong>on</strong> before voiced stops (although loanwords<br />

tend to complicate the picture). The first questi<strong>on</strong> addressed in this paper is what class 9 and 10 nouns<br />

look like in languages like Koti and Shangaci that result from a c<strong>on</strong>tact situati<strong>on</strong> involving (a form of)<br />

both these languages.<br />

Koti shows a first possible outcome. It follows the Makhuwa example and loses all prenasalizati<strong>on</strong> in<br />

classes 9 and 10 (Schadeberg&Mucanheia 2000). Shangaci, <strong>on</strong> the other hand, shows a more<br />

complicated system. The language did not loseprenasalizati<strong>on</strong> word-internally and some words in<br />

classes 9 and 10 have a word-initial syllabic homorganic nasal. At first sight, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> could be a<br />

straightforward explanati<strong>on</strong> for this pattern. Nouns that arguably have a Swahili origin (as in (1))<br />

retained the nasal sound (which became syllabic) w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as nouns for which a Makhuwa origin can be<br />

presumeddo not havea word-initial syllabic nasal. However, Makhuwa cognates with an initial syllabic<br />

nasal (2) as well as Swahili cognates with an initial syllabic nasal w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> Swahili does not have it (3)<br />

are puzzling.<br />

Swahili Shangaci Koti Makhuwa<br />

(1) ngalawa `ngaláawa kaláwa (ekaláwa) ‘sailing boat’<br />

(2) (ngwena) `ngoónya k<strong>on</strong>ya ek<strong>on</strong>yá ‘crocodile’<br />

(3) pete `mpeétthe peétthe (munela) ‘ring’<br />

In this paper we discuss possible explanati<strong>on</strong>s and try to relate them to plausible c<strong>on</strong>tact scenarios. Is<br />

the variati<strong>on</strong> in Shangaci due to the gradual spread of loss of prenasalizati<strong>on</strong> in its lexic<strong>on</strong>? Was the<br />

process slowed down because of the peripheral positi<strong>on</strong> of Shangaci in the area of the sound change<br />

and because of intense c<strong>on</strong>tact with Swahili. The apparent reintroducti<strong>on</strong> of the nasal in (2) could then<br />

be a retenti<strong>on</strong> but what about (3)? Could the occurrence of nasals w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> even Swahili lacks them be<br />

explained in terms of analogy or are they instances of ‘free nasalizati<strong>on</strong>’ (Dammann 1971). Another<br />

possibility is that we are looking at the wr<strong>on</strong>g Swahili. A look at Comorian, which shows<br />

prenasalizati<strong>on</strong> w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> Standard Swahili lacks is, is revealing in this respect (Rombi 1989). The fact<br />

that Koti and Makhuwa reacted so differently shows either that their c<strong>on</strong>tact situati<strong>on</strong> was crucially<br />

different or that even very similar c<strong>on</strong>tact situati<strong>on</strong>s involving more or less the same ingredients may<br />

have different outcomes.<br />

Dammann, E. 1971. ZursogenanntenfreienNasalierung in <strong>Bantu</strong>sprachen. In<br />

AfrikanischeSprachenundKulturen - EinQuerschnitt,Six V et al(eds). hamburg: Deutsche Inst. für<br />

Afrika-Forschung.<br />

Kisseberth, C.W. 2003. Makhuwa (P30). In The <strong>Bantu</strong> <strong>Languages</strong>, Nurse, D. and G. Philipps<strong>on</strong> (eds).<br />

546-65. L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong> & New York: Routledge.<br />

Rombi, M.-F. 1989. La nasalité en ngazija. Revue d’Ethnolinguistique (Cahiers du LACITO), 4: 59-81.<br />

GS


Schadeberg, T.C. and F.U. Mucanheia. 2000. Ekoti. The Maka or Swahili Language of Angoche. Köln:<br />

RüdigerKöppeVerlag.<br />

GS


Reciprocal/antipassive polysemy in Cilubà (<strong>Bantu</strong>, L31a)<br />

Sebastian Dom and Koen Bostoen<br />

Sebastian.Dom@UGent.be<br />

Koen.Bostoen@UGent.be<br />

Department of African <strong>Languages</strong> and Cultures, Ghent University<br />

The antipassive is a c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> in which the object noun phrase of an active transitive verb becomes oblique<br />

or omitted and the verb is detransitivized through a grammatical operati<strong>on</strong> (Polinsky 2008). It resembles the<br />

passive in that a core argument of a transitive verb has become implicit or oblique. The antipassive is generally<br />

associated with ergative languages treating the object of a transitive verb and the subject of an intransitive<br />

verb alike, in c<strong>on</strong>trast to the subject of a transitive clause (Dix<strong>on</strong> 1994). Due to its str<strong>on</strong>g associati<strong>on</strong> with<br />

ergative languages, the antipassive has largely g<strong>on</strong>e under the radar of scholarly attenti<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages.<br />

Such is the case for Cilubà (<strong>Bantu</strong>, L31a) spoken in the Kasai provinces of the DRC. In this paper, we provide<br />

evidence for the existence of c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s in Cilubà that can be c<strong>on</strong>sidered antipassive. As shown in (1a),<br />

antipassive verbs involve the derivati<strong>on</strong>al suffix ‐angan‐. This verbal extensi<strong>on</strong> decreases the valence of the<br />

transitive base verb, ‐lwa, by deleting its patient object, e.g. mulwishì in (1b).<br />

(1) a Mù‐sàlaayì u‐di ù‐lu‐angan‐a mu ci‐alu cì‐à<br />

NP1‐soldier PP1‐AUX SM1‐fight‐ANTP‐FV NP18 NP7‐meeting place PP7‐CONN<br />

m‐vità …<br />

NP1‐war<br />

‘The soldier who fights (some<strong>on</strong>e) <strong>on</strong> the battlefield …’<br />

b. Mù‐sàlaayì u‐di ù‐lu‐a mu‐lwishì<br />

NP1‐soldier PP1‐AUX SM1‐fight‐FV NP1‐enemy<br />

‘The soldier who fights the enemy.’<br />

The antipassive c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> in Cilubà is used when the object is unknown or not important, often resulting in a<br />

general statement, and expresses a habitual aspect (Cooreman 1994). The object is still implicitly present and<br />

affected. However, the Endpoint of the acti<strong>on</strong> is not important but rather the acti<strong>on</strong> itself, which is intensified<br />

by the omissi<strong>on</strong> of the object.<br />

Prototypically the ‐angan‐ suffix is used as a reciprocal extensi<strong>on</strong> in Ciluba, as in (2). Like the antipassive, a<br />

reciprocal verb is intransitive by the derivative functi<strong>on</strong> of the suffix.<br />

(2) M‐bowà nè N‐gandù bà‐vwa ba‐eel‐èsh‐àngàn‐ e m‐patà.<br />

NP1‐buffalo CONJ NP1‐crocodile SM2‐AUX SM2‐to throw‐CAUS‐RECP‐FV NP4‐discussi<strong>on</strong><br />

‘The buffalo and the crocodile were having a discussi<strong>on</strong>.’ (lit. ‘The buffalo and the crocodile were<br />

throwing a discussi<strong>on</strong> at each other.’)<br />

In Cilubà, the reciprocal can be formed by various c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s in which the sec<strong>on</strong>d participant is demoted<br />

from subject positi<strong>on</strong> to a comitative phrase (3a‐b). This demoti<strong>on</strong> of the n<strong>on</strong>‐acti<strong>on</strong> initiating and/or less<br />

salient participant does not necessarily affect subject agreement <strong>on</strong> the verb. The subject marker may remain<br />

plural as in (3a), thus signaling semantic agreement, or become singular as in (3b), thus expressing grammatical<br />

or mechanical agreement with the singular grammatical subject of the sentence.<br />

(3) a. Kàdi m‐fùmù ka‐bà‐èna mù‐à ku‐lekel‐angan‐a nì<br />

but NP1+‐chief NEG‐SM2‐AUX PP18‐CONN NP15‐leave‐RECP‐FV CONJ<br />

mu‐kàjì‐èndà to.<br />

NP1‐woman‐POSS1 NEG<br />

‘But the chief and his wife cannot leave each other.’<br />

(lit. ‘But the chief they cannot leave each other with his wife.’)<br />

b. Ø‐shefù u‐a mu‐sòkò ù‐di ù‐mòn‐angan‐a nè<br />

NP1+‐chief PP1‐CONN NP1‐village SM1‐AUX SM1‐see‐RECP‐FV CONJ<br />

Ø‐Cyaba.<br />

NP1+‐Cyaba<br />

‘The chief of the village and Cyaba saw each other.’ (lit. ‘The chief of the village saw each<br />

other with Cyaba.’)<br />

GS


The final stage in this gradual downgrading the sec<strong>on</strong>d participant is its deleti<strong>on</strong>, thus resulting in an<br />

antipassive c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>. The meaning thus is antipassive derived from the reciprocal meaning through a<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tinuum of intermediate c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s with a comitative phrase, which are characterized by a gradual<br />

decrease in reciprocity, but with maintenance of the idea of plurality of participants.<br />

References<br />

COOREMAN, A. 1994. A Functi<strong>on</strong>al Typology of Antipassives. In Fox, B. and P.J. Hopper (eds.) Voice: Form and<br />

Functi<strong>on</strong>, 49‐88. Amsterdam/Philadelphia, John Benjamins Publishing Company.<br />

DIXON, R. M. W. 1994. Ergativity. Cambridge, UP.<br />

POLINSKY, M. 2008. Antipassive C<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s. In Martin Haspelmath, Matthew S. Dryer, David Gil & Bernard<br />

Comrie (eds.), The World Atlas of Linguage Structures Online. Munich: Max Planck Digital Library, Chapter 108.<br />

Available <strong>on</strong>line at http://wals.info/chapter/108.<br />

GS


Les c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>nes implosives dans les langues bantu de l’entre C<strong>on</strong>go-Ubangi: Résultat<br />

d’une évoluti<strong>on</strong> ou de c<strong>on</strong>tact avec les langues oubanguiennes voisines ?<br />

Jean-Pierre D<strong>on</strong>zo Bunza 1,2,3 et Koen Bostoen 1,2<br />

1 Ghent University (Belgium)<br />

2 Université Libre de Bruxelles (Belgium)<br />

3 Institut Supérieur Pédagogique de la Gombe (RD C<strong>on</strong>go)<br />

Les c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>nes implosives « s<strong>on</strong>t produites par une expansi<strong>on</strong> de la cavité bucco-pharyngale<br />

pendant l’occlusi<strong>on</strong>, ce qui a pour effet de réduire la pressi<strong>on</strong> de l’air buccal et ainsi de<br />

compenser toute augmentati<strong>on</strong> provoquée par le flux d’air traversant la glotte pendant la<br />

phase de voisement» (Clements, 2004 : 158). Et Clements et Rialland (2008 :57) indiquent<br />

que l’une des caractéristiques particulières aux langues africaines « especially ɓ and ɗ, are<br />

frequent in languages of the Sudanic belt, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> they are about twelve times comm<strong>on</strong>er than<br />

elsew<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> in the world. Implosives occur even more frequently, it appears, in Cushitic and<br />

Omotic languages of the East z<strong>on</strong>e, and are also found in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages of the South»<br />

(Clements, et al., 2008). En ce qui c<strong>on</strong>cerne spécialement le bantu, Madies<strong>on</strong> (Maddies<strong>on</strong>,<br />

2003 :28) déclare que « languages of the northwest, the eastern coastal area and the southeast<br />

often have a least <strong>on</strong>e implosive, most frequently a bilabial, but implosives are generally<br />

absent in the languages of the C<strong>on</strong>go bassin and southwest ». Cette affirmati<strong>on</strong> nous semble<br />

excessive du fait que les langues bantu localisées au nord-ouest de la République<br />

Démocratique du C<strong>on</strong>go présentent un système ph<strong>on</strong>ologique particulier distinct des langues<br />

bantu du Sud (Grégoire, 2003), notamment par la présence des labiovélaires et implosives.<br />

Notre étude c<strong>on</strong>siste :<br />

1. Nous présent<strong>on</strong>s la situati<strong>on</strong> pour chaque langue à partir des d<strong>on</strong>nées de terrain, le<br />

répertoire dans une dizaine des langues bantu décrites ou n<strong>on</strong> se trouvant entre C<strong>on</strong>go-<br />

Ubangi et indiquer leurs corresp<strong>on</strong>dances au Proto-bantu.<br />

2. Entreprendre l’analyse des corresp<strong>on</strong>dances ph<strong>on</strong>ologiques de ces que nous regroup<strong>on</strong>s en<br />

trois catégories :<br />

- les langues sans c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>nes implosives (Mosangé)<br />

*b > b, ø<br />

*d > d, ø<br />

- les langues ayant des implosives /ɓ, ɗ/ f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong>nant comme alloph<strong>on</strong>es à leurs<br />

corresp<strong>on</strong>dantes explosives /b, d/ (Bol<strong>on</strong>dó, Ebwela, M<strong>on</strong>y<strong>on</strong>go)<br />

*b > b ̴ ɓ<br />

*d > d ̴ ɗ<br />

- les langues d<strong>on</strong>t les implosives <strong>on</strong>t le statut des ph<strong>on</strong>èmes et disposant des paires minimales<br />

implosives/explosives (Libóbi, Lingɔmbɛ, Pagaɓete)<br />

*b > b *ɗ > d<br />

> ɓ > ɗ<br />

Exemples :<br />

Libóbi *bʊd > bo-ɓóli ‘briser’<br />

*bʊd > bo-bóli ‘manquer’<br />

Lingɔmbɛ Bobo *beede > ma-bɛ́lɛ ‘lait’<br />

*beede > li-ɓɛ̂ ‘sein’<br />

Pagaɓéte *jib > yib-ɛ́ye ‘voler’<br />

GS


*jɩb > yiɓ-ɛ́ye ‘savoir’<br />

3. Discuter de la double hypothèse :<br />

- les implosives s<strong>on</strong>t issues de l’évoluti<strong>on</strong> ph<strong>on</strong>ologique régulière à partir du proto-bantu,<br />

peut-être suivant l’hypothèse fortis/lenis) de Stewart (1973)<br />

- les implosives s<strong>on</strong>t des innovati<strong>on</strong>s récentes de ces langues, une créati<strong>on</strong> lexicale motivée<br />

par le symbolisme des s<strong>on</strong>s ;<br />

- tout comme pour les labiovélaires dans ces langues (Bostoen& D<strong>on</strong>zo à paraître), le c<strong>on</strong>tact<br />

avec les langues oubanguiennes ayant les implosives et explosives dans leur système<br />

ph<strong>on</strong>ologique est à l’origine de l’évoluti<strong>on</strong> des c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>nes (Janda, 2006) bantu en implosive et<br />

activant ainsi un processus de créati<strong>on</strong> lexicale à base d’implosives pour les nombreux mots<br />

n’étant pas d’origine proto-bantu.<br />

Travaux cités<br />

Bostoen, Koen et D<strong>on</strong>zo, Jean-Pierre. Language c<strong>on</strong>tact in the C<strong>on</strong>go-Ubangi c<strong>on</strong>fluence<br />

area and the origin of labial-velar stops in Lingombe (<strong>Bantu</strong>, C41, DRC). Diachr<strong>on</strong>ica 30, 4.<br />

(à paraître).<br />

Clements, G. N. 2004. Ph<strong>on</strong>ologie. [éd.] Bernd Heine et Derek Nurse. [trad.] Henry<br />

Tourneux et Jeanne Zerner. Les langues africaines. Paris : Karthala, 6 : 149-192.<br />

Clements, G.N. et Rialland, Annie. 2008. Africa as a ph<strong>on</strong>ological area. [éd.] Bernd Heine<br />

et Derek Nurse. A Linguistic geography of Africa. Cambridge, New York, Melbourne,<br />

Madrid, Cape Town, Singapore, Sao Paulo, Delhi : Cambridge Universty Press.<br />

Grégoire, Claire. 2003. The <strong>Bantu</strong> languages of the forest. [éd.] Derek Nurse et Gérard<br />

Philipps<strong>on</strong>. The <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong> ; New York : Routledge, 19 : 349-370.<br />

Janda, Richard D. 2006. "Ph<strong>on</strong>ologizati<strong>on</strong>" as the start of deph<strong>on</strong>eticizati<strong>on</strong> - or, On sound<br />

Change and its aftermath: Of extensi<strong>on</strong>, generalizati<strong>on</strong>, lexicalizati<strong>on</strong>, and morphologizati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

[éd.] Brian D. Joseph et Richard D. Janda. The Handbook historical linguistics. 2ème éditi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Malden ; Oxford ; Carlt<strong>on</strong> : Blackwell Publishing, 9 : 401-422.<br />

Joseph, Brian D. et Janda, Richard D., [éd.]. 2006. The Handbook of Historical linguistics.<br />

2ème éditi<strong>on</strong>. Malden ; Oxford ; Carlt<strong>on</strong> : Blackwell publishing.<br />

Maddies<strong>on</strong>, Ian. 2003. The sounds of the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. [éd.] Derek Nurse et Gérard<br />

Philipps<strong>on</strong>. The <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong> ; New York : Routledge, 2, : 15-41.<br />

Stewart, J.M. 1973. The lenis stops of the Potou Lago<strong>on</strong> languages and their significance for<br />

pre-<strong>Bantu</strong> rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s. [éd.] M.E. Kropp Dakubu. Research Review. Leg<strong>on</strong> : Institute of<br />

African Studies. University of Ghana, 1-49.<br />

GS


On embedded questi<strong>on</strong>s in Tumbuka<br />

Laura Downing (Göteborg), Marleen van de Vate (CASTL) & T<strong>on</strong>jes Veenstra (ZAS)<br />

laura.downing@sprak.gu.se/m.s.vandevate@gmail.com/veenstra@zas.gwz-berlin.de<br />

Karttunen (1977: 39) c<strong>on</strong>siders ‘indirect alternative and yes/no questi<strong>on</strong>s and single and multiple whquesti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

as bel<strong>on</strong>ging to the same syntactic category.’ In Tumbuka (<strong>Bantu</strong>; Malawi), however, two<br />

different syntactic c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s are used to form indirect questi<strong>on</strong>s, a, so-called, kuti-c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> (1a) or a<br />

relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> (1b):<br />

(1) a. Mwanakazi wa-ku-zizwa kuti Mary wa-ka-cita vici mayiro.<br />

1.woman 1SBJ-PRES-w<strong>on</strong>der that M 1SBJ-PST-do what 6.yesterday<br />

b. Mwanakazi wa-ku-zizwa ico Mary wa-ka-cita mayiro.<br />

1.woman 1SBJ-PRES-w<strong>on</strong>der 7.REL M 1SBJ-PST-do yesterday<br />

BOTH: ‘The woman w<strong>on</strong>ders what Mary did yesterday.’<br />

The kuti-c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> essentially embeds a root questi<strong>on</strong>; the relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> is not possible with root<br />

questi<strong>on</strong>s. This gives an apparent mismatch between the syntax and semantics of the relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>. In<br />

this paper, we address two research questi<strong>on</strong>s raised by these c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s: (i) Is t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> a difference in<br />

interpretati<strong>on</strong> between the kuti-c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> and the relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>? (ii) Why can relative<br />

c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s be interpreted as embedded questi<strong>on</strong>s?<br />

Semantic approaches to embedded questi<strong>on</strong>s predict an asymmetry in the interpretati<strong>on</strong> and distributi<strong>on</strong> of<br />

these two c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s. To answer (i), we investigate two semantic distincti<strong>on</strong>s that could potentially set<br />

apart the two embedded questi<strong>on</strong> strategies of Tumbuka: Extensi<strong>on</strong>al vs. Intensi<strong>on</strong>al distincti<strong>on</strong> (in the sense<br />

of Groenendijk & Stokhof 1984), and C<strong>on</strong>cealed Questi<strong>on</strong>s (Nathan 2005, Frana 2010). We predict that: (a)<br />

if the extensi<strong>on</strong>al/intensi<strong>on</strong>al split plays a role in Tumbuka, we expect that <strong>on</strong>ly intensi<strong>on</strong>al are able to<br />

embed the kuti-c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>, and (b) if the relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> corresp<strong>on</strong>ds to a c<strong>on</strong>cealed questi<strong>on</strong> than<br />

opini<strong>on</strong> verbs, inquisitive verbs, and verbs of relevance should not be able to embed the relative<br />

c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>. C<strong>on</strong>sequently, we expect to find a difference between the form of embedded questi<strong>on</strong>s<br />

following Tumbuka verbs like kumanya (=‘to know’) vs. kuzizwa (=‘to w<strong>on</strong>der’): the former should take the<br />

relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>, while the latter should take the kuti-c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>. These expectati<strong>on</strong>s are not borne out,<br />

however. Both kumanya and kuzizwa can take both relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s and kuti-c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s as<br />

embedded questi<strong>on</strong>s, as illustrated in (3-4) and (1a-b), respectively.<br />

(2) a. kuti-c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong><br />

Musepuka wa-ka-manya kuti aŵo ŵa-ka-mu-pa vi-wangwa m-baani.<br />

1.boy 1SBJ-PST know that 2.REL 2SBJ-PST 1OBJ-give 8-present COP-2.who<br />

b. relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong><br />

Musepuka wa-ka-ŵa-manya aŵo ŵa-ka-mu-pa vi-wangwa.<br />

1.boy 1SBJ-PST-2OBJ-know 2.REL 2SBJ-PST-1OBJ-give 8-presents<br />

BOTH: ‘The boy knew who gave him presents.’<br />

To answer the sec<strong>on</strong>d research questi<strong>on</strong>, we argue that it is the semantic selecti<strong>on</strong>al criteria of the<br />

embedding verb that forces a headless relative to be interpreted as an embedded questi<strong>on</strong>. Furthermore, we<br />

will dem<strong>on</strong>strate that the relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s are not headless relatives, but <strong>on</strong>e with a covert pivot. The<br />

questi<strong>on</strong> word interpretati<strong>on</strong> of this pivot is due it being in the scope of the questi<strong>on</strong>-embedding predicate,<br />

t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>by turning the whole relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> into an embedded questi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Cross-linguistically, we show the same strategy occurs in Igbo, the <strong>on</strong>ly difference being that in this<br />

language the pivot is overt (Uwalaka 1991). Also in this case, the embedded c<strong>on</strong>stituent is not formally<br />

marked as a questi<strong>on</strong>, and the questi<strong>on</strong> semantics comes from the matrix predicate.<br />

References: Frana, Ilaria. 2010. Copular questi<strong>on</strong>s and c<strong>on</strong>cealed questi<strong>on</strong>s. Proceedings of Sinn und<br />

Bedeutung 14. Vienna. Groenendijk, Jeroen, & Martin Stokhof. 1984. Studies <strong>on</strong> the semantics of<br />

questi<strong>on</strong>s and the pragmatics of answers, , University of Amsterdam: PhD. Thesis. Karttunen, Lauri. 1977.<br />

Syntax and semantics of questi<strong>on</strong>s. Linguistics and Philosophy 1, 3-44. Nathan, Lance. 2005. C<strong>on</strong>cealed<br />

questi<strong>on</strong>s: two new proposals. WCCFL 24, 290-298. Somerville, MA: Cascadilla Proceedings. Uwalaka,<br />

Sr. M. Angela (1991) Wh-movement in Igbo. UCL Working Papers in Linguistics 3, 185-209.<br />

GS


A comparis<strong>on</strong> of narrative verb forms in Bena, Nyakyusa, Malila and Nyiha<br />

Helen Eat<strong>on</strong>, SIL <str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g>, helen_eat<strong>on</strong>@sil.org<br />

Many <strong>Bantu</strong> languages have <strong>on</strong>e or more narrative verb forms which may be used to describe a<br />

series of events <strong>on</strong>ce a time framework is established. As noted by Nurse (2008: 120), most<br />

languages have <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e narrative marker, but some languages have different narrative strategies<br />

for different time references. The variety in the formal properties of these narrative verb forms is<br />

an interesting area of investigati<strong>on</strong>, as is the interacti<strong>on</strong> of narrative verb forms with the<br />

establishing tenses in discourse.<br />

The research presented <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> compares the different narrative verb forms exhibited in four<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> languages of south-western Tanzania: Bena (G63), Nyakyusa (M31), Malila (M24) and<br />

Nyiha (M23). Though geographically close, these languages exhibit striking differences in the<br />

formal properties of their narrative verb forms. The table below summarises the forms most<br />

comm<strong>on</strong>ly associated with narrating events in the near past and the far past:<br />

Near past Far past<br />

Bena -i-…-ág-a -i-…-ág-a<br />

Nyakyusa -lɨnkʉ-…-a -lɨnkʉ-…-a<br />

Malila ǎnza -a-…-a -kha-…-a<br />

Nyiha -ha-…-a -ha-…-a<br />

What is particularly interesting is how these verb forms compare with other formally<br />

similar, but functi<strong>on</strong>ally different, verb forms in the languages. The Nyakyusa form -lɨnkʉ-…-a,<br />

for example, can be compared with a progressive c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> in Bena which c<strong>on</strong>sists of the<br />

copula –li, the class 18 locative mu and an infinitive verb. Thus the apparently similar underlying<br />

structure of a-lɨnkʉ-fík-a 3SG-NAR-arrive-FV ‘(and) he arrived’ in Nyakyusa and á-li mu-ku-fík-a<br />

3SG-be LOC18-15-arrive-FV ‘he is arriving’ in Bena is not reflected in a corresp<strong>on</strong>ding functi<strong>on</strong>al<br />

similarity.<br />

After comparing the formal properties of the narrative verb forms in the four languages,<br />

the paper discusses functi<strong>on</strong>al and distributi<strong>on</strong>al criteria, with reference to a corpus of natural<br />

texts, both oral and written. One clear difference between the languages, as shown in the table<br />

above, is that Malila has a different narrative verb form for the near past as for the far past. This is<br />

<strong>on</strong>e of the few differences between the TAM systems of Malila and the neighbouring language<br />

Nyiha, which are otherwise extremely similar.<br />

When less frequently occurring narrative strategies are taken into c<strong>on</strong>siderati<strong>on</strong>, further<br />

differences between the four languages emerge. Bena, for example, may choose not to use its<br />

usual narrative verb form to encode a particular event and instead highlight the event as a<br />

significant development in the event line by means of the c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong> néke plus the subjunctive<br />

verb form -ø-…e or -ø-…-ag-e.<br />

The study shows that Bena, Nyakyusa, Malila and Nyiha differ in interesting ways in<br />

relati<strong>on</strong> to a number of functi<strong>on</strong>al and distributi<strong>on</strong>al questi<strong>on</strong>s. For example, is the narrative verb<br />

form <strong>on</strong>ly used for <strong>on</strong>e degree of past (e.g. far past) or is it used for other pasts, or other moods<br />

(e.g. subjunctive) or tenses (e.g. future)? Does the narrative verb form always follow a different<br />

verb form which establishes the time framework? In l<strong>on</strong>ger stretches of discourse, does this<br />

establishing tense need to be repeated at the start of a new episode? When a narrative verb form is<br />

not used w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> it might be expected, is the effect to highlight a significant event, or to express<br />

particular aspectual properties of an event? These criteria are a helpful start towards creating a<br />

typology of narrative verb forms in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages.<br />

GS


Abstract of proposed paper for <strong>Bantu</strong>5, Paris, 12 - 15 June, 2013<br />

Informati<strong>on</strong> structure c<strong>on</strong>straints <strong>on</strong> Swahili word-order: A Dynamic Syntax analysis<br />

Discourse c<strong>on</strong>text<br />

Ty(e), Fo(Bibi')<br />

name deleted<br />

email address deleted<br />

As in other <strong>Bantu</strong> languages (e.g. Bearth 2003, Mchombo 2004), word-order within Swahili main<br />

clauses is structurally unrestricted, all six permutati<strong>on</strong>s of S, V and O being possible. The different<br />

orders are, however, restricted by pragmatic and informati<strong>on</strong>-structure c<strong>on</strong>straints, each order being<br />

associated with particular arrangements of topic and focus.<br />

In this paper we develop an analysis of the c<strong>on</strong>text-dependence of Swahili word-order, based <strong>on</strong> data<br />

from questi<strong>on</strong>-answer pairs establishing either new informati<strong>on</strong> focus or c<strong>on</strong>trastive focus. The<br />

analysis adopts the perspective of Dynamic Syntax (Cann et al. 2005), a theory which models the<br />

process of establishing semantic representati<strong>on</strong>s (modelled as semantic trees) from words in c<strong>on</strong>text<br />

<strong>on</strong> a left-to-right basis, and which is well suited to analysing the interacti<strong>on</strong> between word-order,<br />

c<strong>on</strong>text and anaphoric expressi<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

We develop an explicit model of (the relevant partial) c<strong>on</strong>text by defining a representati<strong>on</strong> of the<br />

discourse c<strong>on</strong>text as a set of discourse topics c<strong>on</strong>sisting of logical expressi<strong>on</strong>s of arbitrary type and<br />

then show how nominal and anaphoric expressi<strong>on</strong>s are mapped <strong>on</strong>to this c<strong>on</strong>text set in an<br />

incremental, left-to-right fashi<strong>on</strong>. As the input string is parsed and new comp<strong>on</strong>ents added to the<br />

semantic tree, each comp<strong>on</strong>ent is tested to see if it is linked to a discourse topic as seen in the<br />

snapshot in (1). At the end of the parse, any unlinked node represents a focused comp<strong>on</strong>ent.<br />

(1) Snapshot of parsing Bibi 'grandmother' at the outset of parsing<br />

Bibi a-li-pik-a vi-azi<br />

1.grandmother SM1-PST-cook-FV 8-potato<br />

'Grandmother cooked potatoes'<br />

topic<br />

Ty(e), Fo(Bibi')<br />

?Ty(t)<br />

Ty(e), Fo(x), ◇ Ty(e→t), Fo(y)<br />

We show how from this perspective different generalisati<strong>on</strong>s about word-order and informati<strong>on</strong><br />

structure in Swahili appear: 1) Topics are placed at the left edge of the clause, 2) foci are placed at the<br />

right edge of the clause, and 3) clauses without discourse topics have presentati<strong>on</strong>al focus. We also<br />

show how prosodic marking of focus interacts with informati<strong>on</strong> structure c<strong>on</strong>straints <strong>on</strong> word-order:<br />

Focus can be marked exclusively by prosodic prominence but <strong>on</strong>ly with SVO word-order, providing<br />

evidence that this is the unmarked word-order in Swahili.<br />

We then extend the analysis to further data w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> informati<strong>on</strong> structure at least partially determines<br />

word-order: 1) the order of objects in double-object c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s, 2) noun-dem<strong>on</strong>strative order, and<br />

3) subject inversi<strong>on</strong> in relative clauses.<br />

The paper provides a detailed dem<strong>on</strong>strati<strong>on</strong> of the formal properties of how word-order in Swahili<br />

is determined by c<strong>on</strong>textual factors and how these factors can be explained by an explicit<br />

formalisati<strong>on</strong> of available discourse topics. Through this the paper c<strong>on</strong>tributes to the analysis of<br />

Swahili syntax as well as to our understanding of the interacti<strong>on</strong> between syntax and pragmatics.<br />

Cann, R., R. Kemps<strong>on</strong> & L. Marten, 2005. The Dynamics of Language: an introducti<strong>on</strong>. Elsevier<br />

Academic Press, San Diego.<br />

Bearth, T. 2003. Syntax. In: Nurse, D. and G. Philipps<strong>on</strong> 2003, eds. The <strong>Bantu</strong> <strong>Languages</strong>. Routledge,<br />

L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>: 121-142.<br />

Mchombo, S., 2004. The syntax of Chichewa. CUP, Cambridge.<br />

GS


Les processus vocalique en ɛmbɔ́sí (C25): Dialecte de mb<strong>on</strong>dzi<br />

Dans le dialecte ɛmbɔ́sí (C25) parlé dans la sous préfecture de Boundji (envir<strong>on</strong>s<br />

25000 locuteurs d’après la SIL-C<strong>on</strong>go) en République du C<strong>on</strong>go Brazzaville, les<br />

voyelles s<strong>on</strong>t soumises à plusieurs processus ph<strong>on</strong>ologiques. Ces processus<br />

c<strong>on</strong>cernent à la fois la compatibilité desdites voyelles à apparaitre ensemble<br />

c<strong>on</strong>nue sous le nom d’Harm<strong>on</strong>ie vocalique et les différentes stratégies de<br />

résoluti<strong>on</strong> des suites vocaliques créées par la c<strong>on</strong>caténati<strong>on</strong> morphologiques.<br />

Cette communicati<strong>on</strong> sera structurée en deux parties. La première étudie le<br />

processus d’harm<strong>on</strong>ie vocalique. Je commencerai par classifier les voyelles de ce<br />

dialecte en f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong> de leurs traits ph<strong>on</strong>ologiques. J’indiquerai ensuite les<br />

combinais<strong>on</strong>s vocaliques qui ne s<strong>on</strong>t pas attestées dans une racine, avant<br />

d’aborder la questi<strong>on</strong> de l’harm<strong>on</strong>ie proprement dite. Celle-ci cherchera à<br />

déterminer, en f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong> des différentes formes réalisées, le ou les trait(s)<br />

ph<strong>on</strong>ologique(s) qui opère(nt) dans ce processus. Le dialecte de mb<strong>on</strong>dzi étant<br />

une langue agglutinante, nous m<strong>on</strong>trer<strong>on</strong>s que l’harm<strong>on</strong>ie vocalique entre les<br />

voyelles de la racine et les voyelles périphériques à la racine est favorisée par les<br />

traits différents sel<strong>on</strong> qu’il s’agit de l’harm<strong>on</strong>ie entre les voyelles de la racine avec<br />

celle du préfixe de classe nominale ou entre les voyelles de la racine avec celle du<br />

suffixe. La deuxième partie c<strong>on</strong>cerne l’examen des différentes stratégies de<br />

résoluti<strong>on</strong> de suites vocaliques créées par la c<strong>on</strong>caténati<strong>on</strong> morphologique. Le<br />

dialecte de mb<strong>on</strong>dzi en compte trois : la formati<strong>on</strong> de glide, l’élisi<strong>on</strong> et la<br />

coalescence vocalique. Nous m<strong>on</strong>trer<strong>on</strong>s comment chaque stratégie qui<br />

c<strong>on</strong>cerne un type de suite vocalique précis émerge à une fr<strong>on</strong>tière morphologique<br />

bien déterminée. Nous mettr<strong>on</strong>s enfin un accent particulier sur un épiphénomène<br />

très régulier à la fr<strong>on</strong>tière de deux ph<strong>on</strong>ologiques : l’All<strong>on</strong>gement Compensatoire<br />

(AC). Il est en partie favorisé par l’élisi<strong>on</strong> de la voyelle finale du premier mot<br />

ph<strong>on</strong>ologique, mais sa motivati<strong>on</strong> parait être « la préservati<strong>on</strong> de la forme ou du<br />

poids syllabique d’origine » (De Chene & Anders<strong>on</strong> 1979 :506) à la fr<strong>on</strong>tière où il<br />

émerge.<br />

GS


Automatic detecti<strong>on</strong> of copulatives in Northern Sotho corpora<br />

Gertrud Faaß, University of Hildesheim, Germany, gertrud.faass@uni-hildesheim.de<br />

Elsabé Taljard, University of Pretoria, South Africa, elsabe.taljard@up.ac.za<br />

The copulative in Northern Sotho occurs in many different forms, Prinsloo (2002:22) regards copulatives as<br />

„probably the most complicated grammatical system to master“. Traditi<strong>on</strong>al grammars distinguish between so-called<br />

identifying, descriptive and associative copulatives, which reflect static and dynamic forms and occur in several<br />

moods and tenses. C<strong>on</strong>sider the following extract from the 48 categories currently distinguished in Table (1). The<br />

task of detecting copulatives in a corpus, even in <strong>on</strong>e annotated with parts of speech, cannot be called trivial.<br />

copulative type mood tense polarity cl/pers/num example<br />

Stative Identifying Indicative present<br />

tense<br />

Stative Identifying Situative present<br />

tense<br />

Stative Identifying Situative present<br />

tense<br />

Stativ Identifying Situative past<br />

tense<br />

positive 3rd pers.sg. (m<strong>on</strong>na) ke (morutiši)<br />

(man) is-3rd (teacher)<br />

‘(the man) is (a teacher)’<br />

positive 3rd pers.sg. (ge m<strong>on</strong>na) e CSNEUT le VCOP (morutiši N01 )<br />

(as man) SUBJ-NEUT is-NEUT (teacher)<br />

‘(as the man) is (a teacher)’<br />

negative 3rd pers.sg. (ge m<strong>on</strong>na) e CSNEUT se VCOP_neg (morutiši)<br />

(as man) is-NEUT NEG (teacher)<br />

‘(as the man) is not (a teacher)’<br />

positive 3rd pers.sg. e CSNEUT be VCOP e CSNEUT le VCOP (morutiši)<br />

SUBJ-NEUT is SUBJ-NEUT is (teacher)<br />

‘(some<strong>on</strong>e) was (a teacher)’<br />

Table (1) examples of Norhern Sotho copulatives<br />

In our project 1 , we pursue the development of electr<strong>on</strong>ic dicti<strong>on</strong>aries (first, but not <strong>on</strong>ly) for the Sotho and Nguni<br />

languages of South Africa and we begin with Northern Sotho, as for this language, a ca. 5.5 milli<strong>on</strong> words corpus<br />

with parts of speech annotated exists (the Pretoria Sepedi Corpus (PSC, cf. De Schryver and Prinsloo (2000)) and<br />

Faaß et al (2009)).<br />

Linguists usually provide exhaustive descripti<strong>on</strong>s of the Northern Sotho copulatives, e.g. from a linguistic<br />

perspective (Taljard (1999)), or from the perspective of computati<strong>on</strong>al processing (Faaß (2010). Electr<strong>on</strong>ic<br />

knowledge bases intended for the development of such e-dicti<strong>on</strong>aries attempt to capture all possible forms, too, in<br />

order to provide the required informati<strong>on</strong> for different target users. E-dicti<strong>on</strong>aries designed for beginners <strong>on</strong> the<br />

other hand should focus <strong>on</strong> the most comm<strong>on</strong> copulatives and their arguments to avoid c<strong>on</strong>fusi<strong>on</strong>, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>fore, we<br />

need to know which of the copulatives to select for such user-groups. Here, frequencies of occurrence in corpora<br />

are taken as a basis for their inclusi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

However, if we attempt to extract those data from corpora with the goal of detecting their frequencies of<br />

occurrence, we need to identify the morpho-syntactic patterns that these c<strong>on</strong>stellati<strong>on</strong>s fulfill and given the extent<br />

of these linguistic units, the questi<strong>on</strong> arises whether it is possible to define linguistic and distributi<strong>on</strong>al 2 patterns<br />

that not <strong>on</strong>ly match all the forms appearing in a corpus, but also identify their linguistic category correctly. The<br />

problem <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is that linguistic categories such as identifying, descriptive and associative copulatives were mainly<br />

described <strong>on</strong> semantic and <strong>on</strong>ly partially <strong>on</strong> morpho-syntactic grounds (Lombard (1985)).<br />

In the presentati<strong>on</strong>, an overview of existing linguistic descripti<strong>on</strong>s of the Northern Sotho copulative will be given and<br />

we shall describe a methodology to semi-automatically extract copulatives out of the PSC. So far, we've developed<br />

queries that successfully identify and extract most of the identifying known copulative c<strong>on</strong>stellati<strong>on</strong>s (copula and<br />

their objects) for a further semi-automated processing. Currently, these queries are extended to other known<br />

c<strong>on</strong>stellati<strong>on</strong>s. We will present all of the distributi<strong>on</strong>al categories detected and the frequencies of occurrences of the<br />

copulatives found. Lastly, typical (=frequent) arguments that the copula appear with will be outlined.<br />

Bibliography<br />

De Schryver and Prinsloo (2000). G-M De Schryver & D.J. Prinsloo. The compilati<strong>on</strong> of electr<strong>on</strong>ic corpora, with<br />

special reference to the African languages. Southern African Linguistics and Applied Language Studies 18(1-4): 89-<br />

106.<br />

1 Scientific e-Lexicography for Africa SeLA, cf. http:/www.uni-hildesheim.de/iwist-cl/projects/sela/index.html<br />

2 Distributi<strong>on</strong> is meant <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> as the c<strong>on</strong>textual envir<strong>on</strong>ment in which an item appears.<br />

GS


GS<br />

Faaß (2010). G. Faaß. A morphosyntactic descripti<strong>on</strong> of Northern Sotho as a basis for an automated translati<strong>on</strong><br />

from Northern Sotho into English. PhD thesis, University of Pretoria, http://upetd.up.ac.za/thesis/available/etd-<br />

10092010-134539/<br />

Faaß et al. (2009). G. Faaß & U. Heid & E. Taljard & D.J. Prinsloo. Part-of-Speech tagging in Northern Sotho:<br />

disambiguating polysemous functi<strong>on</strong> words. Proceedings of the EACL2009 Workshop <strong>on</strong> Language Technologies for<br />

African <strong>Languages</strong> (AfLaT 2009), 38 - 45<br />

Lombard (1985). D.P. Lombard. 1985. Introducti<strong>on</strong> to the Grammar of Northern Sotho. Pretoria: J.L. van Schaik.<br />

Prinsloo (2002). D.J. Prinsloo. The Lemmatizati<strong>on</strong> of Copulatives in Northern Sotho. Lexikos 12: 21-43.<br />

Prinsloo and Heid (2006). D.J. Prinsloo & U. Heid. Creating Word Class tagged Corpora for Northern Sotho by<br />

Linguistically Informed Bootstrapping. Proceedings of the Lesser Used <strong>Languages</strong> and Computer Linguistics<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>C<strong>on</strong>ference</str<strong>on</strong>g>. (79-116). Bolzano, Italy 27th-28th October 2005.<br />

Taljard (1999). E. Taljard. Die Kopulatief van Noord-Sotho: 'n Nuwe Perspektief. Unpublished D.Litt. Thesis.<br />

Pretoria: University of Pretoria.


Nominal licensing and nominal morphology: a Zulu case study<br />

It has l<strong>on</strong>g been noted that abstract case has a complicated relati<strong>on</strong>ship to overt case morphology in many casemarking<br />

languages (e.g. Andrews 1982, Sigurdss<strong>on</strong> 1989, Schütze 1997, Fanselow 2000; Woolford 2006, a.o.). In this<br />

talk I address the relati<strong>on</strong>ship between abstract case and case morphology in the <strong>Bantu</strong> language Zulu. While <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages have been argued to lack case altogether (Harford Perez 1985; Ndayiragije 1999; Alsina 2001; Baker 2003;<br />

Carstens and Diercks to appear; Diercks to appear), I argue that Zulu has both a system of structural case licensing<br />

inside vPand a system of case-marking morphology. Specifically, I propose that we can understand case morphology in<br />

Zulu, and more broadly across languages, in terms of two parameters: [+/-intrinsic] (which captures whether structural<br />

licensing is required) and [+/-phi-projecting] (which captures whether case-marked nominals are accessible for<br />

agreement). These two parameters combine to yield the range of case morphology found in languages with better-studied<br />

case systems, like Icelandic, while also giving a fourth possibility—that of a “default” case marker—exemplified in Zulu.<br />

Mapping out this system in Zulu affords us a blueprint for future investigati<strong>on</strong>s of structural and morphological case in<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> languages. I further argue that we can use this case system proposed for Zulu to understand the “t<strong>on</strong>al case”<br />

patterns described in Otji<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>ro by Kavari et al. (2012).<br />

Evidence for structural case in Zulu comes from the distributi<strong>on</strong> of augmentlessnominals. Unlike nominals marked<br />

with an augment (pre-prefix) vowel (AUG), these nominals are restricted to vP-internal positi<strong>on</strong>s (Halpert 2012). In<br />

particular, augmentlessnominals must be the highest element inside vP, regardless of grammatical functi<strong>on</strong> or the way in<br />

which a nominal achieves that positi<strong>on</strong>, as with raising-to-object in (1b) or base-generated vP-internal subjects in (2). I<br />

argue that this distributi<strong>on</strong> reflects structural case licensing in Zulu: augmentlessnominals must be case-licensed by a head<br />

that probes vP. Evidence from the c<strong>on</strong>joint/disjoint verbal alternati<strong>on</strong> (cf. Buell 2005) independently suggests the need<br />

for such a probing head.<br />

(1) a. *a-ngi-funi [ukuthi muntu a-cule] (2) a. à-kù-phèk-ángà mùntù í-qándà<br />

NEG-1sg-want that 1pers<strong>on</strong> 1sjc-sing NEG-17s-cook-NEG.PST 1pers<strong>on</strong> AUG-5egg<br />

b. à-ngí-fúní mùntùi [ùkùthì ti á- cúlè ] “Nobody cooked the/an/any egg.”<br />

NEG-1sg-want 1pers<strong>on</strong> that 1sjc.sing b. *a-ku-phek-anga (u)-muntu qanda<br />

“I d<strong>on</strong>‟t want any<strong>on</strong>e to sing.” NEG-17s-cook-NEG.PST (AUG)-1pers<strong>on</strong> 5egg<br />

Evidence for morphological case comes from the nominal prefix system in Zulu. I argue that the augment vowel is an<br />

intrinsic case marker that can license any nominal independent of structural c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>. When the augment is absent,<br />

as in the c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s above, structural case is required. We find similar distincti<strong>on</strong>s in Zulu's oblique prefix system:<br />

certain oblique prefixes are in complementary distributi<strong>on</strong> with the augment and can license any nominal, al<strong>on</strong>g the lines<br />

of in<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>nt case; others require an external means of licensing, like quirky-cased nominals (e.g. Woolford 2006). As with<br />

languages like Icelandic, Zulu exhibits a difference between oblique cases and n<strong>on</strong>-oblique cases: <strong>on</strong>ly the n<strong>on</strong>-oblique<br />

cases can co-occur with subject agreement.<br />

Implicati<strong>on</strong>s: In this analysis, the augment vowel emerges as a new type of case -- <strong>on</strong>e that can in<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>ntly license<br />

nominals in any structural positi<strong>on</strong> (while allowing them to serve as targets for agreement). This type of case fills a<br />

natural gap in case typology, providing evidence for a „default‟ licenser (c<strong>on</strong>tra, e.g., Schutze 2001). At the same time,<br />

while structural case in Zulu follows certain familiar cross-linguistic patterns, the structural c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong> in which case is<br />

licensed is novel. Previous studies that have argued against case in <strong>Bantu</strong> have largely focused <strong>on</strong> the positi<strong>on</strong> in which<br />

nominative case is licensed cross-linguistically. In this talk, I show that while such a positi<strong>on</strong> indeed does not display case<br />

effects, vP-internal positi<strong>on</strong>s do. This research suggests, then, that it is worthwhile to re-examine the issue of case in<br />

other <strong>Bantu</strong> languages in terms of these novel licensing c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s. Recent work by Kavari et al. (2012) suggests that<br />

the case signature of Zulu occurs elsew<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> in the <strong>Bantu</strong> family. They show that in Otji<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>ro, nominalsare marked with<br />

<strong>on</strong>e of several “t<strong>on</strong>e cases.” Am<strong>on</strong>g these t<strong>on</strong>al patterns, they identify <strong>on</strong>e (“complement case”) that appears <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong> the<br />

highest element in vP—just like Zulu augmentlessnominals—and another (“default case”) that can appear <strong>on</strong> nominals in<br />

any positi<strong>on</strong>—like augmented nominals in Zulu. Though Otji<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>ro, like Zulu, has an active augment morphology<br />

system, it appears that unlike Zulu, it does not implicate the augment in its case system and instead depends solely <strong>on</strong><br />

t<strong>on</strong>al morphology. Comparing Zulu and Otji<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>ro thus not <strong>on</strong>ly provides additi<strong>on</strong>al support for the system of case<br />

proposed <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>, but gives us a sense of the type of variati<strong>on</strong> that we will find in cases systems across the <strong>Bantu</strong> family.<br />

Selected references: Alsina2001. Is case another name for grammatical functi<strong>on</strong>? Evidence from object asymmetries.In Objects and<br />

other subjects.Andrews 1982. A note <strong>on</strong> the c<strong>on</strong>stituent structure of adverbials and auxiliaries.LI 13.<br />

Carstens&Diercksforthcoming.Parameterizing case and activity: Hyperraising in <strong>Bantu</strong>. Proceedings of NELS 40.Diercks2012.<br />

Parameterizing case: Evidence from <strong>Bantu</strong>. Syntax 15. Harford Perez 1985.Aspects of complementati<strong>on</strong> in three <strong>Bantu</strong> languages.<br />

PhD thesis. Halpert 2012. Case, agreement, EPP, and informati<strong>on</strong> structure: a quadruple dissociati<strong>on</strong> in Zulu. Proceedings of<br />

WCCFL29.Kavari, Marten, & van der Wal2012.T<strong>on</strong>e cases in Otji<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>ro: head-complement relati<strong>on</strong>s, linear order, and<br />

informati<strong>on</strong> structure. Africana Linguistica XVIII. Schu ̈ tze2001.On the nature of default case.Syntax 4.<br />

GS


Dislocati<strong>on</strong> via movement in Zulu: evidence from raising-to-object<br />

Claire Halpert & Jochen Zeller<br />

University of Minnesota (USA) & University of KwaZulu-Natal (South Africa)<br />

halpert@umn.edu & zeller@ukzn.ac.za<br />

In this talk we present novel evidence from the intersecti<strong>on</strong> of raising-to-object (RtO) and<br />

dislocati<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s in Zulu (Nguni; S 42) to argue that at least some dislocated CPs in Zulu<br />

originate in argument positi<strong>on</strong>s and dislocate via movement. This c<strong>on</strong>clusi<strong>on</strong> sheds light <strong>on</strong> our<br />

understanding of CP-extrapositi<strong>on</strong> and the nature of dislocated positi<strong>on</strong>s in <strong>Bantu</strong> more generally,<br />

providing counterevidence to claims that all dislocated elements in <strong>Bantu</strong> are base-generated in vPexternal<br />

adjunct positi<strong>on</strong>s (cf. e.g. Bresnan and Mchombo 1987; Baker 2003).<br />

Our argument proceeds in two parts: first, we establish, following Halpert (2012), that RtO in<br />

Zulu is A-movement to a vP-internal positi<strong>on</strong>. Sec<strong>on</strong>d, we show that the raised DP can trigger<br />

object marking in the main clause, resulting in right dislocati<strong>on</strong> of both the agreed-with DP and the<br />

CP from which it originated. In order to serve as the source for the raised argument, the CP must<br />

occupy an argument positi<strong>on</strong> in the main clause. We c<strong>on</strong>clude that this CP must reach its dislocated<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> via movement – base generati<strong>on</strong> is, in this case, not a possibility.<br />

Raising-to-object as A-movement: Zulu has several predicates that opti<strong>on</strong>ally allow RtO,<br />

including -funa “want” and -lindele “expect”. Raised objects precede the complementizer of the<br />

embedded CP (see (1)), a positi<strong>on</strong> generally unavailable to left-dislocated elements; furthermore,<br />

we show that RtO preserves idiomatic meanings, and creates new antecedents for binding – all<br />

indicators that A-movement has occurred. We also present evidence that the landing site of the<br />

raised DP is a vP-internal A-positi<strong>on</strong>: it follows the c<strong>on</strong>joint form of the verb (see e.g. Buell 2005),<br />

precedes low adverbs, and can be focused, questi<strong>on</strong>ed or augmentless (see Halpert 2012).<br />

CP-dislocati<strong>on</strong> as movement: Perhaps the most striking objecthood property the raised DP<br />

displays is that it can be object-marked <strong>on</strong> the main verb, as shown in (2). When the raised object<br />

triggers object marking in the main clause, it still appears between the main verb and the embedded<br />

complementizer, but all syntactic diagnostics suggest that the raised DP is in fact in a dislocated<br />

positi<strong>on</strong>: it appears with the disjoint form of the verb and can no l<strong>on</strong>ger be focused, questi<strong>on</strong>ed, or<br />

appear without an augment. Based <strong>on</strong> evidence from the c<strong>on</strong>joint/disjoint alternati<strong>on</strong>, the positi<strong>on</strong> of<br />

adverbs, and the behavior of certain complementizers that do not permit dislocati<strong>on</strong>, we then argue<br />

that a CP that follows a dislocated object-marked DP must also be in a P-external positi<strong>on</strong>. From<br />

this we c<strong>on</strong>clude that the CP in c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s like (2) must have moved from an argument positi<strong>on</strong><br />

in the main clause to its dislocated positi<strong>on</strong>: since base-generated adjuncts are islands (Huang 1982,<br />

a.o.), a derivati<strong>on</strong> in which RtO occurs from an already-dislocated CP would be ruled out. RtO must<br />

have taken place when the CP is still inside the P; <strong>on</strong>ly after RtO and dislocati<strong>on</strong> of the derived<br />

object is the CP moved to a positi<strong>on</strong> in the right clausal periphery. Our result thus provides<br />

evidence against claims that dislocated arguments are always base-generated by showing that the<br />

extrapositi<strong>on</strong> of CP-arguments is an instance of movement (cf. Büring & Hartmann 1997).<br />

(1) Ngi-fún-á ú-Sípho [CP ukuthi á-sébénz-é é-sí-tolo sa-mi kúsasa].<br />

1 st SG-want-FV 1a-1a.Sipho that 1a.SM-work-SUBJ LOC-7-store 7.POSS-1 st .SG tomorrow<br />

(2) Ngi-ya-m-fún-a]VP ú-Sípho [CP ukuthi á-sébénz-é é-sí-tolo sa-mi kúsasa].<br />

1 st SG-DIS-1.OM-want-FV 1a-1a.Sipho that 1a.SM-work-SUBJ LOC-7-store 7.POSS-1 st .SG tomorrow<br />

'I want Sipho to work in my store tomorrow.'<br />

References<br />

Baker, M. 2003. Agreement, Dislocati<strong>on</strong>, and Partial C<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>ality. In: A. Carnie, H. Harley, and M. Willie,<br />

Formal approaches to functi<strong>on</strong> in grammar: in h<strong>on</strong>or of Eloise Jelinek. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 107-132.<br />

Bresnan, J. & S. A. Mchombo. 1987. Topic, Pr<strong>on</strong>oun, and Agreement in Chicheŵa. Language 63(4), 741-782.<br />

Buell, L. 2005. Issues in Zulu Verbal Morphosyntax. Ph.D. thesis, University of California, Los Angeles.<br />

Büring, D. & K. Hartmann. 1997. Doing the right thing. The Linguistic Review 14, 1-42.<br />

Halpert, C. 2012. Argument licensing and agreement in Zulu. Ph.D. thesis, MIT, Cambridge.<br />

Huang, J. 1982. Logical Relati<strong>on</strong>s in Chinese and the Theory of Grammar. Ph.D. thesis, MIT, Cambridge.<br />

GS


Bàsàa object left-dislocati<strong>on</strong>, topicalizati<strong>on</strong> and the syntax-ph<strong>on</strong>ology mapping of int<strong>on</strong>ati<strong>on</strong> phrases<br />

Fatima Hamlaoui & Emmanuel-Moselly Makasso<br />

Goethe-Universität Frankfurt/ZAS<br />

fhaml044atgmail.com, makasso2atgmail.com<br />

In this talk, we c<strong>on</strong>centrate <strong>on</strong> Topicalizati<strong>on</strong> in Bàsàa (A43, Camero<strong>on</strong>). We show that Bàsàa is similar to<br />

languages like Mbuun (B87, Bostoen & Mundeke 2011) or Lango (Nilotic, No<strong>on</strong>an & Bavin Woock, 1978) in that<br />

a certain type of passive sentences are expressed through object left-dislocati<strong>on</strong>. What is particularly interesting is<br />

that Bàsàa also has both passive morphology (c<strong>on</strong>trary to Mbuun and Lango) and n<strong>on</strong>-passive left-dislocati<strong>on</strong>. We<br />

discuss the syntax, prosody and informati<strong>on</strong> structure of these three types of sentences.<br />

Bàsàa is a Subject-Verb-Object language that displays the rich derivati<strong>on</strong>al verbal morphology typically<br />

found in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. Passive is derived by means of suffixati<strong>on</strong> of a verb extensi<strong>on</strong>. This is briefly illustrated<br />

in (1) and (2) (see Hyman 2003 for details).<br />

(1) tòlò à-nʤɛ.́ (2) tòlò à-nʤéßâ.<br />

mouse sm1-past1-eat mouse sm1-past1-eat-pass<br />

The mouse ate. The mouse was eaten.<br />

Whenever the verb displays passive morphology, the patient is realized as the subject and the agent is<br />

banned from being introduced as an oblique noun phrase. In other words, Bàsàa <strong>on</strong>ly displays agentless passive<br />

sentences. In order for both the agent and the patient to be expressed when the latter is the `locus of viewpoint' or<br />

`topic', <strong>on</strong>e has to resort to the structure given in (3): an active sentence in which the object appears in clauseinitial<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> and a coreferential pr<strong>on</strong>oun appears in the can<strong>on</strong>ical object positi<strong>on</strong>, i.e. object left-dislocati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The functi<strong>on</strong>al passive strategy illustrated in (3) is similar to a can<strong>on</strong>ical sentence in that it can be associated with<br />

an all-focus interpretati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

(3) tòlò síŋgá ì-nʤɛ́ ɲɛ.́<br />

mouse cat sm7-past1-eat it<br />

The mouse, the cat ate it. (= The mouse was eaten by the cat)<br />

We argue that: (i) the functi<strong>on</strong>al passive left-dislocati<strong>on</strong> strategy is the result of a general dispreference<br />

against n<strong>on</strong>-subject agents in Bàsàa and (ii) passive left-dislocated objects sit in a preverbal positi<strong>on</strong> within the<br />

inflecti<strong>on</strong>al domain of the clause, i.e. they are not `left-peripheral' topics. Additi<strong>on</strong>ally, we explore the possibility<br />

that what might ultimately distinguish Bàsàa from <strong>Bantu</strong> languages with passive subject/object reversal is the lack<br />

of verb movement above the positi<strong>on</strong> hosting the grammatical subject.<br />

Finally, we discuss the prosody of topicalizati<strong>on</strong> in Bàsàa. We show that both passive and n<strong>on</strong>-passive<br />

dislocated objects phrase separately from the rest of the clause. This is briefly and partially illustrated in (4) and<br />

(5). Whenever a noun phrase c<strong>on</strong>taining « all » (final HL in isolati<strong>on</strong>) phrases together with the c<strong>on</strong>situent that<br />

follows – i.e. in subject positi<strong>on</strong> or in ditransitives -, « all » realizes a final H and the L t<strong>on</strong>e triggers downstep <strong>on</strong><br />

a following H. The failure of this ph<strong>on</strong>ological process to apply in left-dislocated phrases indicates that a prosodic<br />

break separates them from the following c<strong>on</strong>stituent.<br />

(4) ɓɔ̀ɔ̀ŋgɛ́-ɓɔ́-ɓásô sóɣól à-ǹtɛ́hɛ́ ɓɔ.̀<br />

Children-them-all grand-father sm1-past1-see them<br />

All the children, the grand-father saw them. (= all the children were seen by the grand-father)<br />

(5) ɓɔ̀ɔ̀ŋgɛ́-ɓɔ́-ɓásô sóɣól à-jè màséé nì ɓɔ.̀<br />

Children-them-all grand-father sm1-pres.be happy with them<br />

All the children, the grand-father is happy with them.<br />

We propose that a syntax-prosody mapping c<strong>on</strong>straint based <strong>on</strong> the largest extended projecti<strong>on</strong> of the verb<br />

(Szendroi 2001) is the most straightforward way to account for the phrasing pattern observed in Bàsàa leftdislocati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Bostoen, K. & L. Mundeke. 2011. Passiveness and inversi<strong>on</strong> in Mbuun (<strong>Bantu</strong> B87, RDC). Studies in Language 35(1):<br />

72-111.Hyman, L. 2003. Bàsàa (A43). In D. Nurse & G. Philipps<strong>on</strong> (eds.), The <strong>Bantu</strong> <strong>Languages</strong>.No<strong>on</strong>an, M. & E.<br />

Bavin Woock. 1978. The passive analog in Lango. Proceedings of the 4th Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics<br />

Society. 128-139.Szendroi, Kriszta. 2001. Focus and the syntax-ph<strong>on</strong>ology interface. Ph.D dissertati<strong>on</strong>, UCL.Ura,<br />

Hiroyuki. 2000. Checking Theory and Grammatical Functi<strong>on</strong>s in Universal Grammar. Oxford University<br />

Press.Woolford, E. 1991. Two Subject Positi<strong>on</strong>s in Lango. Proceedings of the 17th Annual Meeting of the Berkeley<br />

GS


Subject marking in Bembe (David Iorio; Newcastle University; d.e.iorio@ncl.ac.uk)<br />

The phenomen<strong>on</strong> of subject marking in <strong>Bantu</strong> has so far defied a unified analysis, and is treated,<br />

depending <strong>on</strong> the language in questi<strong>on</strong>, as either pr<strong>on</strong>ominal agreement [2], grammatical agreement<br />

[4], or as being ambiguous between the two [1]. On the basis of the local complementary<br />

distributi<strong>on</strong> between subject markers and lexical subjects, and the fact that preverbal subjects<br />

exclusively display A’-properties, I claim that subject marking in Bembe (D54) is pr<strong>on</strong>ominal.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>sider (1) in which subject marking is grammatical with preverbal subjects in declaratives (a)<br />

and in object relatives without lexical subjects (b) but ungrammatical whenever a lexical subject is<br />

present in object relatives (c).<br />

(1) a. (Baana ) b-á-yak-a ngyoa.<br />

2child 2SM-T-kill-FV 9snake<br />

‘The/(*some) children killed a snake.’<br />

b. Ngyoa ya-b-á-yak-á (*baana)<br />

9snake 9REL-2SM-T-kill-FV 2child<br />

‘The snake which they killed…’<br />

c. Ngyoa ya-(*b)-a-yak-á baana<br />

9snake 9REL-2SM-T-kill-FV 2child<br />

‘The snake which the children killed…<br />

Expanding <strong>on</strong> previous proposals by [5] and [7], I claim that the facts in (1) are explained if subject<br />

markers are analysed as deficient pr<strong>on</strong>ominal clitics, i.e. arguments of the verb, which are generated<br />

as XP/X° in vP. The interpretable φ-features of φPs are attracted by str<strong>on</strong>g φ-features <strong>on</strong> C and T<br />

under Agree and an additi<strong>on</strong>al TOP/REL-feature <strong>on</strong> C [4]. Due to their defective nature, φPs are able<br />

to incorporate directly into T, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>by precluding the need for spec,TP [7]. Since they are n<strong>on</strong>referential,<br />

they receive a referential value by a lexical (or null) Aboutness-shift topic [3] in the CPdomain.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>sider the derivati<strong>on</strong>s in (2).<br />

(2) a. [CP (baana) [TP [T b + á [AspP yak + a [vP φP [v yak [VP yak [DP ngyoa ]]]]]]]].<br />

b. [CP ngyoa [C ya [TP [T b + á [AspP yak + á [vP φP [v yak [VP yak [DP ngyoa …<br />

c. [CP ngyoa [C ya [TP [T á [AspP yak +á [vP baana [v yak [VP yak [DP ngyoa …<br />

If subject markers are pr<strong>on</strong>ominal arguments, the local complementary distributi<strong>on</strong> between subject<br />

markers and lexical subjects follows naturally. In additi<strong>on</strong>, the absence of a spec,TP positi<strong>on</strong>,<br />

indicated by the A’-properties of preverbal subjects, correctly predicts that lexical subjects have to<br />

stay low in object relative clauses since they cannot incorporate. That other <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, in<br />

turn, allow preverbal lexical subjects in object relative clauses is explained by assuming that they<br />

feature an active spec,TP positi<strong>on</strong>, the presence of which is subject to parametric variati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

[1] Bresnan, J. & S. Mchombo 1987. Topic, Pr<strong>on</strong>oun and Agreement in Chicheŵa. Language 63:<br />

741–782. [2] Creissels, D. 2005. A Typology of Subject Marker and Object Marker Systems in<br />

African <strong>Languages</strong>. In: Voeltz, F.K.E. (ed.). Studies in African Linguistic Typology. Amsterdam:<br />

John Benjamins. 42–70. [3] Frascarelli, M. 2007. Subjects, Topics, and the Interpretati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

Referential Pro. Natural Language and Linguistic Theory 25: 691–734. [4] Henders<strong>on</strong>, B. 2011.<br />

Agreement, Locality, and OVS in <strong>Bantu</strong>. Lingua 121: 742–753. [5] Holmberg, A. 2010. Null<br />

Subject Parameters. In: Biberauer T. et al. (eds.). Parametric Variati<strong>on</strong>: Null Subjects in Minimalist<br />

Theory. Cambridge: CUP. 88–124. [6] Julien, M. 2002. Syntactic Heads and Word Formati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Oxford: Oxford University Press. [7] Roberts, I. 2010 Agreement and Head Movement: Clitics,<br />

Incorporati<strong>on</strong>, and Defective Goals. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.<br />

GS


The Causative-Instrumental Syncretism in Kinyarwanda<br />

Kyle Jerro,<br />

University of Texas at Austin<br />

jerrokyle@gmail.com<br />

Kinyarwanda (Rwanda) has a variety of means for encoding causati<strong>on</strong>, including the morphological causative<br />

–ish in (1). Kimenyi (1980) notes that this causative is identical to the instrumental applicative, shown in (2). 1<br />

(1) Umu-gabo a-ra-ndik-ish-a umu-kobwa i-baruwa.<br />

cl1-man cl1-pres-write-caus-imp cl1-girl cl9-letter<br />

‘The man is making the girl write a letter.’<br />

(2) Umu-kobwa a-ra-ndik-ish-a i-baruwa i-karamu.<br />

cl1-girl cl1-pres-write-inst-imp cl9-letter cl6-pen<br />

‘The girl is writing a letter with a pen.’<br />

I will argue that this syncretism of causative and instrumental morphology follows from the shared semantic<br />

nature of causees and instruments, and I will treat both c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s as three-argument event schema in which<br />

t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is an intermediate argument up<strong>on</strong> which the causer/agent acts. The crucial distincti<strong>on</strong> of interpretati<strong>on</strong>,<br />

building <strong>on</strong> a proposal in Peters<strong>on</strong> (2007), is the animacy of the intermediate argument. This c<strong>on</strong>trasts with<br />

Shibatani and Pardeshi’s (2001) explanati<strong>on</strong> for the syncretism, which states that a syncretism between a<br />

causative and applicative should arise due to the causative’s sociative meaning—i.e. the high level of<br />

involvement of the agent in the caused acti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

I show that although sociative meaning can be encoded in the morphological causative, this is<br />

subsumed by a broader set of meanings that require direct causati<strong>on</strong>, fitting with the typology of causative<br />

meanings proposed by Comrie (1985). This direct causative meaning follows from the fact that the –ish<br />

causative syntactically patterns as what is termed a “lexical” causative. I show this based <strong>on</strong> (1) the –ish<br />

causative’s inability to undergo operati<strong>on</strong>s that separate the causing and caused events (2) its lack of<br />

productivity with idiomatic verbal c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s—such as yasinze ikoti ‘hang the coat’ or ‘die’, and (3) the fact<br />

that the –ish causative can block other lexical causatives in the language. I present original field data for these<br />

different syntactic tests.<br />

This treatment of morphological causatives is problematic for theories of argument structure in the<br />

Minimalist Program (cf. Harley 1996;2008), because the theory does not provide a means for encoding<br />

morphological causatives as distinct from analytic causatives. I explicate the problems within this approach<br />

and provide a proposal in Lexical-Functi<strong>on</strong>al Grammar in which the morphological causative is treated as a<br />

morpholexical operati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> the verb.<br />

In sum, I show that morphological causatives pattern with lexical causatives, which loosely fits into<br />

the typology of causative meanings proposed by Comrie (1985). This is problematic for Shibatani and<br />

Pardeshi’s (2001) account of the phenomena, which is centered <strong>on</strong> sociative causati<strong>on</strong>. I propose instead that<br />

the causative and instrumental applicative are not separate syntactic operati<strong>on</strong>s, but <strong>on</strong>e tri-valent argument<br />

frame. I then show that the argument structure facts of this kind of structure are problematic for the Minimalist<br />

Program’s treatment of morphological causatives, and present an alternative in LFG.<br />

References:<br />

Comrie, Bernard. 1985. “Causative verb formati<strong>on</strong> and other verb-deriving morphology.” In T. Shopen, ed.,<br />

Language Typology and Syntactic Descripti<strong>on</strong>: Grammatical Categories and the Lexic<strong>on</strong>. Cambridge:<br />

Cambridge University Press.<br />

Harley, H. 1996. "Sase bizarre: the Japanese causative and structural case," In P. Koskinen, (ed.) Proceedings<br />

of the 1995 Canadian Linguistics Society meeting, University of Tor<strong>on</strong>to Working Papers in<br />

Linguistics<br />

Harley, H. 2008. “On the causative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>,” In. S. Miyagawa and M. Saito, eds., Handbook of Japanese<br />

Linguistics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.<br />

Kimenyi, Alexandre. 1980. A Relati<strong>on</strong>al Grammar of Kinyarwanda. Berkeley: University of California Press.<br />

Peters<strong>on</strong>, David. 2007. Applicative C<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s. Oxford: Oxford University Press<br />

Shibatani, Masayoshi and Prashant Pardeshi. 2001. “The causative c<strong>on</strong>tinuum.” In M. Shibatani, ed.,<br />

1 Kinyarwanda data are provided in standard Kinyarwanda orthography, with superimposed morphological segmentati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

GS


The Grammar of Causati<strong>on</strong> and Interpers<strong>on</strong>al Manipulati<strong>on</strong>, pages 85-126. Amsterdam: John<br />

Benjamins.<br />

GS


The Mental Representati<strong>on</strong> of Setswana Derived Nouns: An Experimental Investigati<strong>on</strong><br />

of Class 1 and 9 nominalisati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Naledi Kgolo 1 & S<strong>on</strong>ja Eisenbeiss 1<br />

1. Department of Language and Linguistics, University of Essex, UK, nnkgol@essex.ac.uk<br />

Setswana class 1 and 9 nominalisati<strong>on</strong>s differ with respect to morphological transparency:<br />

Class 9 derivati<strong>on</strong>s are not readily segmentable into an obvious stem and affix in c<strong>on</strong>trast to<br />

Class 1 derivati<strong>on</strong>s, which are transparently affixed with the prefix mo- and suffix -i<br />

indicating deverbal nouns:<br />

1. Class 1 nominalisati<strong>on</strong>s Class 9 nominalisati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

lèf-á → mo-lèf-ì lèf-á → tèf-ò<br />

pay-FV 1SG-pay-FV pay-FV 9SG-pay-FV<br />

‘pay-FV’ ‘payer’ ‘pay’ ‘payment’<br />

As (1) dem<strong>on</strong>strates, Setswana has nominal derivati<strong>on</strong>s with clear morphological<br />

transparency (Class 1) as well as those with a more idiosyncratic pattern (Class 9). In<br />

additi<strong>on</strong>, Setswana has ‘pseudo-derived nouns’, which look as if they were derived from a<br />

verb, but are in fact not morphologically or semantically related to a verb. For example:<br />

2. sál-à *→ mò-sád-ì gàb-à *→ kgáb-ò<br />

stati<strong>on</strong>ary-FV 1SG-woman-FV stati<strong>on</strong>ary-FV 9SG- large fire-FV<br />

‘stati<strong>on</strong>ary’ ‘woman’ ‘pull stomach in’ ‘large fire’<br />

Further, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are nominal forms that have orthographic overlap with certain verbs without<br />

any morphological or semantic relati<strong>on</strong>ship. For example:<br />

3. ròb-à *→ mo-rob-a bák-à *→ lò-bàk-à<br />

break-FV 3SG-fun-FV break-FV 5SG-reas<strong>on</strong>-FV<br />

‘break’ ‘fun’ ‘learn a less<strong>on</strong>’ ‘reas<strong>on</strong>’<br />

We used psycholinguistic methods to determine whether these nominalisati<strong>on</strong>s are<br />

memorised as whole units or whether morphological structure plays a role <strong>on</strong> the mental<br />

representati<strong>on</strong> of transparent class 1 and the n<strong>on</strong>-transparent class 9 nominalisati<strong>on</strong>s. Earlier<br />

studies found that regular forms memorised as whole-forms show word-form frequency<br />

effects, i.e. the more frequently speakers encounter a word form, the faster they recognise it<br />

as a word (Scarborough, Cortese & Scarborough, 1977). We found frequency effects for both<br />

classes of nominalisati<strong>on</strong>s in a visual lexical decisi<strong>on</strong> experiment with 83 participants, which<br />

suggest that stored complex word forms play a role in the processing of both noun classes<br />

under investigati<strong>on</strong>. In another experiment, 53 participants were primed with the two noun<br />

classes (see (1)), pseudo-derived nouns (see (2)) and orthographically related nouns (see (3))<br />

before making a lexical decisi<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> the presented stimuli (S<strong>on</strong>nenstuhl, Eisenbeiss &<br />

Clahsen, 1999). Results from this experiment show that prior presentati<strong>on</strong> of a<br />

morphologically related prime-form (1) showed faster recogniti<strong>on</strong> times for both deverbative<br />

classes. Such priming effects did not occur for pseudo derivati<strong>on</strong>s (2) or for forms in the<br />

orthographic c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> (3). This suggests that the verb stem involved in the deverbative is<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly pre-activated by a morphologically related verb, not by a verb with surface similarity.<br />

Taken together, results from both experiments suggest that stored word forms may play a role<br />

in morphological processing, but that morphological structure affects the processing of<br />

complex word forms independently of pure form overlap.<br />

References<br />

GS


Scarborough, D. L., Cortese, C., and Scarborough, H. S. 1977. Frequency and<br />

repetiti<strong>on</strong> effects in lexical memory. Journal of Experimental Psychology:<br />

Human Percepti<strong>on</strong> and Performance, 3, 1–17.<br />

S<strong>on</strong>nenstuhl-Henning, I., Eisenbeiss, S. and Clahsen, H. 1999. Morphological<br />

Priming in the German Mental Lexic<strong>on</strong>. Cogniti<strong>on</strong> 72.3, 203-236.<br />

GS


T<strong>on</strong>e in Two Elomwe Dialects in Zambezia Province (Mozambique)<br />

Charles W. Kisseberth (Tel-Aviv University)<br />

Rozenn Guérois (Dynamique du Langage, Université Lumière Ly<strong>on</strong> 2<br />

Within the broad group of speech varieties labeled “Emakhuwa”, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are a number of varieties whose<br />

speakers self-identify their language as “Elomwe”. Elomwe speech varieties are spoken primarily in (southeast)<br />

Malawi and Zambezia Province in Mozambique. T<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are no linguistic features that distinguish Elomwe varieties<br />

from Emakhuwa more generally (the <strong>on</strong>ly feature comm<strong>on</strong>ly cited, the use of affricates in place of the post-alveolar<br />

stops written as tt and tth, while largely c<strong>on</strong>fined to Elomwe is far from universal inside Elomwe).<br />

The present paper surveys the t<strong>on</strong>e and t<strong>on</strong>al morphology of two dialects of Zambezian Elomwe: the dialect<br />

of Mugeba and the dialect of Ilê, and dem<strong>on</strong>strates that the t<strong>on</strong>al systems of these two dialects differ in the same<br />

ways that t<strong>on</strong>e in Emakhuwa dialects in general differ. Furthermore, the paper will briefly examine some two dozen<br />

verb tenses and show that their segmental/t<strong>on</strong>al shapes reflect patterns found more generally in Emakhuwa.<br />

All dialects of Emakhuwa are characterized by a lack of lexical t<strong>on</strong>e in the verb stem. Instead, a H t<strong>on</strong>e is<br />

assigned to a particular mora (or moras) of the stem according to the verb tense in which the stem is embedded. A<br />

prefixal element may also be specified with a H t<strong>on</strong>e in certain tenses. We will call these morphologicallyc<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>ed<br />

t<strong>on</strong>es “primary” H t<strong>on</strong>es. T<strong>on</strong>es are assigned to the stem according to the moraic count of the stem.<br />

Typically, a primary H t<strong>on</strong>e is assigned to the first, sec<strong>on</strong>d, third or final mora of the stem. The presence of an object<br />

prefix is relevant since in some cases it is the “ macro-stem” rather than the verb stem proper that is counted. T<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

may be difficulties with respect to the verb stem not having the required number of moras. Also, since many<br />

Emakhuwa varieties do not allow a primary H <strong>on</strong> a word-final mora, c<strong>on</strong>flicts arise when the target of t<strong>on</strong>e<br />

assignment is the final vowel of the word. We will illustrate all of these issues in Ilê and Mugeba.<br />

Emakhuwa dialects can be differentiated t<strong>on</strong>ally into two broad groups: n<strong>on</strong>-doubling and doubling<br />

dialects. The difference is simple. In some varieties, the primary H t<strong>on</strong>es “double” <strong>on</strong>to the following mora (unless<br />

blocked by general principles). These are the “doubling” dialects (though it should be noted that in some doubling<br />

dialects t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> may be situati<strong>on</strong>s in which the primary H t<strong>on</strong>e does not actually surface). In n<strong>on</strong>-doubling dialects, the<br />

primary H t<strong>on</strong>e does not extend its influence <strong>on</strong>to a following mora under any c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>. The Elomwe dialects that<br />

we have explored in Malawi are all of the n<strong>on</strong>-doubling type. Our recent work in Zambezia , however, has revealed<br />

that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are both n<strong>on</strong>-doubling and doubling Elomwe varieties in this province. The dialect of Ilê is n<strong>on</strong>-doubling,<br />

while Mugeba is doubling.<br />

In the case of n<strong>on</strong>-doubling Emakhuwa dialects, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is not much to be said about t<strong>on</strong>e bey<strong>on</strong>d the issue of<br />

t<strong>on</strong>e assignment menti<strong>on</strong>ed above. Doubling dialects do show some diversity in how t<strong>on</strong>e doubling works. In this<br />

paper we will dem<strong>on</strong>strate in detail how the Mugeba dialect fits into the larger picture of t<strong>on</strong>e doubling in<br />

Emakhuwa. This picture can be summarized as follows:<br />

With the excepti<strong>on</strong> of coastal dialects such as Enlai in Angoche, doubling always fails to affect a vowel at<br />

the end of the Int<strong>on</strong>ati<strong>on</strong>al Phrase. Mugeba is an example of a dialect that obeys this c<strong>on</strong>straint (e.g. [o-líma] ‘to<br />

cultivate’, but [o-límá…] in medial positi<strong>on</strong>). Note that in our transcripti<strong>on</strong>s, we underline the vowel bearing a<br />

primary H t<strong>on</strong>e. Again, with the excepti<strong>on</strong> of a few dialects such as Enlai, a primary H t<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong> the first mora of a<br />

l<strong>on</strong>g vowel does not double <strong>on</strong>to the sec<strong>on</strong>d mora when the syllable is IP-penult. Mugeba, however,. does not obey<br />

this c<strong>on</strong>straint. But it differs from Enlai in that although t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is doubling <strong>on</strong>to the sec<strong>on</strong>d mora, the double <strong>on</strong> this<br />

mora has a falling character (e.g. [o-máâla] ‘to be quiet’, but [o-máála…] in medial positi<strong>on</strong>). Interestingly, the<br />

doubling in the two “mixed” languages based <strong>on</strong> Emakhuwa, Ekoti and Ecuwabo, show the same ph<strong>on</strong>etics as<br />

Mugeba. When a primary H t<strong>on</strong>e is located <strong>on</strong> the antepenult mora of the IP, three results may obtain: doubling may<br />

be blocked (e.g. in Imeetto and Esaaka); doubling may occur, resulting in a level H t<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong> the penult mora (e.g. in<br />

Ikorovere and Enlai); doubling occurs, but the doubled H has a falling character (e.g. in Imitthupi, Emwaazha,<br />

Eeratti, as well as the mixed languages Ekoti and Ecuwabo). In Mugeba, the third opti<strong>on</strong> is found: [o-lóvôla] ‘to<br />

carry’, but [o-lóvóla…] medially). In most Emakhuwa doubling varieties, when the doubled H t<strong>on</strong>e appears<br />

immediately in fr<strong>on</strong>t of a following primary H t<strong>on</strong>e, the result is a span of H t<strong>on</strong>es of the same height (e.g. as in<br />

Ikorovere, Imitthupi, Imeeto, Esaaka). In Mugeba, however, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is a downstep that separates the doubled H and a<br />

following primary H t<strong>on</strong>e (e.g.[o-rúkún!úsa] ‘to turn it over’).<br />

GS


Kirundi palatal glide strengthening: An acoustic study<br />

Alexei Kochetov 1 , Tomohiro Yokoyama 1 , and Myles Leitch 2<br />

1 University of Tor<strong>on</strong>to, 2 Tyndale University College<br />

In Kirundi (<strong>Bantu</strong>), hetero-morphemic C + j clusters are subject to two processes: palatalizati<strong>on</strong><br />

(cor<strong>on</strong>alizati<strong>on</strong>) and palatal glide strengthening (Meeussen 1959), summarized in (1). The first<br />

process applies to velars, laryngeals, and /n/ regardless of the c<strong>on</strong>text, and to n<strong>on</strong>-nasal cor<strong>on</strong>als<br />

across morpheme boundaries. The output of the process involves single cor<strong>on</strong>al segments,<br />

mainly sibilants. The sec<strong>on</strong>d process applies to labials regardless of the c<strong>on</strong>text and to n<strong>on</strong>-nasal<br />

cor<strong>on</strong>als within a morpheme. The result is a complex segment or a sequence of two segments:<br />

the original (or fricated) c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant and a fricative- or stop-like palatal element that agrees with<br />

the c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant in voicing and nasality. The ph<strong>on</strong>ological status of the outputs of the sec<strong>on</strong>d<br />

process is c<strong>on</strong>troversial, as researchers disagree whether they should be treated as complex (or<br />

sec<strong>on</strong>darily articulated) segments or sequences of two segments (e.g. Broselow & Niy<strong>on</strong>dagara<br />

1990; Maddies<strong>on</strong> 2003). Further, details of the ph<strong>on</strong>etic realizati<strong>on</strong> of the palatal element are<br />

unclear, as t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is substantial variati<strong>on</strong> in the transcripti<strong>on</strong> of the relevant data in the sources.<br />

For example, /bj/ in /j-a-ɾab-je/ ‘s/he looked’ was transcribed as ‘v z y’, ‘vdy’, and ‘v z g y ’ by<br />

Meeussen 1959, Broselow & Niy<strong>on</strong>dagara 1990, and Ntihirageza 1993 respectively.<br />

(1) labial cor<strong>on</strong>al dorsal laryngeal<br />

input pj bj mj tj dj sj zj ɾj n<br />

j<br />

kj ɡj hj<br />

output 1 (across morphemes) fɕ vʑ mɲ s z ʃ ʤ z/j ɲ ʦ ʣ ʃ<br />

output 2 (within morphemes) fɕ vʑ mɲ tc dɟ sc zɟ ɾɟ ɲ ʦ ʣ ʃ<br />

In this paper we present preliminary results of an acoustic study of Kirundi palatal glide<br />

strengthening in across- and within-root sequences of labials and cor<strong>on</strong>als (highlighted in (1))<br />

produced by a female speaker of Kirundi. The acoustic analysis involved an examinati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

spectral (centre of gravity of fricative noise or burst and F2 of the following vowel <strong>on</strong>set) and<br />

temporal characteristics of palatal elements, and their comparis<strong>on</strong> to single fricatives, stops, and<br />

nasals in similar c<strong>on</strong>texts. We further discuss implicati<strong>on</strong>s of the results for formal analyses of<br />

the complex alternati<strong>on</strong>s in Kirundi, in the c<strong>on</strong>text of the typology of glide strengthening and<br />

palatalizati<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong> and cross-linguistically (Bhat 1978; Maddies<strong>on</strong> 2003; Bateman, 2010).<br />

References<br />

Bateman, Nicoleta. 2010. The change from labial to palatal as glide hardening. Linguistic<br />

Typology 14, 167–211.<br />

Bhat, D. N. S. 1978. A general study of palatalizati<strong>on</strong>. In Joseph Greenberg (ed.), Universals of<br />

language, Vol. 2: Ph<strong>on</strong>ology. Stanford University Press, Stanford, CA. 47–91.<br />

Broselow, E. & A. Niy<strong>on</strong>dagara. 1990. Feature Geometry of Kirundi palatalizati<strong>on</strong>. Studies in<br />

the Linguistic Sciences 20. 1–20.<br />

Maddies<strong>on</strong>, Ian. 2003. The sounds of the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, In Derek Nurse, Gérard Philipps<strong>on</strong><br />

The <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, Routledge, 15–41.<br />

Meeussen, A. E. 1959. Essai de grammaire rundi. Tervuren: Musée Royal de l’Afrique Centrale.<br />

GS


Ntihirageza, Jeanine. 1993. Kirundi palatalizati<strong>on</strong> process and sibilant harm<strong>on</strong>y: Implicati<strong>on</strong>s for<br />

Feature Geometry. M.A. thesis, Southern Illinois University at Carb<strong>on</strong>dale.<br />

GS


Dem<strong>on</strong>stratives in Mozambican Ng<strong>on</strong>i<br />

Heidrun Kröger<br />

SIL Moçambique<br />

heidrun_kroeger@sil.org<br />

This paper presents data <strong>on</strong> the dem<strong>on</strong>stratives of a hitherto unstudied<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> language, Mozambican Ng<strong>on</strong>i (N.10). Ng<strong>on</strong>i has a pers<strong>on</strong>-oriented<br />

dem<strong>on</strong>strative system (Diessel 1999) with two additi<strong>on</strong>al factors that are<br />

morphologically distinguished: physical c<strong>on</strong>tact and visibility. Hence, the<br />

distincti<strong>on</strong> is fivefold: near the speaker with physical c<strong>on</strong>tact / general near<br />

the speaker / near the hearer / far from both, but within view / general far.<br />

Apart from these forms t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is also a separate identificati<strong>on</strong>al proximal<br />

dem<strong>on</strong>strative, as well as emphatic forms. These forms are shortly<br />

introduced according to their semantic features, their morphological make-up<br />

and their positi<strong>on</strong> in the noun phrase. It is shown that while the main<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> of the dem<strong>on</strong>strative is phrase-finally, but remarkably,<br />

dem<strong>on</strong>stratives can occur pre- and post-nominally as well, and may appear<br />

up to three times within the same noun phrase.<br />

As for the usage in discourse, two of the five basic dem<strong>on</strong>stratives, the<br />

general distal and the medial are used endophorically in texts to indicate<br />

definiteness; the distal in the case of anaphoric reference, the medial in the<br />

case of associative anaphora, establishing relative clauses and other<br />

situati<strong>on</strong>s of definiteness in the immediate discourse.<br />

Diessel, Holger. 1999. Dem<strong>on</strong>stratives. Form, Functi<strong>on</strong> and Grammaticalizati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

[Typological Studies in Language 42]. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.<br />

GS


Domain‐sensitivity in High T<strong>on</strong>e Spreading in two Xits<strong>on</strong>ga dialects<br />

Seunghun Lee (ZAS , Central C<strong>on</strong>necticut State Univ.) juliolee@gmail.com<br />

and Elisabeth Selkirk (University of Massachussetts Amherst ) selkirk@linguist.umass.edu<br />

Domain-related restricti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> H T<strong>on</strong>e Spread (HTS) in a dialect of Xits<strong>on</strong>ga that<br />

is spoken in Mozambique are described and analyzed in Kisseberth 1994<br />

(Xits<strong>on</strong>ga I), and reanalyzed in Selkirk 2011, who argues for a modular treatment<br />

of these domain‐related restricti<strong>on</strong>s involving (a) a c<strong>on</strong>straint‐based analysis of<br />

the formati<strong>on</strong> of prosodic structure and (b) a c<strong>on</strong>straint‐based analysis of the<br />

relati<strong>on</strong> between prosodic structure and t<strong>on</strong>e. Recent investigati<strong>on</strong> by this<br />

paper’s authors of a variety of Xits<strong>on</strong>ga spoken in Limpopo province, South<br />

Africa (= Xits<strong>on</strong>ga II) provides support for this modular treatment. Xits<strong>on</strong>ga II<br />

and Xits<strong>on</strong>ga I arguably display the same organizati<strong>on</strong> of sentences into<br />

ph<strong>on</strong>ological phrases () and int<strong>on</strong>ati<strong>on</strong>al phrases (). But, as will be seen in this<br />

paper, their grammars differ in the manner in which the right edge of restricts<br />

HTS, as specifiable in a theory of domain‐sensitivity in the c<strong>on</strong>straints <strong>on</strong> HTS.<br />

In both varieties of Xits<strong>on</strong>ga, lexically headed syntactic phrases match up with<br />

surface ph<strong>on</strong>ological phrases () due to the S‐P c<strong>on</strong>stituency corresp<strong>on</strong>dence<br />

c<strong>on</strong>straint Match(LexP,), except if the phrase c<strong>on</strong>tains of <strong>on</strong>ly a single prosodic<br />

word (), suggesting the ranking in Xits<strong>on</strong>ga of BinMin(,) >> Match LexP<br />

(Selkirk 2011), cf. (1ab) vs. (2ab) below. Moreover, the markedness c<strong>on</strong>straint<br />

Str<strong>on</strong>g Start (Selkirk 2011, Elfner 2012) forces the n<strong>on</strong>isomorphic prosodic<br />

grouping of verb and first object in (4), explainable if Match LexP >> Str<strong>on</strong>g Start.<br />

Assuming this grammar of prosodic structure formati<strong>on</strong>, in combinati<strong>on</strong> with a<br />

simple domain‐sensitive ph<strong>on</strong>ology w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> HTS will be blocked when outranked<br />

by certain c<strong>on</strong>straints <strong>on</strong> the t<strong>on</strong>e‐prosodic structure relati<strong>on</strong>, provides a<br />

satisfying analysis of the distributi<strong>on</strong> of HTS in Xits<strong>on</strong>ga I, as illustrated in the<br />

representati<strong>on</strong>s in (1‐3):<br />

(1) a. CP[ V/TP[ V[ va H ‐a‐tisa]V NP[ N[xi‐h<strong>on</strong>tlovila ]N ]NP ]V/TP ]CP<br />

b. ( ( ( v‐aH‐ ‐tisa) (xi‐h<strong>on</strong>tlovii ‐Hla )) )<br />

‘They are bringing a giant’<br />

(2) a. CP[V/TP[ V[vaH ‐a‐susa]V NP[ N[n‐guluve [taH NP[ N[v<strong>on</strong>aH ]N ]NP]NP ]V/TP ]C<br />

b. ( ((vaH‐ ‐a‐susa ‐H) ( (n‐guluve) (!taH vo!naH) ) )<br />

‘They are removing their pig (= a/the pig of theirs).’<br />

(3) a. CP[V/TP[vaH ‐a‐xavela]V νP[NP[N[ xi‐phukuphuku] NP[N[ fole ]N]NP]νP]V/TP]CP<br />

b. ( (( ( vaH‐‐xavela) (xi‐phukuphu ‐H ku)) (foole) ) )<br />

‘Theyarebuyingtobaccoforafool’<br />

Embodying ‐domain‐edge sensitivity in c<strong>on</strong>straints like N<strong>on</strong>Finality(H, ..)<br />

(Kisseberth 1994) and CrispEdgeR/L(H,..) (Ito & Mester 1999) permits a simple<br />

account of language‐particular differences in HTS of the sort attested in Xits<strong>on</strong>ga I and<br />

II. CrispEdgeL(H, ) prevents a multiply‐linked H from spanning a left ‐edge in (2) in<br />

both varieties. As for N<strong>on</strong>Finality, in both t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is no effect at the ‐level, as seen for<br />

Xits<strong>on</strong>ga I in the verb in (2). In Xits<strong>on</strong>ga I, N<strong>on</strong>Finality(H,) can block H from<br />

spreading to the last syllable of both the ‐final in (1) and the ‐medial in (3). In<br />

Xits<strong>on</strong>ga II, though, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is no N<strong>on</strong>Finality <strong>on</strong> the medial in (3); instead H spreads<br />

up to the very edge of . N<strong>on</strong>finality(H,) will ensure that H spreads to <strong>on</strong>ly the penult<br />

in structures like (1), but it’s the ‐edge sensitive CrispEdgeR(H,) that must be<br />

resp<strong>on</strong>sible for the blocking of HTS thru the medial right ‐edge in (3) in Xits<strong>on</strong>ga II.<br />

GS


GS<br />

Semantic Classificati<strong>on</strong> of the <strong>Bantu</strong> Verbs and Tense/Aspect Selecti<strong>on</strong>s: The Case of<br />

Abstract<br />

Lexical Verbal Semantics in Kiswahili<br />

Amani Lusekelo (Ph.D.)<br />

Dar es Salaam University College of Educati<strong>on</strong>, P. O. Box 2329<br />

Dar es Salaam, Tanzania<br />

alusekelo@duce.ac.tz OR amalumwa@yahoo.co.uk<br />

Different categories of verbal semantics are offered across <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. This presentati<strong>on</strong> provides<br />

a case of Kiswahili verbal semantics with regard to two previous posits: dynamism of the situati<strong>on</strong><br />

encoded by the verb (i.e. <strong>on</strong>set, nucleus and coda) and T/A formatives surrounding each verb (Kershner<br />

2002; Botne et al. 2006; Seidel 2008). A third suggesti<strong>on</strong> is offered and it surrounds the impacts <strong>on</strong> the<br />

speakers as emitted by the semantic properties of the verb in use.<br />

Basic findings reveal three major kinds of Kiswahili verbs [with sub-categorisati<strong>on</strong>s] (i) Stative (states)<br />

e.g. elewa ‘understand’ and jua ‘know’, (ii) Inchoatives (achievements) e.g. p<strong>on</strong>a ‘heal’, chukia ‘hate’,<br />

(iii) Activity (duratives) e.g. kimbia ‘run’ and g<strong>on</strong>ga ‘bounce’.<br />

Further basic findings show that in Kiswahili narratives the various types of verbs select some of the<br />

T/A related expressi<strong>on</strong>s, marking the <strong>on</strong>set and coda of the event/situati<strong>on</strong> in questi<strong>on</strong>: (a) -anza ‘start,<br />

begin, commence’, (b) -endelea ‘c<strong>on</strong>tinue, go <strong>on</strong>’ and (c) -isha ‘finish, end, complete’. It is the<br />

selecti<strong>on</strong>s of these expressi<strong>on</strong>s that counts a lot in the classificati<strong>on</strong> of verbs per T/A. Thus, inchoatives<br />

like fika ‘arrive’ co-occur with -isha ‘finish’ but never with -anza ‘commence’ and -endelea ‘go <strong>on</strong>’<br />

because inchoatives encode the coda of the event/situati<strong>on</strong>. Durative verbs like lima ‘cultivate’ co-occur<br />

with -anza ‘commence’, -endelea ‘go <strong>on</strong>’, and -isha ‘complete’ as they encodes <strong>on</strong>set, c<strong>on</strong>tinuati<strong>on</strong> and<br />

coda of the situati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The new proposal to the classificati<strong>on</strong> of verbs focuses <strong>on</strong> the impact of the individual verbs as used in<br />

the narratives. Findings reveal three kinds of verbs: psychological, physical and both (double). Usually<br />

the psychological verbs have internal impacts either to the speaker or to the hearer hence they capture<br />

Stative and Inchoative verbs and their T/A selecti<strong>on</strong>s. Physical verbs have external impacts either to the<br />

speaker or to the hearer and mostly include activity/durative verbs and their T/A selecti<strong>on</strong>s. Several<br />

verbs have double impacts in the sense that they have psychological effects as well as physical impacts<br />

and these are achievement and stative verbs in Kiswahili.<br />

References<br />

Botne, R., H. Ochwada & M. Marlo). 2006. A grammatical sketch of the Lusaamia verb. Rüdiger.<br />

Botne, R. & Kershner, T.L. 2008. Tense and cognitive space: On the organizati<strong>on</strong> of tense/aspect<br />

systems in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages and bey<strong>on</strong>d. Cognitive Linguistics 19/2: 145–218.<br />

Kershner, T.L. 2002. The verb in Chisukwa: Aspect, tense and time. Doctoral thesis. Indian University.<br />

Seidel, F. 2008. A Grammar of Yeyi. A <strong>Bantu</strong> language of Southern Africa. Rüdiger.


T<strong>on</strong>al Processes in the Setswana Verb<br />

Problem: Creissels (1996 and subsequent work) offers descripti<strong>on</strong> of the Setswana t<strong>on</strong>al system and an<br />

approach to its analysis. He correctly identifies several t<strong>on</strong>al processes in Setswana: the 2-syllable word-internal<br />

H-domain spread within words, 1-syllable annexati<strong>on</strong> of a t<strong>on</strong>eless syllable at the word boundary, and other<br />

processes related to H-domain formati<strong>on</strong>. However, when dealing with the t<strong>on</strong>al morphology of the Setswana<br />

verb, his account runs into problems, as in some verb forms, instead of the expected word-internal 2-syllable<br />

spread, the H-t<strong>on</strong>e spreads 1 syllable, 3 syllables, or fails to spread completely. Moreover, the process of Hdomain<br />

merge, which Creissels posits word-internally, sometimes fails to apply, triggering H-domain retracti<strong>on</strong><br />

instead. To account for these facts, Creissels is forced to make several stipulati<strong>on</strong>s. The most important of these<br />

is the stipulati<strong>on</strong> of empty syllables in some forms. The positi<strong>on</strong> of the empty syllables within the<br />

morphological structure of the verb and the actual set of forms which c<strong>on</strong>tain them, seem arbitrary, and their<br />

placement at times depends <strong>on</strong> t<strong>on</strong>al values of surrounding morphemes – informati<strong>on</strong> which should not be<br />

available prior to the vocabulary inserti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Analysis: To avoid this and other stipulati<strong>on</strong>s made in Creissels' analysis, I propose that the Setswana verb has<br />

the following structure (the figure excludes Final Vowels, not all morphemes shown are compatible):<br />

1. CONJOINT FORM: [{(NEG1)-(SM-M)}-{(OM)-(V-ASP-T)}-{(NEG2)-(OM)-(V-ASP)}-{(OBJ)})]<br />

DISJOINT FORM: [{(NEG1)-(SM-M)}-(OM)-(V-ASP -T)}-{(NEG2)-(OM)-(V-ASP)}]<br />

Bold f<strong>on</strong>t = obligatory elements, Crossed-out f<strong>on</strong>t = unpr<strong>on</strong>ounced copies, [ = PhPhr boundary, { = PhWd boundaries, ( = MWd<br />

boundary, NEG = Negati<strong>on</strong>, SM = Subject Marker, T = Tense, OM = Object Marker, V = Verb, M= Mood, ASP = aspect, OBJ = Object<br />

Crucially, the complex Neg-SM-M-T forms a single PhWd, while the verb in the vP forms another together with<br />

its proclitics and affixes. The verb undergoes V-to-T movement in tensed clauses and may surface either<br />

adjoined to T or in its base-generated positi<strong>on</strong> in vP due to the Setswana c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> that the vP must c<strong>on</strong>tain<br />

heavy ph<strong>on</strong>ological material (Buell, 2005). When the verb is inserted in T (the so-called "c<strong>on</strong>joint" form of the<br />

verb), it forms a single PhWd (unless it c<strong>on</strong>tains a OM, which is a proclitic which always has a PhWd boundary<br />

before it). When the verb is inserted in the VP (a "disjoint" form), it c<strong>on</strong>sists of two PhWds. The placement of<br />

the PhWd-boundary is c<strong>on</strong>sistent with the proposals of the Inflecti<strong>on</strong>al stem/Macrostem divisi<strong>on</strong> within the<br />

<strong>Bantu</strong> verb (Myers, 1998). The PhWd-boundary is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for many of the violati<strong>on</strong>s of 2-syllable H-t<strong>on</strong>e<br />

spread rule observed by Creissels within the verb. For example, while in the c<strong>on</strong>joint perfect form of a t<strong>on</strong>eless<br />

verb tsamae- the t<strong>on</strong>e of the SM spreads 2 syllables (as is a characteristic word-internal spread: ba tsamayile, in<br />

the disjoint perfect form, the verb is inserted in the vP and the PhWd-boundary separates the vP. The t<strong>on</strong>e of the<br />

SM annexes the first <strong>on</strong>eless syllable of the following PhWd but fails to spread further: ba tsamayile. Using this<br />

approach we are able to account for the t<strong>on</strong>al c<strong>on</strong>tour of practically all Setswana verb forms.<br />

Advantages of the analysis: The main advantage of the proposed analysis is that it allows to account for all<br />

facts which posed difficulty for Creissels, while making no special stipulati<strong>on</strong>s and relying solely <strong>on</strong> t<strong>on</strong>al<br />

mechanisms independently known to be active in Setswana and other closely related <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. For<br />

example, I propose that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is a Meeussen's Rule (MR) operating within the MWds in Setswana which is<br />

blocked whenever 2nd of the two adjacent t<strong>on</strong>es spreads bey<strong>on</strong>d the MWd-boundary. This process is directly<br />

parallel to MR in Sh<strong>on</strong>a, which, although active at a different level of the Prosodic Hierarchy (PhWd), is<br />

blocked under similar c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

Additi<strong>on</strong>al advantages of the analysis include the following: i) it is in line with the proposals of the Inflecti<strong>on</strong>al<br />

stem/Macrostem divisi<strong>on</strong> within the <strong>Bantu</strong> verb, ii) it c<strong>on</strong>firms V-to-T movement hypothesis in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages<br />

and its role in the c<strong>on</strong>joint/disjoint morphology; iii) it treats pre-stem elements (i.e. elements pro-cliticized <strong>on</strong>to<br />

the Macrostem (NEG2, OMs) in uniform manner.<br />

REFERENCES: Buell, L. 2005. Issues in Zulu Morphosyntax. Ph.D. Dissertati<strong>on</strong>, UCLA. Creissels, D. 1996. C<strong>on</strong>junctive and<br />

disjunctive verb forms in Setswana. South African Journal of African <strong>Languages</strong> 16 (4): 109-115. Myers, S.P. 1998. AUX in <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

morphology and ph<strong>on</strong>ology. In: Theoretical aspects of <strong>Bantu</strong> t<strong>on</strong>e, p. 231-264. Ed. by L. M. Hyman & C. W. Kisseberth. Lecture notes,<br />

#82. Stanford: Center for the Study of Language and Informati<strong>on</strong> (CSLI).<br />

GS


Participant Reference in Eastern <strong>Bantu</strong> Narrative Texts<br />

Steve Nicolle, SIL <str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g> and Africa <str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g> University, Nairobi<br />

steve_nicolle@sil.org<br />

Because they c<strong>on</strong>stitute a very large number of closely related languages, <strong>Bantu</strong> languages provide an<br />

excellent laboratory for fine-grained comparative linguistics analysis. Much comparative work has<br />

been c<strong>on</strong>ducted <strong>on</strong> core grammatical topics such as noun class prefixes, object marking, tense and<br />

aspect, and verbal suffixes, but t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are far fewer comparative studies c<strong>on</strong>cerned with linguistic<br />

features of l<strong>on</strong>ger stretches of discourse.<br />

This paper is c<strong>on</strong>cerned with the questi<strong>on</strong> of how participants are introduced, reactivated, and<br />

tracked throughout narrative texts in the following eleven languages: Fuliiru [flr] DJ63 (7 texts),<br />

Mulenge (dialect of Rwanda [kin]) DJ63 (18 texts), Digo [dig] E73 (7 texts), Jita [jit] EJ25 (10 texts),<br />

Kwaya [kya]) EJ251 (10 texts), Suba-Simbiti [ssc] EJ403 (8 texts), Kabwa [cwa] EJ405 (11 texts),<br />

Rangi (Langi) [lag] F33 (66 texts), Bena [bez] G63, (10 texts), Malila [mgq] M24 (14 texts), and<br />

Mak<strong>on</strong>de [kde] P23 (8 texts).<br />

Three main strategies are found for introducing participants: a) using locative inversi<strong>on</strong>, b)<br />

using an existential verb plus suffixed locative clitic with a post-verbal subject, and c) using an<br />

existential verb with a post-verbal subject. One language, Bena, has a mixed strategy in which a post-<br />

verbal subject is preceded by two existential verbs: <strong>on</strong>e agreeing with the subject and the other with a<br />

locative subject marker.<br />

The languages in the survey also differ c<strong>on</strong>cerning how participants are referred to <strong>on</strong>ce they<br />

have been introduced. For example, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is significant variati<strong>on</strong> in the functi<strong>on</strong>s of different<br />

dem<strong>on</strong>stratives. In most of the languages, distal dem<strong>on</strong>stratives are used when a participant is<br />

reactivated after an absence, but in Rangi distal dem<strong>on</strong>stratives tend to be used to c<strong>on</strong>tinue the active<br />

status of a major participant. T<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are also more subtle differences. In Mak<strong>on</strong>de, distal dem<strong>on</strong>stratives<br />

are markers of saliency for minor participants and props, but when referring to major participants,<br />

they mark key developments in the narrative. Similarly, in Fuliiru, distal dem<strong>on</strong>stratives referring to<br />

major participants are used to indicate major developments in the narrative, but distal dem<strong>on</strong>stratives<br />

in Digo refer to major participants and in particular protag<strong>on</strong>ists regardless of whether t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is a major<br />

development.<br />

Referential (n<strong>on</strong>-proximal) dem<strong>on</strong>stratives are used to maintain reference to an active subject<br />

in Jita, Kabwa and Suba-Simbiti, but in Rangi they are used to reactivate a major participant after an<br />

absence, and in Bena they are used when the participant is inactive or has no specific role. In Digo,<br />

referential dem<strong>on</strong>stratives are <strong>on</strong>ly found in the orientati<strong>on</strong> secti<strong>on</strong> and occasi<strong>on</strong>ally in the<br />

denouement, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> they refer to major participants, but in Fuliiru referential dem<strong>on</strong>stratives indicate<br />

regular developments in the narrative, and t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>fore occur predominantly in developmental episodes.<br />

This variati<strong>on</strong>, together with cross-linguistic differences in the use of independent pr<strong>on</strong>ominal<br />

forms and the c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s under which other noun phrases occur, is not discernible from most<br />

grammatical descripti<strong>on</strong>s and elicited data. The comparative study of narrative texts t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>fore opens<br />

up new avenues of comparative analysis.<br />

GS


T<strong>on</strong>s lexicaux et t<strong>on</strong>s int<strong>on</strong>atifs en fr<strong>on</strong>tière int<strong>on</strong>ative en kirundi : analyse de parole en<br />

situati<strong>on</strong> de narrati<strong>on</strong><br />

Gélase NIMBONA<br />

Institut Langage & Communicati<strong>on</strong><br />

Centre de Recherche VALIBEL – Discours & Variati<strong>on</strong><br />

Université catholique de Louvain<br />

e-mail : gelase.nimb<strong>on</strong>a@uclouvain.be<br />

Jusqu’à présent, l’aspect qui a attiré l’attenti<strong>on</strong> des linguistes dans la descripti<strong>on</strong> de la<br />

prosodie du kirundi est le comportement t<strong>on</strong>al au niveau du mot (Meeussen 1959, Nkanira<br />

1984, Goldsmith & Sabimana 1986, etc.). La questi<strong>on</strong> centrale de notre communicati<strong>on</strong> est de<br />

savoir comment l’int<strong>on</strong>ati<strong>on</strong> s’articule avec les t<strong>on</strong>s lexicaux. Ce processus d’interacti<strong>on</strong> entre<br />

t<strong>on</strong>s lexicaux et t<strong>on</strong>s int<strong>on</strong>atifs peut être déterminé à partir de plusieurs paramètres. Nous<br />

part<strong>on</strong>s de la règle dite de Meeussen pour mettre à l’épreuve les observati<strong>on</strong>s de cet auteur<br />

(1959), lequel a remarqué qu’ « en fin de phrase n<strong>on</strong> définitive (sic) un t<strong>on</strong> bas final est<br />

souvent réalisé à un niveau plus haut, sans que cette élévati<strong>on</strong> ait une valeur distinctive » et<br />

qu’ « en fin de phrase, un t<strong>on</strong> haut antérieur n’est réalisé que par la seule m<strong>on</strong>tée préparatoire<br />

de la voyelle précédente, la finale même étant (un peu plus) basse ». Ces observati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

suscitent en effet des questi<strong>on</strong>s plus prof<strong>on</strong>des : quelle sera dans ces c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s la nature d’un<br />

t<strong>on</strong> lexical en finale d’én<strong>on</strong>cé lorsqu’il subit l’influence d’un t<strong>on</strong> int<strong>on</strong>atif bas final ? Ce t<strong>on</strong><br />

peut-il être analysé comme t<strong>on</strong> haut, t<strong>on</strong> haut rabaissé ou simplement comme t<strong>on</strong> bas ?<br />

Dans cette c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong>, nous nous c<strong>on</strong>centr<strong>on</strong>s sur les différents aspects qui peuvent<br />

influencer la nature du t<strong>on</strong> de fr<strong>on</strong>tière int<strong>on</strong>ative pour établir l’inventaire des t<strong>on</strong>s int<strong>on</strong>atifs<br />

en kirundi et déterminer leur nature. Nous ne part<strong>on</strong>s pas d’une hypothèse préétablie, mais de<br />

l’analyse des d<strong>on</strong>nées authentiques pour découvrir des principes qui gouvernent l’articulati<strong>on</strong><br />

de ces deux types de t<strong>on</strong>s. Les d<strong>on</strong>nées de cette étude s<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>stituées d’extraits de narrati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

produites par quatre locuteurs natifs du kirundi. Après la segmentati<strong>on</strong> (semi-automatique) et<br />

l’alignement du signal de parole en ph<strong>on</strong>èmes, en syllabes et en mots graphiques, notre<br />

approche c<strong>on</strong>siste à évaluer la hauteur de chaque syllabe par rapport à celle de la syllabe<br />

précédente (en nous inspirant du modèle de Mertens 1987 pour le français). Cette méthode<br />

permet d’appréhender aisément les différents types de variati<strong>on</strong> des registres de réalisati<strong>on</strong><br />

t<strong>on</strong>ale. Les premiers résultats m<strong>on</strong>trent que le t<strong>on</strong> de fr<strong>on</strong>tière est déterminé par la localisati<strong>on</strong><br />

du t<strong>on</strong> haut (lexical) dans le mot en fr<strong>on</strong>tière int<strong>on</strong>ative (ou en fin d’én<strong>on</strong>cé). Ce t<strong>on</strong> varie<br />

sel<strong>on</strong> que (i) les deux dernières syllabes comportent ou n<strong>on</strong> un t<strong>on</strong> haut, (ii) que le t<strong>on</strong> haut se<br />

trouve sur la première ou la deuxième more de la pénultième syllabe, (iii) que le t<strong>on</strong> haut se<br />

réalise en même temps sur la première more de la pénultième et la dernière syllabe ou encore<br />

(iv) que ce mot est suivi d’une pause n<strong>on</strong> finale. C<strong>on</strong>trairement à ce qu’<strong>on</strong> observe en fin<br />

d’én<strong>on</strong>cé, où le t<strong>on</strong> haut est neutralisé et se réalise au niveau infra-bas, le t<strong>on</strong> lexical ne<br />

disparaît pas à la suite de l’int<strong>on</strong>ati<strong>on</strong> mais change sa nature : tantôt il est abaissé tantôt il est<br />

relevé. Par c<strong>on</strong>séquent, nous situ<strong>on</strong>s l’analyse des t<strong>on</strong>s sur deux plans différents – lexical et<br />

postlexical.<br />

Enfin, notre approche permet n<strong>on</strong> seulement de rendre compte de l’articulati<strong>on</strong> des t<strong>on</strong>s<br />

lexicaux et des t<strong>on</strong>s int<strong>on</strong>atifs, mais surtout de mettre à l’épreuve les règles qui sous-tendent<br />

la variabilité et le déplacement t<strong>on</strong>al au niveau du mot. Les premières observati<strong>on</strong>s m<strong>on</strong>trent<br />

par exemple que la règle dite de Meeussen s’applique même au niveau postlexical mais que la<br />

règle de Pullback (Goldsmith & Sabimana, 1986) n’est pas vérifiée.<br />

Références citées<br />

Meeussen, A.E. (1959). Essai de grammaire rundi. Musée royal du C<strong>on</strong>go belge, 1959 - 236<br />

pages<br />

GS


Goldsmith & Sabimana, S. (1986). The Kirundi verb. Ms., Indiana University, 1986-<br />

hum.uchicago.edu<br />

Nkanira, P. (1984). La valeur sémiologique et la positi<strong>on</strong> du t<strong>on</strong> dans les formes<br />

grammaticales du verbe en kirundi. In Lesage R. (dir), Systématique du Langage I. Equipe de<br />

recherche en psychomécanique di langage, Presses universitaires de Lill<br />

GS


LA TRANSITIVITÉ EN ATSI, UN DIALECTE DU FANG PARLÉ AU GABON<br />

Yolande Nzang-Bie<br />

&<br />

Pierre Ondo-Mebiame<br />

Université Omar B<strong>on</strong>go<br />

yolnzang@yahoo.fr / pierre<strong>on</strong>do@yahoo.fr<br />

De faç<strong>on</strong> générale, le marquage du groupe nominal objet par une marque casuelle ou<br />

une adpositi<strong>on</strong> est inc<strong>on</strong>nu de la plupart des langues bantu, qui <strong>on</strong>t typiquement un<br />

phénomène d’indexati<strong>on</strong> de l’objet sur le verbe, avec un c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>nement de la présence de<br />

l’indice objet qui varie de langue à langue (Amidu (2001), Bresnan & Moshi (1990), Creissels<br />

(2006), Duranti (1979), Hyman & Duranti (1982), Marantz (1993), van der Wal (2009),<br />

Beaudoin-L & al. : 2004).<br />

Notre propos vise à mettre en évidence les faits dans un groupe de langues où les<br />

processus syntaxiques s<strong>on</strong>t peu abordés et assez mal c<strong>on</strong>nus. Il porte sur la transitivité dans le<br />

parler fang-atsi du Gab<strong>on</strong>. Dans cette langue, le complément d’objet est exprimé sans<br />

marquage particulier. Les c<strong>on</strong>traintes syntaxiques liées à la présence des auxiliaires verbaux<br />

(marques du temps), à l’ordre des mots, de même qu’à la valeur sémantique des objets,<br />

déterminent la noti<strong>on</strong> de transitivité.<br />

Nous tenter<strong>on</strong>s de cerner la nature des différentes marques de temps qui provoquent le<br />

déplacement du pr<strong>on</strong>om objet. Il s’agira de mettre en évidence les caractéristiques de codage<br />

des c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s transitives dans cette langue, où la transitivité d’un verbe n’est pas exprimée<br />

par un marqueur objet obligatoire, mais uniquement déterminée par un ordre syntaxique qui<br />

dépend de la présence d’auxiliaires verbaux, mais aussi du rôle sémantique des objets, et où la<br />

place de l’objet n’est pas influencée par la hiérarchisati<strong>on</strong> ± animé, comme cela est observé<br />

dans de nombreuses langues bantu (Creissels (2006), Riedel (2009), Beaudoin-Lietz & al.<br />

(2004).<br />

1<br />

GS


Nominal Appositi<strong>on</strong> in Shingazidja<br />

Kathleen M. O’C<strong>on</strong>nor & Cédric Patin<br />

Université Lille 3 and UMR 8163 ‘Savoirs, Textes, Langage’<br />

kathleen.oc<strong>on</strong>nor@univ-lille3.fr, cedric.patin@gmail.com<br />

This paper investigates nominal appositi<strong>on</strong> in Shingazidja, a <strong>Bantu</strong> language (G44a) spoken<br />

<strong>on</strong> Grande Comore (Comoros). Our paper has two main goals: (i) propose a descriptive analysis of the<br />

syntactic and prosodic properties of appositives c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s in a <strong>Bantu</strong> language – a topic that has to<br />

our knowledge never been addressed; (ii) show that these properties are similar to what has been found<br />

for other languages (O’C<strong>on</strong>nor 2008 for English; Heringa 2011 for a variety of languages including<br />

German, Dutch, Romanian, etc.).<br />

We first define the properties of restrictive appositi<strong>on</strong> (e.g. Quirk et al. 1994; henceforth RA),<br />

w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> a restrictive nominal modifier and the noun it modifies together identify a single referent (ex:<br />

The poet Burns was born in 1759. (Burt<strong>on</strong>-Roberts 1975: 391)). We show that RA in Shingazidja<br />

shares properties with RA in other languages, such as the fact that the two parts are not separated<br />

prosodically (Acuña-Fariña 1999; Huddlest<strong>on</strong> & Pullum 2002; Quirk et al. 1994): in (1), the t<strong>on</strong>e of<br />

the noun phrase Djumwá ‘Juma’ shifts to the restrictive appositive mleví ‘drunkard’, meaning that the<br />

two elements bel<strong>on</strong>g to the same Ph<strong>on</strong>ological Phrase.<br />

(1) ( Djumwa m-léví ) ɸ ( ha-ɾemé pah[a] ) ɸ<br />

Juma 1-drunkard 1past-hit 5.cat<br />

‘Juma ‘the drunkard’ hit a cat’<br />

However, Shingazidja differs from previously studied languages, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> both the antecedent and the<br />

restrictive appositive must be definite (Burt<strong>on</strong>-Roberts 1975; Lasersohn 1986): in (1), the modifier<br />

mleví ‘drunkard’ is not associated with an augment triggering the definite reading in the language.<br />

We then turn our attenti<strong>on</strong> to n<strong>on</strong>-restrictive appositives (Quirk et al. 1994; henceforth NRA),<br />

which involve n<strong>on</strong>-restrictive or extra informati<strong>on</strong> elements post-posed to a nominal antecedent, much<br />

like appositive relative clauses (A man, timid and hesitant, approached the official. (Quirk et al. 1994:<br />

1295)). NRA in Shingazidja also appears to share characteristics of English NRA with respect to the<br />

(in)definiteness of both antecedent and appositive, stacking, extrapositi<strong>on</strong>, quantifier binding, negative<br />

scope, etc. Prosodically, n<strong>on</strong>-restrictive appositives phrase separately, but do not seem to c<strong>on</strong>stitute<br />

independent Int<strong>on</strong>ati<strong>on</strong>al phrases, cf. claims about Catalan (Astruc 2005; Payà 2003), English (e.g.<br />

Bolinger 1989; Dehé 2009), French (Fagyal 2002; Mertens 2004) and Portuguese (Frota 2001).<br />

(2) ( Djumwá ) ɸ (§) ( ye=m-leví ) ɸ (§) ( ɗaɓá ) ɸ (§) ( ha-ɾemé paha )<br />

Juma A1=1-drunkard 5.idiot 1past-hit 5.cat<br />

‘Juma, the drunkard, an idiot, hit a cat’<br />

Our descriptive account is particularly relevant to the questi<strong>on</strong> of the syntactic link (or lack<br />

t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>of) between a n<strong>on</strong>-restrictive modifier and its host clause. Two approaches, Orphanage and<br />

Integrati<strong>on</strong>, are summarized, al<strong>on</strong>g with the arguments for each. The basic idea of Orphanage is that<br />

the appositive is syntactically generated separately from its antecedent and the two are later linked<br />

together <strong>on</strong>ly in discourse (radical orphanage) or in the syntax. In an Integrati<strong>on</strong> approach, the<br />

appositive and its antecedent are linked syntactically throughout the derivati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

For Shingazidja, as is the case for other languages, the syntactic evidence c<strong>on</strong>cerning the link<br />

between the antecedent and the appositive is ambiguous between an Integrati<strong>on</strong>ist and an Orphanage<br />

analysis. Evidence for Orphanage comes from the failure of a quantifier in the host clause to bind a<br />

variable in the appositive, the fact that negati<strong>on</strong> in the main clause does not negate the appositive, and<br />

the ability to extrapose the appositive. Support for Integrati<strong>on</strong> derives from the fact that the NRA<br />

adopts the class agreement of the initial element and that the augment clitic can attach to the<br />

antecedent, indicati<strong>on</strong>s of a syntactic link between the antecedent and the appositive. We use these<br />

facts to propose an Integrati<strong>on</strong> approach that involves coordinati<strong>on</strong> of the antecedent and the<br />

appositive through a functi<strong>on</strong>al &:P projecti<strong>on</strong>, al<strong>on</strong>g the lines proposed in deVries (2002) for<br />

appositive relatives, adapted by O’C<strong>on</strong>nor (2008) for appositives.<br />

GS


The impact of sociolinguistic factors <strong>on</strong> the usage of the pre-prefix in some G-languages<br />

Malin Petzell, University of Gothenburg, malin.petzell@african.gu.se<br />

Lotta Aunio, Helsinki University, Lotta.Aunio@helsinki.fi<br />

Kami (G36) is an under-described and endangered language in Tanzania. It is spoken by approximately<br />

5000 people according to the <strong>Languages</strong> of Tanzania project (2009), but we believe that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are<br />

significantly fewer speakers left, and <strong>on</strong>ly a few hundred fluent speakers. Luguru (G35), <strong>on</strong> the other<br />

hand, is the major language in the regi<strong>on</strong> with slightly over 400,000 speakers (<strong>Languages</strong> of Tanzania<br />

Project 2009).<br />

The nouns in both languages can take 2 different sets of prefixes; the obligatory nominal class prefixes<br />

and the n<strong>on</strong>-obligatory pre-prefixes 1 (PPs), see examples 0 and 0. In many G-languages, the PP is<br />

disappearing, see for instance Morris<strong>on</strong> (2011) and Petzell (2008). When it does occur, the usage varies<br />

widely from language to language, cf. de Blois (1970).<br />

1. ng’anda íla 2. ayo imunu<br />

ng’anda i- la a- yo i- mu- nu<br />

house:9 9- DEM 1- DEM PP- 1- pers<strong>on</strong>:1/2<br />

‘that house’ (Kami) ‘this pers<strong>on</strong>’ (Luguru 2 )<br />

In Luguru, the PP is more frequently used when the noun phrase is not in the scope of focus, i.e. it is used<br />

for given informati<strong>on</strong>, and “determined by the vague c<strong>on</strong>cept of presuppositi<strong>on</strong>” (Mkude 1974:108). It is<br />

more probable that a noun carries a pre-prefix the greater its referentiality and topicality is.<br />

In Kami, the PP is virtually n<strong>on</strong>-existent, while in Luguru the usage is surprisingly enough increasing. In<br />

Luguru, the PP was used by mostly older speakers in the 1970s (Mkude 1974 and Mkude p.c.), while<br />

today (according to the authors’ recent field work), young people are using the PP more and more, and in<br />

c<strong>on</strong>texts w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> it used to be disallowed. These opposing standpoints ̶ hardly any PP-usage in Kami vs.<br />

increasing usage in Luguru ̶ are remarkable for such closely related languages. We propose that the<br />

wide-spread use in c<strong>on</strong>temporary Luguru may have started out as some form of hypercorrecti<strong>on</strong>, but that<br />

the PP has now become grammaticalized as a topic marker (cf. Greenberg (1978)). The very slight usage<br />

in Kami can partly be explained by historical factors, but also the fact that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is no PP in the<br />

dominating language Swahili. In the multilingual c<strong>on</strong>tact situati<strong>on</strong> that characterizes the area, a vulnerable<br />

language like Kami is more pr<strong>on</strong>e to losing area specific features than Luguru.<br />

References<br />

de Blois, K. F. (1970). The augment in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages I: Africana linguistica IV: 85-165.<br />

Greenberg, J. H. (1978). How does a language acquire gender markers? I: Universals of human language. Vol. 3:<br />

word structure. Stanford University Press: 47-82.<br />

<strong>Languages</strong> of Tanzania Project (2009). Atlasi ya Lugha za Tanzania. Mradi wa Lugha za Tanzania, Chuo Kikuu cha<br />

Dar es Salaam.<br />

Mkude, D. J. (1974). A study of Kiluguru syntax with special reference to the transformati<strong>on</strong>al history of sentences<br />

with permuted subject and object. Series, University of L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>: 335.<br />

Morris<strong>on</strong>, M. (2011). A Reference Grammar of Bena. Series, Rice University. PhD thesis: 542.<br />

Petzell, M. (2008). The Kagulu language of Tanzania: grammar, texts and vocabulary. Rüdiger Köppe Verlag.<br />

1 Also referred to as initial vowel or augment.<br />

2 T<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is no t<strong>on</strong>e marking in Luguru, see for instance Mkude 1974.<br />

GS


C<strong>on</strong>go River Crossroads Cuisine: A Blend of Western and Eastern Words<br />

Although Stanley called it “the Heart of Darkness”, the interior of Central Africa was buzzing with<br />

commercial activity l<strong>on</strong>g before the col<strong>on</strong>ial epoch. The C<strong>on</strong>go River and its tributaries have acted as<br />

highways through the forest at least since the first <strong>Bantu</strong>ph<strong>on</strong>e peoples arrived in the regi<strong>on</strong> (Vansina<br />

1990: 43, 52, 101-102). By the end of the nineteenth century, an exchange system between peoples<br />

specialized in specific subsistence strategies was in place (Hunt 1999: 36), l<strong>on</strong>g-distance trade routes<br />

travelled upstream from the western side of the c<strong>on</strong>tinent (Vansina 1962: 381), and the east of the<br />

current DRC, including the Lokele area, was c<strong>on</strong>trolled by “Zanzibari” slave traders (Hunt 1999: 41-<br />

42).<br />

Trade with neighbours and l<strong>on</strong>g-distance commercial partners left its marks <strong>on</strong> the culinary<br />

traditi<strong>on</strong>s al<strong>on</strong>g the C<strong>on</strong>go River. The culinary lexic<strong>on</strong> of languages like Lokele (C55), Kisoko (C52)<br />

and S<strong>on</strong>gola (D24) c<strong>on</strong>tains clear evidence for this “melting pot”. The word for rice, for instance, is in<br />

these languages respectively ɓɔ̀ɔ̀ːŋgà, lòuːŋgà and mu.fu̧ nga, a noun with a widespread<br />

distributi<strong>on</strong> in East-<strong>Bantu</strong> languages. However, in Mbuza (C36c), spoken <strong>on</strong>ly a stretch further to the<br />

west, the term lɔ́ːsɔ̀ is used, which has a regi<strong>on</strong>al loanword distributi<strong>on</strong> in parts of West <strong>Bantu</strong>. The<br />

word for „winnowing basket‟ in Lokele and Kisoko, lvːŋgu, also has East-<strong>Bantu</strong> cognates. Lokele and<br />

Kisoko are West-<strong>Bantu</strong> languages and thus have many inherited West-<strong>Bantu</strong> culinary words.<br />

However, more recent loans from the west may be identified, e.g. the Kisoko word for „peanut‟<br />

ŋgú ːɓà. Moreover, S<strong>on</strong>gola, classified as East <strong>Bantu</strong>, also c<strong>on</strong>tains many West-<strong>Bantu</strong> words, e.g. the<br />

noun i̧.sángú for „maize‟ (cf. Bostoen 2006-2007). Finally, several culinary words have a wider<br />

regi<strong>on</strong>al distributi<strong>on</strong> al<strong>on</strong>g the C<strong>on</strong>go River, e.g. Lokele mvtɛ̀ːkɛ́ and Kisoko mɔ́tɛ̀ːkɛ́ meaning<br />

„flour‟, and the „cassava‟ nouns ìsɔ̀ːŋgú (Lokele), sɔ̀ːŋgɔ̂ (Kisoko) and mo.s<strong>on</strong>gú̧<br />

(S<strong>on</strong>gola).<br />

The present paper will compare culinary vocabulary from languages spoken al<strong>on</strong>g the C<strong>on</strong>go River.<br />

The focus will be <strong>on</strong> languages for which fieldwork was carried out in 2010, especially Lokele and<br />

Kisoko, and <strong>on</strong> S<strong>on</strong>gola data from the detailed culinary lexic<strong>on</strong> compiled by Ankei (1990). These data<br />

will be supplemented with words from dicti<strong>on</strong>aries and glossaries c<strong>on</strong>cerning neighbouring and/or<br />

related languages. The comparative-linguistic analysis will lead to the identificati<strong>on</strong> of inherited<br />

ingredients and techniques, of routes al<strong>on</strong>g which culinary novelties were transported, and of local<br />

exchanges. It will be attempted to offer a chr<strong>on</strong>ology of culinary developments al<strong>on</strong>g the C<strong>on</strong>go River,<br />

and to integrate the results into the historical and linguistic c<strong>on</strong>text.<br />

References:<br />

Ankei, Takako. 1990. Cookbook of the S<strong>on</strong>gola: an Anthropological Study <strong>on</strong> the Technology of Food<br />

Preparati<strong>on</strong> am<strong>on</strong>g a <strong>Bantu</strong>-speaking People of the Zaïre Forest. African Study M<strong>on</strong>ographs Suppl. 13. pp. 1-<br />

174.<br />

Bostoen, Koen. 2006-2007. Pearl millet in early <strong>Bantu</strong> speech communities in Central Africa: A rec<strong>on</strong>siderati<strong>on</strong><br />

of the lexical evidence. Afrika und Übersee 89. pp. 183-213.<br />

Hunt, Nancy Rose. 1999. A Col<strong>on</strong>ial Lexic<strong>on</strong>. Of Birth Ritual, Medicalizati<strong>on</strong>, and Mobility in the C<strong>on</strong>go.<br />

Durham: Duke University Press.<br />

Vansina, Jan. 1962. L<strong>on</strong>g-Distance Trade-Routes in Central Africa. Journal of African History III. pp. 375-390.<br />

—. 1990. Paths in the Rainforest. Toward a History of Political Traditi<strong>on</strong> in Equatorial Africa. Madis<strong>on</strong>:<br />

University of Wisc<strong>on</strong>sin Press.<br />

GS


Swahili coordinated infinitives<br />

Kristina Riedel, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign (kriedel@illinois.edu) & Mark<br />

de Vos, Rhodes University (m.devos@ru.ac.za)<br />

Swahili exhibits a c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> tensed verb and an infinitival are coordinated, as in (1).<br />

This is an example of ‘unbalanced’ coordinati<strong>on</strong>, insofar as <strong>on</strong>e verb is tensed and the other is<br />

not.<br />

(1) A-li-soma vitabu na ku-andika barua.<br />

SM1-PST-read 7book and INF-write 9letter<br />

‘S/he read books and wrote letters.’<br />

(2) Watu wanane wa-me-uwawa na zaidi ya thelathini ku-jeruhiwa<br />

2people 2eight SM2-PERF-kill.PASS and more 9of thirty INF-injure.PASS<br />

‘Eight people died and more than thirty were injured’<br />

Furthermore, the licensing of the (underlined) subject in the infinitival clause in (2)<br />

problematizes Case Theory because infinitival clauses do not assign nominative case. The<br />

c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> is also puzzling because although it bears some characteristics of pseudocoordinati<strong>on</strong><br />

(e.g. n<strong>on</strong>- commutability of c<strong>on</strong>juncts and the coordinator plays a subordinative<br />

role) it also has properties reminiscent of true coordinati<strong>on</strong> (e.g. and can be substituted by or;<br />

the first verb does not play an aspectual role; the licensing of a subject in the embedded<br />

clause).<br />

Despite the theoretical questi<strong>on</strong>s this raises, the c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> has not been adequately<br />

addressed in the literature. We argue that the c<strong>on</strong>juncts are at least coordinated TPs<br />

dominated by AgrP which licenses case-marked subjects in both c<strong>on</strong>juncts in ways similar to<br />

the licensing of parasitic gaps. Like English, Swahili does not license subjects in infinitival<br />

clauses unless the subject is case-marked by a case-assigning head such as a prepositi<strong>on</strong>. In<br />

the absence of such a head, the <strong>on</strong>ly possibility is that the subject of the infinitival must be<br />

case-marked from outside the coordinated infinitival clause. We adopt the standard<br />

assumpti<strong>on</strong>s that &P is categorially underspecified and that the label of &P reflects the labels<br />

of the coordinated categories themselves -- in this case TP.<br />

We c<strong>on</strong>clude our discussi<strong>on</strong> by comparing Swahili coordinated infinitives to similar<br />

c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s in languages like Turkish and Korean.<br />

GS


The closest relatives of Bende-T<strong>on</strong>gwe (F.10)<br />

Tim Roth, SIL <str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

tim_roth@sil.org<br />

No c<strong>on</strong>sensus has been reached thus far regarding the genetic classificati<strong>on</strong> of the Bende and T<strong>on</strong>gwe [F.10]<br />

languages of western Tanzania, e.g. Nurse says that “it is not clear w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> they…bel<strong>on</strong>g” (1999: 10). The<br />

Bende-T<strong>on</strong>gwe language area lies in geographical proximity to several possibilities for genetic affiliati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

To the north lie the Interlacustrine languages [Z<strong>on</strong>e J], to the south the Corridor languages [M], to the east<br />

the West Tanzania languages [F], and to the west languages from the Democratic Republic of the C<strong>on</strong>go<br />

[D]. Other neighboring languages to the east whose affiliati<strong>on</strong> with Bende is also unclear are the recently<br />

discovered languages G<strong>on</strong>gwe and Rwila (see Abe 2011).<br />

Nurse claims that Bende and T<strong>on</strong>gwe “are quite different from the main West Tanzania languages in<br />

significant ways” and that “they do not bel<strong>on</strong>g <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> [West Tanzania]” (1999: 10). Nurse also treats Bende-<br />

T<strong>on</strong>gwe as peripheral to his (1988) study of the languages in southwestern Tanzania (59). Ehret (2009: 19)<br />

classifies Bende-T<strong>on</strong>gwe with Holoholo [D.28] and Buyu/Buyi [D.55], languages to the west of Bende-<br />

T<strong>on</strong>gwe in the DRC.<br />

Firstly, I establish that indeed Bende-T<strong>on</strong>gwe does not share immediate genetic affiliati<strong>on</strong> with the Corridor<br />

or West Tanzania languages <strong>on</strong> the basis of lexical or ph<strong>on</strong>ological evidence. Sec<strong>on</strong>dly, I show that Bende-<br />

T<strong>on</strong>gwe relates to the G<strong>on</strong>gwe and Rwila languages in terms of Sprachbund c<strong>on</strong>vergence and not genetic<br />

relati<strong>on</strong>ship, using Abe’s (2011) research <strong>on</strong> G<strong>on</strong>gwe and pers<strong>on</strong>al research <strong>on</strong> Rwila. Thirdly, I evaluate<br />

Ehret’s (2009) proposal and c<strong>on</strong>clude that Holoholo had a superstratum influence <strong>on</strong> Bende-T<strong>on</strong>gwe. The<br />

main evidences for such a relati<strong>on</strong>ship are the extincti<strong>on</strong> of the East Holoholo language in Tanzania, as well<br />

as ph<strong>on</strong>ological evidence regarding Agent Noun Spirantizati<strong>on</strong> typology based <strong>on</strong> research from Bostoen<br />

(2008). Fourthly, I present primarily lexical and ph<strong>on</strong>ological evidence that Bende-T<strong>on</strong>gwe is most closely<br />

affiliated with Sumbwa [F.23] and to some extent Ha [DJ.66]. In sum, the linguistic evidence points toward<br />

the genetic roots of Bende-T<strong>on</strong>gwe within the Interlacustrine languages [J].<br />

References<br />

Abe, Yuko. 2011. The C<strong>on</strong>tinuum of <strong>Languages</strong> in West Tanzania <strong>Bantu</strong>: A Case Study of G<strong>on</strong>gwe, Bende and Pimbwe. Hieda,<br />

Osamu, Christa König, and Hirosi Nakagawa (eds.), Geographical Typology and Linguistic Areas, with special reference<br />

to Africa, 177-188. Tokyo University of Foreign Studies/University of Cologne.<br />

Bostoen, Koen. 2008. <strong>Bantu</strong> spirantizati<strong>on</strong>: Morphologizati<strong>on</strong>, lexicalizati<strong>on</strong> and historical classificati<strong>on</strong>. Diachr<strong>on</strong>ica 25:3, 299–<br />

356.<br />

Ehret, Christopher. 2009. <strong>Bantu</strong> Subclassificati<strong>on</strong>s. PDF, Viewed <strong>on</strong> World Wide Web at<br />

http://www.sscnet.ucla.edu/history/ehret/kinship/<strong>Bantu</strong>Classificati<strong>on</strong>%204-09.pdf 16 November 2012.<br />

Nurse, Derek. 1988. The diachr<strong>on</strong>ic background to the language communities of SW Tanzania. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika,<br />

9: 15-115.<br />

Nurse, Derek. 1999. Towards a Historical Classificati<strong>on</strong> of East African <strong>Bantu</strong> <strong>Languages</strong>. In Hombert, Jean-Marie and Larry M.<br />

Hyman (eds.), <strong>Bantu</strong> Historical Linguistics: Theoretical and Empirical Perspectives, 1-41. Stanford: CSLI.<br />

GS


Functi<strong>on</strong>s of Rhetorical Questi<strong>on</strong>s in Rangi (F.33)<br />

Oliver Stegen, SIL <str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g>, oliver_stegen@sil.org<br />

Abstract for 5 th <str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>Bantu</strong> Language <str<strong>on</strong>g>C<strong>on</strong>ference</str<strong>on</strong>g> at Paris, June 12-15, 2013<br />

The study described in this paper grew out of a particular c<strong>on</strong>cern in a project of translati<strong>on</strong> and<br />

literature development for the Rangi language. It had been observed that the project’s Rangi<br />

translators, when encountering rhetorical questi<strong>on</strong>s (RQs) in the source text, often translated<br />

these as RQs into Rangi, claiming that RQs were both natural in Rangi and comm<strong>on</strong> in all<br />

c<strong>on</strong>texts. To verify that claim, an investigati<strong>on</strong> of RQs in the project corpus was undertaken<br />

which includes a primer, a story booklet, 71 texts collected during writer’s workshops in<br />

2005/2006, and 15 texts collected for a discourse workshop in 2010.<br />

A survey of the literature <strong>on</strong> RQs reveals a gap that should be filled: RQs are often defined<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly negatively as “questi<strong>on</strong>[s] for which the speaker does not request an answer from the<br />

addressee” (Hackstein 2004: 167), a definiti<strong>on</strong> w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>by various functi<strong>on</strong>ally quite dissimilar<br />

phenomena are joined into a single category. Most existent typologies of RQs do not seem to<br />

comprehensively differentiate RQ functi<strong>on</strong>s. Corresp<strong>on</strong>dingly, studies of RQs in <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages (e.g. Zerbian 2006) also do not sufficiently distinguish the functi<strong>on</strong>s of RQs. This<br />

paper aims to c<strong>on</strong>tribute both to a functi<strong>on</strong>al typology of RQs and to the applicati<strong>on</strong> of such a<br />

typology to <strong>Bantu</strong> languages.<br />

In additi<strong>on</strong> to a primary distincti<strong>on</strong> between RQs with discourse functi<strong>on</strong>s and RQs with social<br />

functi<strong>on</strong>s (Hackstein 2004), all RQs in the Rangi corpus have been categorised with regard to<br />

medium, length and genre of the text in which they occur, speaker and addressee(s), and<br />

questi<strong>on</strong> form and questi<strong>on</strong> words used.<br />

RQs are indeed not an infrequent feature in Rangi; 37 of 106 texts c<strong>on</strong>tain at least <strong>on</strong>e RQ.<br />

However, the functi<strong>on</strong>al range of RQs found in the corpus is not as broad as claimed by the<br />

Rangi translators in general. The absolute majority of RQs occurring in dialogue expresses<br />

rebuke (cf. example 1) w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as most RQs occurring in m<strong>on</strong>ologue express uncertainty or doubt<br />

(cf. example 2).<br />

1. sà tɕɛ́ ʊ̀lʊ́ːᵑgʊ́ɾî:ɾʲɛ̀ íbǎːⁿdɛ̀ ráːnɪ ́<br />

for what 2sg:burn:PRF:CAUS 5:grasshopper 5:1sg:POSS<br />

‘Why have you burned my grasshopper?’ implying: You should not have burned it.<br />

2. kɔ̀ːnɪ ̀ sìːᵐbà jʊ̌ːdʑìɾɛ̀ ⁿdʊ̀ːsɛ́ tɕɛ́<br />

when 9:li<strong>on</strong> 9:come:PRF 1sg:say:SBJV what<br />

‘When the li<strong>on</strong> comes what should I say?’ implying: I d<strong>on</strong>’t know what to say.<br />

Apart from showing this typologically relevant distincti<strong>on</strong> between RQs in dialogue and RQs in<br />

m<strong>on</strong>ologue, the paper also discusses the role of the speaker (e.g. narrator versus participant)<br />

and the role of genre (narrative versus hortatory). The paper c<strong>on</strong>cludes with an outline of<br />

distinguishing factors for a functi<strong>on</strong>al typology of RQs and with a summary which of the<br />

established categories occur specifically in Rangi.<br />

References<br />

Hackstein, O. 2004. Rhetorical questi<strong>on</strong>s and the grammaticalizati<strong>on</strong> of interrogative pr<strong>on</strong>ouns<br />

as c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong>s in Indo-European. In A.Hyllested, A.R. Jørgensen, J.H. Larss<strong>on</strong> & T. Olander<br />

(eds.). Per Aspera Ad Asteriscos. Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft, 167-186.<br />

Zerbian, S. 2006. Questi<strong>on</strong>s in Northern Sotho. ZAS Papers in Linguistics 43: 257-280.<br />

GS


Vowels under pressure - spirants again?<br />

Eva-Marie Ström, University of Gothenburg, eva-marie.strom@african.gu.se<br />

The aim of this paper is to show that The Ndengeleko language (P10) is currently in the process of<br />

undergoing vowel reducti<strong>on</strong>, simultaneously adding to its inventory of fricatives. These synchr<strong>on</strong>ic<br />

changes are taking place under pressure from the c<strong>on</strong>tact situati<strong>on</strong> with Swahili. Swahili is becoming<br />

the de facto L1 for most young speakers. For the majority of children, Swahili is the <strong>on</strong>ly language.<br />

Within <strong>Bantu</strong> diachr<strong>on</strong>ic studies, a well-known historical sound change is spirantizati<strong>on</strong>, which<br />

typically goes hand in hand with vowel reducti<strong>on</strong> from 7 > 5 (Schadeberg 1995), but not necessarily.<br />

In most affected <strong>Bantu</strong> languages spirantizati<strong>on</strong> has led to the additi<strong>on</strong> of fricatives/affricates to the<br />

c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant inventory. Ndengeleko has also been affected by this historical sound change, but went<br />

further via h to ø in the relevant c<strong>on</strong>texts (Hinnebusch 1981 ; Jans<strong>on</strong> 2007). Compare Ndengeleko -uu<br />

‘ash’, with Proto-<strong>Bantu</strong> *-bú and Jita -fu (Downing 2007). The Ndengeleko language did not reduce<br />

its vowel system as a result of spirantizati<strong>on</strong>. It retains the 7 vowels which have also been<br />

rec<strong>on</strong>structed for Proto-<strong>Bantu</strong>.<br />

My fieldwork shows that Ndengeleko speakers in their thirties tend to level out the 7 vowels to a 5vowel<br />

system. In most cases, this leads to a lowering of the sec<strong>on</strong>d-degree vowels /ɪ/ and /ʊ/ to /e/ and<br />

/o/, respectively. The picture is still somewhat unclear, as the following ph<strong>on</strong>etic chart illustrates:<br />

3000<br />

2500<br />

2000<br />

1500<br />

1000<br />

Figure 1 F1 and F2 values of vowels for a female speaker, 29 yrs, in a sample of 175 tokens (the sample focusses <strong>on</strong> the fr<strong>on</strong>t<br />

and back vowels).<br />

Speakers above the age of 50, however, make clear distincti<strong>on</strong>s between the four high vowels. I<br />

propose that the difference between young and old speakers indicates that the vowel system of<br />

Ndengeleko is in the process of undergoing reducti<strong>on</strong> to 5 vowel ph<strong>on</strong>emes. Furthermore, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are<br />

lexical items in the language which have not been affected by the historical spirantizati<strong>on</strong> and<br />

c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant loss, but include typical spirantizing c<strong>on</strong>texts, like the c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant/vowel combinati<strong>on</strong>s pi and<br />

pu. Presumably, these lexical items have entered the language after spirantizati<strong>on</strong> and c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant loss<br />

took place. It is interesting to note that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is alloph<strong>on</strong>ic variati<strong>on</strong> [pi~fi] and [pu~fu] in such items:<br />

lipíiŋga/lifíiŋga ‘egg’ (cl.5). Moreover, for speakers who use [pi]/[pu], the stop is aspirated. In this<br />

paper I propose that a process similar to spirantizati<strong>on</strong> is affecting the language (again) and that this<br />

time, the vowel inventory will be reduced.<br />

Downing, Laura. 2007. Explaining the role of the morphological c<strong>on</strong>tinuum. Africana Linguistica 13, pp 53-78.<br />

Hinnebusch, Thomas J. 1981. Northeast coastal <strong>Bantu</strong>. In: T. J. Hinnebusch, D. Nurse and M. J. Mould(eds.).<br />

Studies in the classificati<strong>on</strong> of Eastern <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, pp 21-125. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag.<br />

Jans<strong>on</strong>, Tore. 2007. <strong>Bantu</strong> spirantisati<strong>on</strong> as an areal change. Africana Linguistica 13, pp 79-116.<br />

500<br />

200<br />

300<br />

400<br />

500<br />

600<br />

700<br />

800<br />

900<br />

1000<br />

Series1<br />

GS


Schadeberg, Thilo C. 1995. Spirantizati<strong>on</strong> and the 7-to-5 vowel merger in <strong>Bantu</strong>. In: M. Dominicy and D.<br />

Demolin(eds.). Sound change, pp 73-84. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.<br />

GS


Title: Rec<strong>on</strong>structing Proto-A80: Lexical rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s, Processes, Signs of c<strong>on</strong>tact.<br />

Category: Oral presentati<strong>on</strong> (general sessi<strong>on</strong>) OR Poster<br />

Topics: Historical and comparative linguistics (rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>, linguistic change), <strong>Bantu</strong> expansi<strong>on</strong>, language<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tact<br />

The A80 (MAKAA-NJEM) group forms a language cluster which seems to hold a rather special positi<strong>on</strong><br />

within northwestern/Forest <strong>Bantu</strong>. Geographically, its languages are spoken in the southern part of<br />

Camero<strong>on</strong> and in the northern part of Equatorial Guinea, in a small regi<strong>on</strong> in the northwesternmost<br />

part of C<strong>on</strong>go-Brazzaville, in part of the western half of the Centrafrican Republic and also in some<br />

regi<strong>on</strong>s situated in northern Gab<strong>on</strong>. The currently available linguistic and anthropological data str<strong>on</strong>gly<br />

suggest that the history of this language group and its individual language varieties must have been<br />

complex and quite eventful (migrati<strong>on</strong>s, c<strong>on</strong>tact, shift?). According to the most recent theory<br />

c<strong>on</strong>cerning the northwestern <strong>Bantu</strong> expansi<strong>on</strong> (Grollemund 2012), the A80 group, as a sub-branch of<br />

Forest <strong>Bantu</strong>, split off from the other languages at a fairly early stage and its (food-producing)<br />

speakers penetrated the Equatorial Forest of the above-menti<strong>on</strong>ed regi<strong>on</strong>s, most likely following the<br />

waterways, and finally settled down in the Forest. Archeology has shown that this envir<strong>on</strong>ment was<br />

inhabited by small groups of hunter-gat<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>rs at the time, some of which can still be found <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> to<br />

date (e.g. Baka). T<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is solid evidence from several major studies in Cultural anthropology,<br />

Populati<strong>on</strong> genetics, History (e.g. Klieman 1997) and Linguistics for l<strong>on</strong>gstanding c<strong>on</strong>tact and extensive<br />

exchange of various kinds between the two types of populati<strong>on</strong>s that comes in additi<strong>on</strong> to the<br />

presumably incessant and complex history of interacti<strong>on</strong>s between the <strong>Bantu</strong>-speaking populati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

themselves.<br />

Some of the A80 languages have underg<strong>on</strong>e rather uncomm<strong>on</strong> ph<strong>on</strong>ological and/or morphological<br />

changes (cf. Cheucle 2012), such as glottalizati<strong>on</strong>s, palatalizati<strong>on</strong>s, labializati<strong>on</strong>s, prenasalizati<strong>on</strong> and<br />

emergence of semi-voiced stops, Umlaut, diphth<strong>on</strong>gs, vowel reducti<strong>on</strong> word-finally, mid t<strong>on</strong>e and/or<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tour t<strong>on</strong>es, etc. More often than usual, it proves to be difficult or even impossible to establish<br />

unambiguous links between the basic vocabulary of the various individual varieties and the currently<br />

available Proto-<strong>Bantu</strong> (PB) rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s. For these reas<strong>on</strong>s, the rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> of Proto-A80<br />

„ph<strong>on</strong>ology, morphology, lexic<strong>on</strong>) and the study of the linguistic and extralinguistic processes which<br />

have c<strong>on</strong>tributed to the emergence of the present-day A80 varieties are crucial for our understanding<br />

of the linguistic, cultural and demographic history of this part of west-central Africa (filiati<strong>on</strong> as well as<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tact-related phenomena and events).<br />

In this talk/poster, the authors will present the results of currently <strong>on</strong>going comparative research <strong>on</strong><br />

this topic. They will briefly discuss each of the following issues:<br />

Proto-A80 ph<strong>on</strong>ological system (C, V, syllable, t<strong>on</strong>e);<br />

Proto-A80 noun class system (and, if possible, other morphological traits);<br />

C<strong>on</strong>cise overview of the group‟s newly available lexical rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s and their relative<br />

“depth”;<br />

Proporti<strong>on</strong> of inherited characters (plesiomorphies) from PB vs. proporti<strong>on</strong> of innovative<br />

characters (i.e. apomorphies): a short overview of shared or idiosyncratic linguistic changes;<br />

Possible origins of the innovati<strong>on</strong>s : transformati<strong>on</strong> of inherited traits, internal innovati<strong>on</strong>s,<br />

borrowing (vertical or horiz<strong>on</strong>tal), language shift (via situati<strong>on</strong>s of advanced inegalitarian<br />

multilingualism);<br />

The group‟s internal structure as based <strong>on</strong> synapomorphies (shared innovati<strong>on</strong>s).<br />

References<br />

Cheucle M. (2012). Working towards Proto-A80, WOCAL, Buea, Camero<strong>on</strong>, August 21 st 2012.<br />

Grollemund R. (2012). Nouvelles approches en classificati<strong>on</strong> : applicati<strong>on</strong> aux langues bantu du Nord-Ouest. PhD<br />

Thesis: Université Lumière-Ly<strong>on</strong> 2.<br />

Klieman K. A. (1997). Hunters and farmers of the western equatorial rainforest: ec<strong>on</strong>omy and society, 3000 B.C. to<br />

A.D. 1880. PhD Thesis: University of California Los Angeles.<br />

GS


Titre : BantU, bantI, bantA : les voyelles finales dans les langues du groupe kota-kele (B20).<br />

Approche comparative et écologique de parlers linguistiquement proches en situati<strong>on</strong> de<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tact.<br />

Catégorie : présentati<strong>on</strong> orale (sessi<strong>on</strong> générale) OU poster<br />

Thématiques : c<strong>on</strong>tact de langues, plurilinguisme, linguistique historique et comparative<br />

Comment des parlers linguistiquement (très) similaires évoluent-ils et s’influencent-ils alors que<br />

leurs locuteurs entretiennent des relati<strong>on</strong>s d’échange intenses les uns avec les autres et que ces<br />

locuteurs s<strong>on</strong>t amenés à les utiliser au quotidien dans un c<strong>on</strong>texte de plurilinguisme généralisé ?<br />

Les auteurs de cette c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong> tenter<strong>on</strong>t d’apporter des éléments de rép<strong>on</strong>se à cette questi<strong>on</strong><br />

en s’appuyant sur une étude de cas : l’histoire complexe des voyelles finales des parlers du groupe<br />

B20. Ce dernier c<strong>on</strong>stitue un ensemble plutôt atypique dans le c<strong>on</strong>texte du Gab<strong>on</strong>. Une étude<br />

approf<strong>on</strong>die de cet ensemble est actuellement en cours de réalisati<strong>on</strong> (Mokrani, thèse de doctorat).<br />

Le B20 comprend une quinzaine de parlers structurelle-ment et génétiquement proches mais<br />

géographiquement souvent très dispersés. L’<strong>on</strong> renc<strong>on</strong>tre des variétés B20 dans toutes les régi<strong>on</strong>s<br />

du Gab<strong>on</strong> à l’excepti<strong>on</strong> du sud-ouest, mais le plus grand nombre d’entre elles se trouvent<br />

c<strong>on</strong>centrées dans la moitié est du pays, s’étendant du nord-est au sud. Certains voient dans cette<br />

distributi<strong>on</strong> spatiale éclatée un indice de l’ancienneté de l’installati<strong>on</strong> des locuteurs B20 dans la<br />

régi<strong>on</strong>. L’étude lexicostatistique de Bastin et Pir<strong>on</strong> (1999) fait apparaître le groupe comme un<br />

ensemble flottant composé de deux sous-ensembles. D’autres travaux (Bastin et al. 1999, Alewijnse<br />

et al. 2007, Grollemund 2012) corroborent l’existence de deux, voire trois sous-groupes.<br />

L’éclatement spatial fait que les parlers se trouvent en c<strong>on</strong>tact permanent avec des variétés<br />

linguistiques d’autres groupes (B50 et B60 notamment). Dans plusieurs régi<strong>on</strong>s les locuteurs des<br />

parlers B20 entretiennent également des c<strong>on</strong>tacts réguliers et soutenus les uns avec les autres.<br />

L’étude de l’évoluti<strong>on</strong> des voyelles finales en B20 révèle une grande variabilité. Ces évoluti<strong>on</strong>s s<strong>on</strong>t<br />

à situer dans un c<strong>on</strong>texte géolinguistique d’affaiblissement de la voyelle finale. Chaque parler B20<br />

atteste, à des degrés variables, nombre de réalisati<strong>on</strong>s imprédictibles venant s’ajouter aux réflexes<br />

vocaliques réguliers. Cette situati<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>fuse ne fait que s’amplifier du fait que des informateurs se<br />

réclamant d’une même variété mais venant de localités différentes livrent parfois des voyelles<br />

divergentes. Pris globalement, certaines variétés s’avèrent plus stables et d<strong>on</strong>c moins sujettes à<br />

variati<strong>on</strong> que d’autres. L’étude des réflexes vocaliques amène à distinguer entre développements<br />

internes aux parlers et développements externes. Les premiers, présents sous forme de tendances<br />

plus ou moins pr<strong>on</strong><strong>on</strong>cées sel<strong>on</strong> les parlers, s’expliquent notamment par des processus<br />

d’assimilati<strong>on</strong> (propagati<strong>on</strong> de traits vocaliques ([±arrière], etc.) et formati<strong>on</strong> de dipht<strong>on</strong>gues,<br />

c<strong>on</strong>traintes sur les cooccurrences vocaliques, entourage c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>antique, etc.). Les sec<strong>on</strong>ds ne<br />

peuvent s’expliquer que par des situati<strong>on</strong>s de c<strong>on</strong>tact intense et soutenu.<br />

L’écologie actuelle des parlers semble bien fournir tous les ingrédients pour l’élaborati<strong>on</strong> de<br />

scénarios permettant de comprendre la complexité des évoluti<strong>on</strong>s : héritage linguistique, proximité<br />

structurelle, proximité spatiale (ou pas), plurilinguisme ambiant, prestige, fréquence d’utilisati<strong>on</strong><br />

des mots, nombre de locuteurs, degré de vitalité, absence de standardisati<strong>on</strong>, c<strong>on</strong>tact soutenu,<br />

mobilité des individus et mélange des populati<strong>on</strong>s, stratégies matrim<strong>on</strong>iales et résidentielles, etc. Il<br />

est d<strong>on</strong>c probable que la combinais<strong>on</strong> de tous ces facteurs, internes et externes, avec la similarité<br />

des formes, le c<strong>on</strong>tact régulier et le plurilinguisme en toute première positi<strong>on</strong>, a pu engendrer la<br />

situati<strong>on</strong> actuelle. La c<strong>on</strong>naissance et l’utilisati<strong>on</strong> de formes (très) similaires en compétiti<strong>on</strong> directe<br />

peuvent finir par déc<strong>on</strong>certer les locuteurs plurilingues et les « embrouiller » quant à la « b<strong>on</strong>ne »<br />

forme à utiliser. Les auteurs présenter<strong>on</strong>t d’abord un aperçu des types d’évoluti<strong>on</strong>s ph<strong>on</strong>ologiques<br />

que ces parlers attestent ainsi qu’un synopsis des réflexes relevés (utilisati<strong>on</strong> de cartes). Ils<br />

s’intéresser<strong>on</strong>t ensuite aux divers facteurs ayant pu c<strong>on</strong>tribuer à la situati<strong>on</strong> complexe actuelle et<br />

s’interroger<strong>on</strong>t sur les implicati<strong>on</strong>s de cette situati<strong>on</strong> pour les recherches sur la classificati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Alewijnse B., Nerb<strong>on</strong>ne J., Van der Veen L. & Manni F. (2007). A computati<strong>on</strong>al analysis of Gab<strong>on</strong> varieties. In<br />

Proceedings of the RANLP Workshop <strong>on</strong> Computati<strong>on</strong>al Ph<strong>on</strong>ology, Petya Osenova (ed.). Recent Advances in<br />

Natural Language Ph<strong>on</strong>ology c<strong>on</strong>ference, Borovetz 2007. 3-12.<br />

Bastin Y., Coupez A. & Mann M. (1999). C<strong>on</strong>tinuity and Divergence in the <strong>Bantu</strong> <strong>Languages</strong>: Perspectives from<br />

a Lexicostatistic Study. Tervuren: MRAC, Annales, Série in-8°, Sciences humaines 162.<br />

GS


Bastin Y. & Pir<strong>on</strong> P. (1999). Classificati<strong>on</strong>s lexicostatistiques : bantou, bantou et bantoïde. De l’intérêt des<br />

‘groupes flottants’. In J-M. Hombert & L.M. Hyman, <strong>Bantu</strong> Historical Linguistics. Theoretical and Empirical<br />

Perspectives, 149-64. Stanford : CSLI Publicati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

Grollemund R. (2012). Nouvelles approches en classificati<strong>on</strong> : applicati<strong>on</strong> aux langues bantu du Nord-Ouest.<br />

Thèse de doctorat soutenue le 17 septembre 2012 devant l’Université Lumière-Ly<strong>on</strong> 2.<br />

GS


Upstep in Mbugwe (F34)<br />

Vera Wilhelmsen, Uppsala University. E‐mail: vera.wilhelmsen@lingfil.uu.se<br />

Mbugwe (classified as F34, see Maho 2009) is a t<strong>on</strong>al <strong>Bantu</strong> language, with a high (H) t<strong>on</strong>e and a low (L)<br />

default t<strong>on</strong>e. On the surface, however, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are more t<strong>on</strong>e levels, due to ph<strong>on</strong>ological processes such<br />

as automatic downstep, a (super) low boundary t<strong>on</strong>e, and upstep in certain c<strong>on</strong>texts. Mbugwe also has<br />

H t<strong>on</strong>e spread (HTS), in which a H t<strong>on</strong>e spreads <strong>on</strong>e mora to the right in most, but not all c<strong>on</strong>texts.<br />

These ph<strong>on</strong>ological processes will be exemplified and the rules for when they apply will be given.<br />

Especially upstep will be investigated in detail, and an autosegmental analysis of the phenomen<strong>on</strong> will<br />

be given.<br />

T<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are several different kinds of uptrends in Mbugwe. In some cases, when a H t<strong>on</strong>e spreads<br />

<strong>on</strong>e mora to the right, or t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are two c<strong>on</strong>secutive H t<strong>on</strong>es, underlyingly, the sec<strong>on</strong>d mora is realized<br />

higher than the first mora. In both these cases it could be due to peak delay, however, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> the peak<br />

of the H t<strong>on</strong>e is not reached until well into the next syllable or mora (see Myers 1999). In other cases,<br />

however, when t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are several adjacent H t<strong>on</strong>es underlyingly, the last H t<strong>on</strong>e is realized higher than<br />

the preceding <strong>on</strong>es, as in (1): The first mora of the verb root is upstepped, and then the H t<strong>on</strong>e spreads<br />

<strong>on</strong>e mora to the right. This mora is at the same height as the upstepped H. This is a clear example of<br />

upstep, and could not be due to peak delay.<br />

(1) vá-á-kó-ꜛ tómám-eyɛ 1<br />

SM3PL‐PST‐OM2PL‐serve‐HEST 2<br />

‘They served us (yesterday).’<br />

The kind of upstep found in Mbugwe is similar to other kinds of upstep, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> a H is raised before a L<br />

t<strong>on</strong>e, and specifically t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are similarities with Hyman’s 1992 analysis of Kirimi, which is classified as<br />

F32 (Maho 2009), and is quite close to Mbugwe geographically and perhaps genetically . In the paper we<br />

will investigate how this kind of upstep can be represented theoretically, foremost in an autosegmental<br />

analysis. One suggesti<strong>on</strong> is a separate register tier, which may account for the upstep of certain H t<strong>on</strong>es.<br />

(Hyman 1992; Snider 1990; Yip 2002). Given that upstep is rather unusual, at least compared with<br />

downstep, the presentati<strong>on</strong> of new data and a suggesti<strong>on</strong> for a theoretical account of the phenomen<strong>on</strong><br />

will put the current theoretical assumpti<strong>on</strong>s and models to a test, and hopefully c<strong>on</strong>tribute to advance<br />

the field of t<strong>on</strong>e studies in general and in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages specifically.<br />

Hyman, L.M. 1992. Register t<strong>on</strong>es and t<strong>on</strong>al geometry. In The ph<strong>on</strong>ology of t<strong>on</strong>e: the representati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

t<strong>on</strong>al register, ed. by Harry van der Hulst and Keith L. Snider, p. 75‐108. Berlin: Mout<strong>on</strong> de<br />

Gruyter.<br />

Maho, J.F. 2009. NUGL <strong>on</strong>line: The <strong>on</strong>line versi<strong>on</strong> of the New Updated Guthrie List‐A referential<br />

classificati<strong>on</strong> of the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. June 4, 2009. Online file: http://goto. glocalnet.<br />

net/mahopapers/nugl<strong>on</strong>line. pdf.<br />

Myers, S. 1999. T<strong>on</strong>e associati<strong>on</strong> and F0 timing in Chichewa. Studies in African Linguistics 28. 215‐239.<br />

Snider, K.L. 1990. T<strong>on</strong>al upstep in Krachi: evidence for a register tier. Language 66.3, 453‐74.<br />

Yip, M.J.W. 2002. T<strong>on</strong>e. Cambridge ; New York: Cambridge University Press.<br />

1 An acute accent indicates surface H t<strong>on</strong>es, underlyingly H moras are underlined. Low t<strong>on</strong>es are not marked. An<br />

upwards arrow marks upstep. Evidence that the first moras really are H and not L will be presented in the paper.<br />

2 Abbreviati<strong>on</strong>s used which are not from Leipzig Glossing rules: SM: subject marker, OM: object marker, HEST:<br />

hesternal tense.<br />

GS


“Str<strong>on</strong>g Y-“ as an isogloss for Southern <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

Jeffrey Wills, University of Zimbabwe, wills@ucu.edu.ua<br />

Two systems of c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>ed obstruent changes are well-known and widespread<br />

in Eastern Savannah <strong>Bantu</strong> — the effects of spirantizing high vowels and of preceding<br />

nasals. But another important set of sound changes affected a smaller group of<br />

languages in Southern <strong>Bantu</strong> through the impact of the class 5 nominal prefix *(di)-į<br />

and the verbal prefix *jį- <strong>on</strong> following c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants. Hence, the difference between the<br />

reflexes of proto-<strong>Bantu</strong> *-kúmì ‘ten’ and the unc<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>ed outcomes of *k (in<br />

parentheses): N31 Cewa khúmi (k), P31 Makhuwa ni-khúmi ( ), S12 Zezuru gúmí (k),<br />

S21 Venda fúmí (h), S31 Tswana lesómé, S42 Zulu ishumi, S53 Ts<strong>on</strong>ga khume.<br />

This general phenomen<strong>on</strong> is familiar: many of the relevant changes for<br />

individual languages are recorded in Guthrie’s lists under *yį- clusters, and recent<br />

attenti<strong>on</strong> has been given to the effects in individual languages, for example the<br />

detailed papers by Creissels and Schadeberg <strong>on</strong> Tswana and Makhuwa respectively.<br />

But problems remain and the general system has apparently not been re-examined<br />

since Eiselen presented the significant data for it in 1924. We offer an updated study of<br />

the range of the change, its c<strong>on</strong>sequences for language subgrouping, and improved<br />

rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

First, the range of languages w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> these changes take place is limited to<br />

Southern <strong>Bantu</strong> (with the excepti<strong>on</strong> of a few distant languages which are argued to<br />

have independent changes). This grouping is both areal and probably genetic (Ehret<br />

also forms this group based <strong>on</strong> innovati<strong>on</strong>s in lexical morphemes). Much of the<br />

evidence for this set of changes comes from irregular and fossilized forms, e.g. Chewa<br />

béle/maéle ‘breast(s)’, indicators of a comm<strong>on</strong> antique sound change rather than of<br />

areal borrowing. Before c<strong>on</strong>sidering the special set of sound changes menti<strong>on</strong>ed<br />

above, it is argued that the regular proto-So.<strong>Bantu</strong> reflex of n<strong>on</strong>-nasalized PB*j is *y<br />

(not *z as Guthrie).<br />

Because changes to class 5 nouns are often leveled by analogy to class 6,<br />

many languages shows <strong>on</strong>ly vestiges of a sound change to initial c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants in those<br />

nouns. The changes are best preserved in the S10 (Sh<strong>on</strong>a group) and N30-40<br />

languages (Cewa, etc), from which data the general ph<strong>on</strong>ological pattern of the rule<br />

can be rec<strong>on</strong>structed. Particular attenti<strong>on</strong> is given to the effects <strong>on</strong> the proto-<strong>Bantu</strong><br />

voiced obstruents. Fifteen verb stems in *jį- are also examined, as well as some<br />

reflexives, showing the same changes as in Class 5.<br />

The exact ph<strong>on</strong>ological path of the changes needs further clarificati<strong>on</strong> but it<br />

seems likely that, in many sandhi and word-internal c<strong>on</strong>texts, *-i/į- became a glide that<br />

combined with the following c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant and apparently aspirated it. Accordingly, we<br />

argue that the source of the c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant changes is not a preceding ATR+ vowel per se,<br />

as is usually described, but rather a glide resulting from diphth<strong>on</strong>gizati<strong>on</strong> of a high fr<strong>on</strong>t<br />

vowel. Evidence for this comes from similar changes to C2 after a stem-internal<br />

diphth<strong>on</strong>g, e.g. *bàįj- > Zezuru –veza, Kalanga -bezha, N. Sotho –bêtla (w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as<br />

unc<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>ed *j > y, ). Further evidence for a rule based <strong>on</strong> a glide rather than the<br />

ATR+ vowel comes from even a few examples with the ATR- fr<strong>on</strong>t vowel.<br />

The effects of what might be called “str<strong>on</strong>g y-” are similar to those caused by<br />

nasals in some languages (already observed by Bleek) and this has led some to<br />

suggest that į>n. But differing results from *n- and *y- in other languages argue for two<br />

different sound changes, the results of which then merged in some languages, with<br />

further leveling. This may address some of the proto-<strong>Bantu</strong> rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> doublets<br />

with a homorganic nasal infix, which seem to result from a preceding high fr<strong>on</strong>t vowel.<br />

References: c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong>s by C. Ehret, D. Creissels, and Th. Schadeberg in J-M.<br />

Hombert & L. Hyman, <strong>Bantu</strong> Historical Linguistics: Theoretical and Empirical<br />

Perspectives (1999).<br />

GS


Asymmetries and Locality in Zulu right dislocati<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Jochen Zeller, University of KwaZulu-Natal, Durban, South Africa<br />

zeller@ukzn.ac.za<br />

With respect to object marking, Zulu (Nguni, S 42) counts as a symmetrical language (cf. Bresnan<br />

& Moshi 1990): either object NP of a ditransitive verb can be doubled by an object marker. The<br />

corresp<strong>on</strong>ding object NP must then exit the VP. (1a) shows right dislocati<strong>on</strong> of the indirect object,<br />

in (1b), the direct object is dislocated. The unmarked object remains in the VP (see Cheng &<br />

Downing 2009; Adams 2010; Zeller 2012), and the verb is realised in the c<strong>on</strong>joint form:<br />

(1) a. U-John u-ba-nik-e i-mali]VP a-ba-ntwana.<br />

AUG-1a.John 1.SM-2.OM-give-PAST AUG-9.m<strong>on</strong>ey AUG-2-child<br />

b. U-John u-yi-nik-e a-ba-ntwana]VP i-mali.<br />

AUG-1a.John 1.SM-9.OM-give-PAST AUG-2-child AUG-9.m<strong>on</strong>ey<br />

'John gave the children the m<strong>on</strong>ey.'<br />

Curiously, however, the symmetry shown in (1) breaks down in c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s such as (2a) and<br />

(2b), which express verum focus and display the disjoint verb form:<br />

(2) a. U-John u-ba-nik-il-e]VP i-mali a-ba-ntwana.<br />

AUG-1a.John 1.SM-2.OM-give-DIS-PAST AUG-9.m<strong>on</strong>ey AUG-2-child<br />

'John did give the children the m<strong>on</strong>ey.'<br />

b. *U-John u-yi-nik-il-e]VP a-ba-ntwana i-mali.<br />

AUG-1a.John 1.SM-9.OM-give-DIS-PAST AUG-2-child AUG-9.m<strong>on</strong>ey<br />

Adams (2010) and Zeller (2012) argue that in (2), both object NPs are dislocated. In this case,<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly the indirect object can be object-marked; object marking of the direct object is excluded.<br />

In this paper I offer an analysis of "double dislocati<strong>on</strong>" c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s such as (2a). I first<br />

provide additi<strong>on</strong>al empirical evidence from focus, NPI-licensing and word order that both NPs in<br />

these c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s are in fact dislocated, despite the occurrence of <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e object marker. I then<br />

propose an analysis of the c<strong>on</strong>trast between (1b) and (2b) which is based <strong>on</strong> the Probe-Goal<br />

system of Agree(ment) proposed in the Minimalist Program. In this system, Agree is c<strong>on</strong>strained<br />

by Locality: a Probe always agrees with the closest Goal. I suggest that right-dislocati<strong>on</strong> in Zulu is<br />

triggered by a VP-external low functi<strong>on</strong>al category F (cf. Buell 2008), which enters an Agreerelati<strong>on</strong><br />

with a potential Goal, a relati<strong>on</strong> overtly expressed by object marking. I argue that<br />

potential Goals for dislocati<strong>on</strong> are those NPs that have to be removed from the VP in order to<br />

allow focus to be expressed <strong>on</strong> VP-internal material (as in Cheng & Downing 2009). In simple<br />

dislocati<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s such as (1a) and (1b), <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e of the VP-internal NPs counts as a<br />

potential Goal. When the direct object is a n<strong>on</strong>-focus, it can t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>fore be dislocated across the<br />

indirect object, because the latter does not count as an intervenor in terms of Locality. In c<strong>on</strong>trast,<br />

verum focus implies that both object NPs are n<strong>on</strong>-focus; c<strong>on</strong>sequently, both objects count as<br />

potential Goals. Locality t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>fore dictates that the NP that first enters an Agree-relati<strong>on</strong> with F<br />

must be the indirect object, which is closer to F, and dislocated first. Even though the direct object<br />

is subsequently dislocated as well, object marking is t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>fore always with the "superior" indirect<br />

object. My analysis provides evidence that right dislocati<strong>on</strong> in Zulu is a syntactic A-bar<br />

movement process that is triggered by an "antifocus feature" (cf. Ndayiragije 1999), even though<br />

the motivati<strong>on</strong> for this movement may be prosodic, and related to the informati<strong>on</strong> structure.<br />

References<br />

Adams, N. 2010. The Zulu ditransitive verb phrase. PhD-thesis, The University of Chicago.<br />

Bresnan, J. and L. Moshi (1990). Object Asymmetries in Comparative <strong>Bantu</strong> Syntax. Linguistic Inquiry 21, 147-181.<br />

Buell, L. 2008. VP-Internal DPs and Right Dislocati<strong>on</strong> in Zulu. Manuscript, University of Leiden.<br />

Cheng, L. & Downing, L.J. 2009. W<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>'s the Topic in Zulu? The Linguistic Review 26, 207-238.<br />

Ndayiragije, J., 1999. Checking Ec<strong>on</strong>omy. Linguistic Inquiry 30, 399-444.<br />

Zeller, J. 2012. Object marking in isiZulu. Southern African Linguistics and Applied Language Studies 30, 219-235.<br />

GS


Оbject indexati<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong>: the competiti<strong>on</strong> of parameters (the case of Swahili and Kinyarwanda)<br />

Alexander Zheltov (St.Petersburg State Iniversity, Department of African Studies, ajujeltov@mail.ru<br />

Object indexati<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong> have been attracting the interest of rather many linguists (see the list of<br />

literature). The <strong>Bantu</strong> languages dem<strong>on</strong>strate different strategies of object indexati<strong>on</strong> which depend <strong>on</strong><br />

such parameters as syntactic functi<strong>on</strong>, pragmatic status, positi<strong>on</strong> of NP in the animacy hierarchy (deictic<br />

hierarchy) The occurence and the order of object indexes can be explained by the combinati<strong>on</strong> of these<br />

factors. In the presentati<strong>on</strong> these factors are analysed for c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s with 3-valency verbs. For Swahili<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e object index is possible, while in Kinyarwanda the verb can include indexes for both Patient<br />

(Theme) and Recepient. Swahili in general prefers to use the positi<strong>on</strong> of verbal object index for<br />

Patient/Theme, but the influence of animacy (deictic) hierarchy can be observed in some examples:<br />

If patient/theme is animated/human the indexati<strong>on</strong> is obligatory, otherwise – facultative (for –peleka «to<br />

send»):<br />

Ni-li-m-peleka mwanafunzi kwake. But * Ni-li-Ø-peleka mwanafunzi kwake.<br />

1SG-PAST-OBJ.HUM-send a student to him/her»<br />

Ni-li-ki-peleka kitabu kwake. = Ni-li-Ø-peleka kitabu kwake.<br />

1SG-PAST-OBJ.INAN-send a book to him<br />

If both the patient/theme and the addressee/recipient are pr<strong>on</strong>ouns verbal index points to the patient/theme<br />

(without applicative suffix):<br />

A-li-ni-<strong>on</strong>yesha kwako<br />

3SG-PAST-1SG.OBJ-show to you.<br />

However if the Recepient is 1 or 2 Sg and patient/theme is 3 Pl and is expressed by Dem<strong>on</strong>strative the<br />

indexati<strong>on</strong> of Recepient is possible even without applicative suffix:<br />

A-li-ni-<strong>on</strong>yesha hao.<br />

3SG-PAST-1SG.OBJ-show those (people).<br />

So, for Swahili: if the rank of Recepient is substantially higher than that of patient/theme it can be indexed<br />

in the verb even without applicative suffix; if the rank is equal patient/theme is indexed.<br />

Hence, for Swahili: patient/theme > recipient, pers<strong>on</strong>al pr<strong>on</strong>ouns > nouns/dem<strong>on</strong>stratives<br />

For Kinyrwanda absolutely different strategy is used the influence of animacy (deictic) hierarchy being<br />

much more important. Recepient occurs closer to the stem than Patient (Theme) when the hierarchical<br />

status of actants is equal, but animacy/deictic dimesi<strong>on</strong> is more important than semantic role:<br />

A-za-ba-ny-ereka<br />

3SG-FUT-3PL.Recepient-2SG.Theme –show = 3SG-FUT-3PL.Theme-2SG.Recepient –show<br />

He will show you to them. = He will show them to you.<br />

It is the hierarchical status of pr<strong>on</strong>ouns that determines the order of verbal indexes, but not the semantic<br />

role.<br />

So, <strong>Bantu</strong> languages vary greatly in choosing strategies of object indexati<strong>on</strong> for 3-valency verbs, but<br />

surface syntactic structures can not be adequately understood if to ignore the influence of animacy<br />

(deictic) hierarchy, though the degree of it is different.<br />

Literature<br />

Allan, Keith Anaphora, Cataphora, and Topic Focusing: Functi<strong>on</strong>s of the Object Prefix in Swahili. // Current Approaches to African<br />

Linguistics, Volume 1, Dordrecht – Cinnamins<strong>on</strong>, 1983, 323 –335.<br />

Hyman, Larry M., and Alessandro Duranti. 1982. On the object relati<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong>. In Studies in transitivity, ed. S. A. Thomps<strong>on</strong> and<br />

P. Hopper, 217–239. New York: Academic Press.<br />

Nicolle, Steve The Swahili Object Marker: Syntax, Semantics and Mythology. // Proceedings 2nd World C<strong>on</strong>gress of African<br />

Linguistics, Leipzig, 1997, H.E.Wolff and O.Gensler (eds), 679-689.<br />

Nurse, Derek, and Gérard Philipps<strong>on</strong>, ed. 2003. The <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>: Routledge.<br />

Seidel, Amanda, and Alexis Dimitriadis. 1997. The discourse functi<strong>on</strong> of object marking in Swahili. In CLS 33: The Main Sessi<strong>on</strong>,<br />

373–389.<br />

Zheltov, Alexander Object indexati<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong> (Swahili and Kinyaruanda) // Papers <strong>on</strong> African Studies – 2009, St. Petersburg,<br />

2009, 174-181 (in Russian)<br />

GS


PS<br />

Anatomie et physiologie humaine dans les langues bantu: une réflexi<strong>on</strong> sémantique<br />

Michela Araújo Ribeiro (Universidade Federal de R<strong>on</strong>dônia/Brasil) michelamar_2007@hotmail.com<br />

Jacky Maniacky ( Musée Real da África Central, Tervuren, Bélgica) jacky.maniacky@africamuseum.be<br />

Les parties du corps s<strong>on</strong>t bien c<strong>on</strong>nues comme étant représentatives du vocabulaire de base d'une<br />

langue, peu perméables à l'emprunt, quoique sujettes à des variati<strong>on</strong>s pour diverses rais<strong>on</strong>s telles que<br />

les tabous. C'est également un domaine particulièrement propice aux changements sémantiques, d<strong>on</strong>t<br />

certains c<strong>on</strong>sidérés comme universaux. Nous analys<strong>on</strong>s ici quelques-unes des situati<strong>on</strong>s renc<strong>on</strong>trées<br />

en bantu (y compris pour ce qui est du vocabulaire physiologique) et parfois qualifiées de séries<br />

osculentes par Guthrie.<br />

Il existe des glissements de sens:<br />

mbombo cráneo A33b Kômbè (FERNANDEZ, 1951:230)<br />

mbombo testa H16 Kik<strong>on</strong>go (DA SILVA MAIA, 1994:609)<br />

imbombo ridge of the nose S42 Zulu (DOKO & VILAKAZI, 1949:82)<br />

Cela se traduit dans certains cas par une variati<strong>on</strong> de l'amplitude sémantique:<br />

lwaála finger F31 Nilamba (YUKAWA, 1982:2)<br />

-yádá fingenail D25 Lega (BOTNE, 1994:56)<br />

Une autre source de variati<strong>on</strong> lexicale vient du procédé de déverbativisati<strong>on</strong>:<br />

-nwa drink M31 Nyakyusa (FELBERG, 1996:163)<br />

akanwa mouth M31 Nyakyusa (FELBERG, 1996:13)<br />

lendé to go, to walk A22 Bakweri (KAGAYA, 1992:117)<br />

mmendé leg, shin A22 Bakweri (KAGAYA, 1992:85)<br />

Enfin, nous renc<strong>on</strong>tr<strong>on</strong>s des cas de développement figuré:<br />

ngɔndɔ lune, menstruati<strong>on</strong> C71 ɔtɛtɛla (HAGENDORENS, 1956: 199, 211)<br />

kwezi lune, menstruati<strong>on</strong> L33 Kiluba (GILLIS, 1981: 308, 325)<br />

A l'aide d'une cartographie des réflexes des différentes situati<strong>on</strong>s sémantiques abordées, nous<br />

propos<strong>on</strong>s chaque fois un scénario diachr<strong>on</strong>ique.<br />

Quelques références générales:<br />

Brown, Cecil H. & Witkowski, Stanley R. 1981. Figurative language in a universalist perspective.<br />

American Ethnologist 8: 596-615.<br />

Enfield, N.J.; Majid, A.; van Staden, M. 2006. Cross-linguistic categorizati<strong>on</strong> of the body: introducti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Language Sciences 28: 137-147.<br />

Guthrie, M. 1967-1970. Comparative <strong>Bantu</strong>. 4 vol. Gregg <str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g> Publishers Ltd.<br />

Homburger, L. 1929. Noms des parties du corps dans les langues négro-Africaines. Paris: Édouard<br />

Champi<strong>on</strong>, 118 p.


Cross-linguistic uniformity in neutral agreement phenomena:<br />

evidence from Indo-European and Zulu<br />

Lest<strong>on</strong> Chandler Buell, , University of Amsterdam and Leiden University<br />

Merijn de Dreu, , Leiden University<br />

In Indo-European languages, neuter gender has two types of uses. In Romance languages, it is <strong>on</strong>ly<br />

used for certain grammatical functi<strong>on</strong>s, a phenomen<strong>on</strong> referred to as ‘neutral agreement’ by Corbett<br />

(1991), while in other languages, such as Slavic and some Germanic languages, it is additi<strong>on</strong>ally used<br />

as a lexical gender assigned to many nouns. In these languages, the term ‘neuter’ is intuitive, because<br />

it stands in oppositi<strong>on</strong> to masculine and feminine genders, which are (to some extent) sex-based. In<br />

c<strong>on</strong>trast, <strong>Bantu</strong> languages have elaborate noun class systems which are not rooted in sex, making the<br />

c<strong>on</strong>cept ‘neuter’ seem irrelevant. However, in this talk, we show that the exact same cluster of<br />

grammatical functi<strong>on</strong>s associated with neuter gender in Germanic and Romance is also associated<br />

with a single noun class in Zulu, namely the historically locative noun class 17. This claim is<br />

supported with data from both Zulu and a variety of European languages, especially Romance and<br />

Germanic. This c<strong>on</strong>currence of uses suggests that the set of phenomena associated with Corbett’s<br />

“neutral agreement” is cross-linguistically uniform and independent of the way of the lexic<strong>on</strong> is<br />

organized. In other words, it leads us to predict that in any given language the same range of<br />

grammatical functi<strong>on</strong>s will be associated with a single agreement class regards of the nature and<br />

number of its noun classes.<br />

The functi<strong>on</strong>s associated with neutral agreement (i.e., Indo-European neuter and Zulu class<br />

17) can be divided into three types. First, the “generic” uses involve referents lacking any specific<br />

class properties. These include real-world objects without discourse-established names (e.g., “this”<br />

in “What do you call this?”) and situati<strong>on</strong>s (e.g., “that” in “John didn’t come. Does that surprise<br />

you?”), as well as the de-adjectival c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> in (1):<br />

(1) a. ôkû-hlé ngó-thândò [Zulu]<br />

17-beautiful about:DET-11.love<br />

b. het mooie aan liefde [Dutch]<br />

DET.N beautiful about love<br />

‘what is beautiful about love’<br />

Sec<strong>on</strong>d are the expletive uses found in a wide range of c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s in Zulu and European languages,<br />

including clauses with ‘seem’-like verbs, impers<strong>on</strong>al passives, various inversi<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s, and<br />

existential c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s. (We follow Buell (2012) in assuming that Zulu class 17 is not locative in<br />

nature.) Most surprising is the third type, which involves the subject of nominal predicati<strong>on</strong>. Neutral<br />

agreement can be used with a subject of nominal predicati<strong>on</strong> (and of no other type of predicati<strong>on</strong>)<br />

even when referring to a human, as shown in Zulu in (2):<br />

(2) Ú-Sîphò kw-â-kú-ngù-ḿngànè wéthù.<br />

DET-1Sipho 17SM-PST-17SM-COP-1friend 1our<br />

‘Sipho was our friend.’<br />

The fact these grammatical functi<strong>on</strong>s cluster together cross-linguistically does not prevent the<br />

associated agreement class from also being used in additi<strong>on</strong>al, language-specific ways. For instance,<br />

neuter is used as a lexical class for nouns in German, but not in French, and Zulu arguably also has<br />

no class 17 nouns. Additi<strong>on</strong>ally, Zulu class 17 can be used as subject agreement for c<strong>on</strong>joined nouns<br />

of unlike classes, a usage unlike that of neuter in European languages.<br />

PS


High t<strong>on</strong>e spreading in four Sotho-Tswana varieties<br />

Denis Creissels, CNRS–DDL, denis.creissels@univ-ly<strong>on</strong>2.fr<br />

This paper examines c<strong>on</strong>trasts in the range of high t<strong>on</strong>e spreading in four Sotho-Tswana varieties:<br />

Southern Sotho – Letele (1955), Köhler (1956), Letšeng (1995), Pedi (alias Northern Sotho) –<br />

Lombard (1976), Zerbian & Barnard (2009), the Ngwaketse dialect of Tswana – Creissels (1998),<br />

Creissels & al. (2007), and the Kgatla dialect of Tswana as spoken in Mochudi (Botswana) – author’s<br />

field notes.<br />

Southern Sotho, Pedi and Ngwaketse have in comm<strong>on</strong> that, with just <strong>on</strong>e excepti<strong>on</strong> (the<br />

grammatical high t<strong>on</strong>e found in some verb tenses, such as the c<strong>on</strong>joint form of the perfect), they <strong>on</strong>ly<br />

have local t<strong>on</strong>e spreading. They differ in that, in Southern Sotho and Pedi, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is no spreading at<br />

word boundaries, and local spreading never affects more than <strong>on</strong>e syllable, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as in Ngwaketse,<br />

the initial syllable of a word may be affected by the spreading of a high t<strong>on</strong>e underlyingly bel<strong>on</strong>ging<br />

to the preceding word, and most word-internal spreading processes have a possible range of two<br />

syllables, as illustrated by the following example, in which the <strong>on</strong>ly underlying high t<strong>on</strong>es are those<br />

associated to the first syllable of the verb stem -kótul- and to the sec<strong>on</strong>d syllable of the noun stem<br />

-bɛlɛ́.<br />

(Southern Sotho) kɩ̀-kótúl-à mà-bɛ̀lɛ́ ‘I am harvesting sorghum.’<br />

(Ngwaketse) kɩ̀-kótúl-á má-bɛ̀lɛ́ same meaning<br />

1SG-harvest-FV CL6-sorghum<br />

The Kgatla dialect of Tswana sharply c<strong>on</strong>trasts with the other three varieties in that, in Kgatla, l<strong>on</strong>gdistance<br />

spreading is pervasive, as illustrated by the following example, in which the <strong>on</strong>ly underlying<br />

high t<strong>on</strong>es are those associated to the first syllable of the verb stem -bófʊlʊl- and to the sec<strong>on</strong>d<br />

syllable of the noun stem -qʰomʊ́).<br />

(Ngwaketse) kɩ̀-bófʊ́lʊ́l-ɛ̀l-à mʊ̀tʰìbì dì-qʰòmʊ́ ‘I am untying the cows for Mothibi’<br />

(Kgatla) kɩ̀-bófʊ́lʊ́l-ɛ́l-á mʊ́tʰíbí dí-qʰòmʊ́ same meaning<br />

1SG-untie-APPL-FV Mothibi CL10-cow<br />

The paper aims mainly to analyze the l<strong>on</strong>g-distance spreading processes of Kgatla and their possible<br />

relati<strong>on</strong>ship with the local spreading processes of other Sotho-Tswana varieties. The observati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

some limitati<strong>on</strong>s to high t<strong>on</strong>e spreading are particularly significant in this repect. For example, in<br />

Kgatla, in the c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong> illustrated by the following example, in which the underlying high t<strong>on</strong>es<br />

are those of the subject marker bá- and of the first syllable of tsʰímʊ, the last syllable of the verb<br />

preceding a noun whose first syllable bears a H t<strong>on</strong>e can be affected by the spreading of a preceding<br />

H t<strong>on</strong>e if and <strong>on</strong>ly if the distance between the last syllable of the verb and the syllable to which the<br />

high t<strong>on</strong>e underlyingly bel<strong>on</strong>gs does not exceed two syllables.<br />

(Kgatla) bá-lɩ́m-á tsʰímʊ̀ ‘They are ploughing the field.’<br />

CL2-plough-FV [CL9]field<br />

References<br />

bá-tɬʰáχʊ́l-à tsʰímʊ̀ ‘They are weeding the field.’<br />

CL2-weed-FV [CL9]field<br />

Creissels, D. 1998. ‘Expansi<strong>on</strong> and retracti<strong>on</strong> of high t<strong>on</strong>e domains in Setswana’. In L.M. Hyman &<br />

C.W. Kisseberth (eds.) Theoretical aspects of <strong>Bantu</strong> t<strong>on</strong>e. Stanford: CSLI Publicati<strong>on</strong>s. 133-194.<br />

Creissels, D., A.M. Chebanne and H.W. Nkhwa. 1997. T<strong>on</strong>al morphology of the Setswana verb. LINCOM<br />

Studies in African Linguistics.<br />

Letele, G.L., The Role of T<strong>on</strong>e in the Southern Sotho Language (Thesis presented for the Degree of Doctor<br />

of Philosophy in the University of L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>), Lovedale Press 1955.<br />

Letšeng, M. 1995. ‘La structure t<strong>on</strong>ale du verbe en sotho du sud’. Masters thesis. Grenoble: Université<br />

Stendhal.<br />

Köhler, O., ‘Das T<strong>on</strong>system des Verbum im Südsotho’, Mitteilungen des Instituts für Orientforschung, 4,<br />

1956, pp. 435-474.<br />

Lombard D.P., Aspekte van To<strong>on</strong> in Noord-Sotho, Thèse de doctorat, University of South Africa, 1976.<br />

Zerbian, S. and E. Barnard. 2009. ‘Realisati<strong>on</strong>s of a single high t<strong>on</strong>e in Northern Sotho’. Southern<br />

African Linguistics and Applied Language Studies 27(4). 357–379.<br />

PS


Sepitori: A Pretoria koiné language that could help revive interest in two <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages in South Africa<br />

Thabo Ditsele; Student registered for Doctor Technologiae: Language Practice at Tshwane University of<br />

Technology (TUT), Pretoria, South Africa; ditsele@hotmail.com<br />

Purpose:<br />

The Dutch arrived in Pretoria (South Africa’s capital city) in 1855 and started to build a city. Labour was<br />

provided by the local Setswana speakers who were later joined by speakers of a mutually intelligible<br />

language, Sepedi; the latter came from Limpopo province. Setswana and Sepedi are <strong>Bantu</strong> languages<br />

(BLs) and predominant and/or significant in six out of nine South Africa’s provinces.<br />

The purpose of this poster is to present evidence that Sepitori (Pretoria Sotho) – a n<strong>on</strong>-standard variety<br />

(NSV) that developed over time since 1855 – is not just a koiné, but a variety that has spread bey<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Pretoria, and could be used to strengthen the standard varieties (SVs) of its substrate, Setswana and<br />

superstrate, Sepedi. This is against the worrying trend that the use of BLs is declining; <strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>tributing<br />

factor being an increasing gap between the spoken and written varieties.<br />

Methods/Results:<br />

Sentences from recordings of first language Sepitori speakers are analysed al<strong>on</strong>gside Setswana and<br />

Sepedi and w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> warranted, against Afrikaans and English, which also influence(d) the koiné. English<br />

translati<strong>on</strong>s are given.<br />

Here is an example: (more sentences will be <strong>on</strong> the poster)<br />

Sepitori Ka mo itse dié man; o rata ho APARA setlhako se <strong>on</strong>e.<br />

Setswana Ke a mo itse m<strong>on</strong>na yo; o rata go rwala setlhako se le sengwe.<br />

Sepedi Ke a mo tseba m<strong>on</strong>na yo; o rata go APARA seeta se le tee.<br />

English I know this man; he likes to wear <strong>on</strong>e shoe.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>sistent with being a koiné, Sepitori’s grammar reflects that of Setswana and Sepedi. Significant parts<br />

of speech are highlighted using bold (Setswana), underlining (Afrikaans), UPPERCASING (Sepedi) and<br />

italics (English). On the poster, a further detailed analysis is provided, particularly w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> Sepitori follows<br />

either Setswana or Sepedi, and w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> the latter two have marked differences.<br />

The poster shows a map of South Africa with: (1) the area w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> the local Setswana speakers lived at<br />

before the Dutch arrived; (2) the route of the Dutch from Cape Town to Pretoria; (3) the route of Sepedi<br />

speakers from Limpopo to Pretoria; and (4) the current spread of Sepitori.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>clusi<strong>on</strong>:<br />

The following are not disputed: (1) NSVs have and c<strong>on</strong>tinue to influence SVs of BLs; and (2) the gap<br />

between the two varieties is so wide that people c<strong>on</strong>tinue – at a worrying rate – to lose interest in studying<br />

SV of BLs. These developments have the potential to see the <strong>on</strong>set of language attriti<strong>on</strong> in a few<br />

generati<strong>on</strong>s’ time. Comparatively, the gap between the two varieties of Germanic languages – English<br />

and Afrikaans – is much narrower. This is significant because the two are well developed and remain<br />

languages of prestige. Currently, language purists oppose suggesti<strong>on</strong>s that NSVs could and should be<br />

used to strengthen SVs of BLs, despite evidence that the use of the former is <strong>on</strong> the increase, while the<br />

latter is <strong>on</strong> a decrease. As a possible interventi<strong>on</strong> to revive interest in BLs, NSVs should be used to<br />

narrow the gap between what people ordinarily speak, and what they are taught in formal settings – like it<br />

is the case with English and Afrikaans. Sepitori could and should be used to revive interest in its<br />

substrate, Setswana and superstrate, Sepedi.<br />

References:<br />

[1] ALEXANDER, N. 1989. [2] BICKERTON, D. 1991. [3] CALTEAUX, K. 1996. [4] FINLAYSON, R.,<br />

CALTEAUX, K. & MYERS-SCOTTON, C. 1998. [5] SCHURING, G.K. 1985. [6] SIEGEL, J. 2005. [7]<br />

WEBB, V. 2010. [8] WEBB, V., LAFON, M. & PARE, P. 2010.<br />

PS


Modificati<strong>on</strong>s des courbes t<strong>on</strong>ales en akwá de la chans<strong>on</strong> de Kingoli<br />

Par<br />

Guy-Roger Cyriac Gombé-Ap<strong>on</strong>dza,<br />

Université Marien Ngouabi de Brazzaville<br />

Comme s<strong>on</strong> titre l’indique, le présent travail se propose d’analyser le f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong>nement des<br />

t<strong>on</strong>èmes en akwá chanté par Kingoli.<br />

Kingoli est un groupe tradi-moderne qui vit le jour dans les années 80. Il a la particularité<br />

d’avoir des chans<strong>on</strong>s c<strong>on</strong>stituées d’éléments aussi bien ph<strong>on</strong>iques que lexicaux de toutes les<br />

variétés dialectales de l’akwá (epéré, akwá mbangi, akwá bá ngo).<br />

L’akwá, quant à lui, est une langue bantu de la z<strong>on</strong>e C classée successivement par Guthrie<br />

[1953 :154], Obenga [1973 : 58] et Bastin [1978 : 123] dans le groupe C20. Il est localisé au<br />

nord du C<strong>on</strong>go Brazzaville, dans le département de la Cuvette, précisément dans la souspréfecture<br />

de Makoua et ses envir<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

Comme la quasi-totalité des parlers du groupe C20 ( le mboxo, le ngaré, le koyo, l’ɛmbɔsi, le<br />

likwala et le likuba), l’akwá dispose de deux t<strong>on</strong>èmes : l’un haut et l’autre bas.<br />

Exemple :<br />

pí "calme"/pi "sombre".<br />

Ces t<strong>on</strong>èmes peuvent se renc<strong>on</strong>trer et créer la fusi<strong>on</strong> au où ils seraient identiques ou des<br />

modulati<strong>on</strong>s qui peuvent être haut-bas ou bas-haut, au cas où ils seraient différents comme<br />

dans l’exemple ci-après :<br />

ikǎ "rivalité"<br />

mâ "maman".<br />

Il arrive, cependant, qu’il y ait des perturbati<strong>on</strong>s de courbes t<strong>on</strong>ales sous l’influence de la<br />

mélodie. C’est dans ce c<strong>on</strong>texte qu’un t<strong>on</strong>ème haut peut être réalisé :<br />

- Bas (exemple : nga au lieu de ngá "moi") ; 75 occurrences<br />

- Bas-haut (exemple : wâ au lieu de wá "lui" 22 occurrences<br />

De même, sous l’effet de la mélodie, un t<strong>on</strong>ème bas peut être réalisé :<br />

- Haut (exemple : móró au lieu de moro "pers<strong>on</strong>ne") 80 occurences<br />

- Haut-bas (otémâ au lieu de otéma) 17 occurrences.<br />

De notre corpus, il ressort le c<strong>on</strong>stat sel<strong>on</strong> lequel lorsqu’il est perturbé, le t<strong>on</strong>ème bas est,<br />

dans bien des cas, remplacé par le t<strong>on</strong>ème haut.<br />

PS


Malgré ces différents exemples, il y a, de manière générale, très peu d’exemples de<br />

perturbati<strong>on</strong>s t<strong>on</strong>ales c<strong>on</strong>firmant ainsi les propos de Louis-Jean Calvet [1981 : 28] sel<strong>on</strong><br />

lesquels "dans la renc<strong>on</strong>tre entre musique et langue que c<strong>on</strong>stitue la chans<strong>on</strong>, la musique ne<br />

va pas à l’enc<strong>on</strong>tre de la langue".<br />

PS


Informati<strong>on</strong>al Prominence in Kol<br />

B<strong>on</strong>nie Hens<strong>on</strong>, SIL <str<strong>on</strong>g>Internati<strong>on</strong>al</str<strong>on</strong>g>, b<strong>on</strong>nie_hens<strong>on</strong>@sil.org<br />

Informati<strong>on</strong>al prominence in Kol, a Narrow <strong>Bantu</strong> language of eastern Camero<strong>on</strong>, has yet to<br />

be researched. This paper will explore cleft c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s, questi<strong>on</strong> formati<strong>on</strong>, and other<br />

focus strategies, as well as their implicati<strong>on</strong>s from comparative and diachr<strong>on</strong>ic perspectives.<br />

(Interestingly, while neighboring related languages mark focus via a specific marker ó, the<br />

evidence for a cognate morpheme in Kol is inc<strong>on</strong>clusive.)<br />

A number of linguists since Schachter (1973) have noted that many languages exhibit similar<br />

morphosyntax in cleft c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s and relative clauses. Kol is an additi<strong>on</strong>al example of this<br />

cross-linguistic tendency, as can be seen by comparing the cleft in (1) with the relative clause<br />

in (2). Relative clauses in Kol are prototypically marked by a floating high (H) t<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong> the<br />

left boundary of the clause and the clitic =è <strong>on</strong> the right boundary.<br />

(1) kwàn bə́ ɲ=í bwɔ̀g=è.<br />

h<strong>on</strong>ey be+H he/she=PST1 harvest.h<strong>on</strong>ey= REL<br />

'It's h<strong>on</strong>ey he collected.'<br />

(2) bw-ân m=é jâmb bè-dób=è<br />

2-child H+ I-PST1 prepare 8-food=REL<br />

'The children that I prepared food for…."<br />

Questi<strong>on</strong> formati<strong>on</strong> offers evidence that this formal similarity has led to a reanalysis of<br />

relative clause morphology as focus morphology. Synchr<strong>on</strong>ically, Kol has two possibilities<br />

for questi<strong>on</strong>s: the questi<strong>on</strong> word or phrase may remain in situ as in (3) or it may appear<br />

sentence-initially as in (4). However, if it appears sentence-initially, presumably in a focus<br />

positi<strong>on</strong>, the questi<strong>on</strong> exhibits relative clause morphosyntax.<br />

(3) w=ú bì jwó w-ô mbì ?<br />

you=PST1 trap 9OBJ 3-which 3.type<br />

'How did you catch it?'<br />

(4) w-ô mbì w=ú bì jw=é ?<br />

3-which 3.type H+you=PST1 trap 9OBJ=REL<br />

'How did you catch it?'<br />

A presumable further extensi<strong>on</strong> has made relative clause formati<strong>on</strong> possible even when t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

is no evidence of movement of the questi<strong>on</strong> word as shown in (5).<br />

(5) ncî gò nc=ê?<br />

who PROG come=REL<br />

'Who is coming?'<br />

References:<br />

Schachter, Paul. 1973. Focus and Relativizati<strong>on</strong>. Language 49 (1):19-46.<br />

PS


A la recherche des voyelles finales perdues en ruwund L53.<br />

Résumé<br />

Par KASOMBO TSHIBANDA Michaël<br />

Université de Lubumbashi<br />

E-mail : michelkasombo@gmail.com<br />

Cette communicati<strong>on</strong> m<strong>on</strong>tre que l’absence généralisée des voyelles finales en ruwund<br />

(ruund L53, langue bantu de la R.D.C.) ne rem<strong>on</strong>te ni à l’ancêtre proche (protoruwund) ni à<br />

l’ancêtre lointain (protobantu). C’est le résultat d’une évoluti<strong>on</strong> de la langue originelle qui a<br />

perdu les voyelles finales comme en témoigne la langue moderne. Celle-ci se démarque tout<br />

au moins du protobantu d<strong>on</strong>t les rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s signalent des voyelles finales. Les études<br />

antérieures <strong>on</strong>t toujours insisté sur l’absence des voyelles finales en ruwund sans jamais tenter<br />

de rem<strong>on</strong>ter le cours de l’histoire : Stappers, L. (1954), Vincke, J.L. (1966), N’landu, N.<br />

(1986), Nash, J.A. (1992-1994). Les évidences de voyelles finales dans la langue ruwund<br />

originelle transparaissent dans les d<strong>on</strong>nées synchr<strong>on</strong>iques à deux niveaux. Au niveau<br />

segmental, outre la voyelle a nettement perçue, des vestiges des voyelles i et u finales existent<br />

alors que e et o, parmi les cinq voyelles attestées, semblent exclues dans cette positi<strong>on</strong> dans la<br />

langue tant originelle que moderne. Exemples :<br />

(1) * kúdíà (*- dia) → kúdâ ‘’manger’’, soit le maintien de la voyelle finale originelle<br />

dans la langue moderne, après élisi<strong>on</strong> de i du radical verbal ;<br />

(2) * ŋéndì (*- gèndì) → ŋênj ‘’un étranger’’ (de kwend ‘’voyager’’), soit une perte de i<br />

finale après palatalisati<strong>on</strong> de d) ;<br />

(3) * mpúkù (*- púkù-) → mpûkw ‘’rat’’, soit une dévocalisati<strong>on</strong> de u finale, articulée<br />

aujourd’hui comme une semi-voyelle w.<br />

Au niveau suprasegmental, la récurrence d’un t<strong>on</strong> complexe descendant en syllabe finale<br />

fermée de mots est une preuve du déplacement vers la gauche d’un t<strong>on</strong> bas ayant perdu s<strong>on</strong><br />

support vocalique et récupéré sur la syllabe précédente où il fusi<strong>on</strong>ne avec le t<strong>on</strong> initial. Ce<br />

t<strong>on</strong> bas flottant est vestige d’une voyelle v finale effacée mais qu’<strong>on</strong> peut ph<strong>on</strong>étiquement<br />

restaurer dans b<strong>on</strong> nombre de cas :<br />

(4) * díítámv4 (* - támà) → díítâm ‘’ la joue’’<br />

Une démarche à la fois diachr<strong>on</strong>ique, basée sur des d<strong>on</strong>nées synchr<strong>on</strong>iques internes à la<br />

langue, et dialectologique, prenant en compte des variantes dialectales de la langue, permet de<br />

vérifier cette hypothèse et d’ouvrir une nouvelle perspective dans l’approche de la chute des<br />

voyelles finales dans les langues du m<strong>on</strong>de.<br />

PS


<strong>Bantu</strong> grammatical descripti<strong>on</strong> from an insider’s point of view<br />

IM Kosch<br />

Department of African <strong>Languages</strong>, University of South Africa<br />

koschim@unisa.ac.za<br />

This paper aims to take a critical look at the grammatical descripti<strong>on</strong>s of <strong>Bantu</strong> languages<br />

from the time when these languages were first committed to writing, with particular<br />

reference to Northern Sotho (Sesotho sa Leboa). The 19 th century saw the emergence of<br />

a traditi<strong>on</strong> of grammatical descripti<strong>on</strong>s of the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, mainly inaugurated by<br />

missi<strong>on</strong>aries. Their groundbreaking work laid the foundati<strong>on</strong> for future grammatical<br />

descripti<strong>on</strong>s, but the questi<strong>on</strong> that needs to be answered is whether and to what extent<br />

their approaches have actually curtailed or promoted the grammatical descripti<strong>on</strong> of these<br />

languages. T<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are many indicati<strong>on</strong>s that they tried to fit these languages into the<br />

descriptive mould of the European languages. The distincti<strong>on</strong> of the grammatical<br />

category ‘case’ can be cited <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> as a short-lived attempt at making sense of the different<br />

usages of nouns in the nominative, genitive, dative or accusative case. It was so<strong>on</strong><br />

realised that the distincti<strong>on</strong> of cases was insignificant for the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, as nouns<br />

are not marked inflecti<strong>on</strong>ally in a similar way as, for example, in German. This<br />

c<strong>on</strong>ceptual grid was evidently alien to the grammatical analysis of the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages.<br />

The Eurocentric understanding of certain categories and phenomena distorted or obscured<br />

the linguistic facts of the languages. Van Wyk (1968:105) calls them “sins of projecti<strong>on</strong>”,<br />

but he affirms that they are a universal problem in linguistic methodology and not a<br />

weakness exclusive to the study of <strong>Bantu</strong> grammar.<br />

Over time, the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages increasingly became objects of scientific analysis and it<br />

became clear that grammatical descripti<strong>on</strong>s had to be d<strong>on</strong>e from an insider’s point of<br />

view to disperse some wr<strong>on</strong>g percepti<strong>on</strong>s. The paper intends to highlight some recent<br />

research findings that have led to a refinement of our understanding of certain<br />

phenomena. A case in point is the c<strong>on</strong>cept of pr<strong>on</strong>ominalisati<strong>on</strong>. Pr<strong>on</strong>ouns are<br />

traditi<strong>on</strong>ally said to substitute nouns (or word groups). In the <strong>Bantu</strong> languages, however,<br />

pr<strong>on</strong>ominalisati<strong>on</strong> is the result of the deleti<strong>on</strong> of a noun (or word group) to which the<br />

pr<strong>on</strong>oun refers. (Louwrens, 1981, 1985). Another example c<strong>on</strong>cerns the so-called<br />

‘imperfect tense morpheme’, which has err<strong>on</strong>eously been linked to ‘tense’. A study by<br />

Kosch (1988), however, dem<strong>on</strong>strates that it is actually a marker of discourse<br />

informati<strong>on</strong>, rather than a tense-marker.<br />

Kosch, IM. 1988. ‘Imperfect tense -a’ of Northern Sotho revisited. South African Journal<br />

of African <strong>Languages</strong> 8(1):1–6.<br />

Louwrens, LJ. 1981. ‘n Perspektief op Wilkes se delesiehipotese oor pr<strong>on</strong>ominalisasie in<br />

Bantoe. Studies in Bantoetale 8(1):36–57.<br />

Louwrens, LJ. 1985. C<strong>on</strong>trastiveness and the so-called absolute pr<strong>on</strong>oun in Northern<br />

Sotho. South African Journal of African <strong>Languages</strong> 5(2):58–61.<br />

Van Wyk, EB. 1968. Die invloed van die Europease tale en die Europese linguistiese<br />

tradisie op die studie van die Bantoetale. In: Cr<strong>on</strong>jé, G. (ed.), Kultuurbeïnvloeding<br />

tussen Blankes en Bantoe in Suid-Afrika. Pretoria: JL van Schaik Ltd.<br />

PS


NASALISATION DES VOYELLES EN MBOCHI (C25)<br />

Résumé<br />

Le travail de Nzete (1980) m<strong>on</strong>tre que les voyelles nasales s<strong>on</strong>t attestées dans le parler mbochi de<br />

bokwele. On y trouve de parfaites paires minimales: asá “champs” / ãsá “cultivateurs”. Nous en av<strong>on</strong>s<br />

aussi identifié dans le parler de b<strong>on</strong>yala. Notre étude se base sur un corpus de 410 mots recueillis dans<br />

14 parlers bantu des groupes C20 et C30. Ce corpus témoigne également de l’existence des voyelles<br />

nasalisées dans le parler de b<strong>on</strong>yala : ɔ̃kangá “racine”, ɔ̃ beesi, “preteur”, ãlóngó “sang”.<br />

Plusieurs études <strong>on</strong>t dégagé des universaux de la nasalisati<strong>on</strong> des voyelles dans les langues du<br />

m<strong>on</strong>de (Crothers 1978, Rhulen 1978, Maddies<strong>on</strong> 1984, Hombert 1986...). La présente étude se propose<br />

d’analyser le comportement des voyelles dans la langue mbochi en synchr<strong>on</strong>ie et d’étudier leur évoluti<strong>on</strong><br />

diachr<strong>on</strong>ique. Elle se propose de d<strong>on</strong>ner une explicati<strong>on</strong> diachr<strong>on</strong>ique à l’existence des voyelles nasales<br />

dans ces deux parlers. Elle met en parallèle les 14 parlers pour dém<strong>on</strong>trer que les voyelles nasales<br />

observées en mbochi s<strong>on</strong>t le résultat d’une chute systématique de la c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ne nasale du préfixe de classe.<br />

En mbochi les préfixes s<strong>on</strong>t de formes CV-. Quand le thème auquel ils s<strong>on</strong>t affixés commence par une<br />

c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ne, ces c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>nes préfixales tombent dans certains dialectes. Le parler moi et celui de b<strong>on</strong>yala<br />

(dans une moindre mesure) s<strong>on</strong>t les seuls sur cette liste à c<strong>on</strong>server cette c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ne. Quand il s’agit d’une<br />

nasale (classes 1, 3, 4 et 6), après sa chute, le trait [+nasal] se reassocie à la voyelle d<strong>on</strong>nant lieu aux<br />

voyelles nasalisées dans les parlers de Bokwele et de B<strong>on</strong>yala.<br />

Ce phénomène de réassociati<strong>on</strong> ne s’applique que sur ces deux parlers. Dans le reste des parlers<br />

ces voyelles c<strong>on</strong>servent leur trait [+oral]. La mise en paralèlle des mots des différents parlers nous<br />

permet de mieux observer cette évoluti<strong>on</strong> :<br />

moi bokwele boundji<br />

maloìngaì ~ ãlóngó ~ alóngó “sang”<br />

Quand le thème commence par une voyelle, le préfixe perd plutôt sa voyelle. Dans ce cas, même<br />

quand cette c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ne est nasale, sa nasalité ne se propage pas sur la voyelle du thème. Cela nous amène à<br />

prouver entre autres qu’il n’y a pas propagati<strong>on</strong> du trait [+nasal], d<strong>on</strong>c pas d’assimilati<strong>on</strong> regressive<br />

(Hyman 1972, Chen 1975) dans cette langue, mais plutôt refixati<strong>on</strong> dudit trait de la gauche vers la droite,<br />

assimilati<strong>on</strong> progressive (Hombert 1986).<br />

moi obaa b<strong>on</strong>yala boundji<br />

m-ína ~ m-ína ~ m-ína ~ mína “dents”<br />

PS


Typologie de la réduplicati<strong>on</strong> dans des langues bantu du C<strong>on</strong>go<br />

Abstract<br />

La réduplicati<strong>on</strong> a fait l’objet de plusieurs études sur les langues bantu (Odden & Odden 1985,<br />

1996; Kiyomi & Davis 1992; Mutaka & Hyman 1990 and Downing 1994, 1996, Laura Downing 1999 et<br />

2001). Très peu de travaux se s<strong>on</strong>t intéressés à ce phénomène dans les langues bantu du C<strong>on</strong>go.<br />

La présente étude analyse les différents types de réduplicati<strong>on</strong>s dans des langues bantu du<br />

C<strong>on</strong>go. Elle vise la propositi<strong>on</strong> d’une ébauche de typologie des différents changements qui découlent<br />

de la réduplicati<strong>on</strong>. Il se base sur les dicti<strong>on</strong>naires mbochi-français (SIL-C<strong>on</strong>go 2001), beembefrançais<br />

(SIL-C<strong>on</strong>go 2010), le manuscrit du dicti<strong>on</strong>naire teke-français, lingala bien d’autres manuels<br />

d’écriture et de lecture en langues c<strong>on</strong>golaises.<br />

Cette étude s’étend à la comparais<strong>on</strong> du phénomène de réduplicati<strong>on</strong> et ses c<strong>on</strong>séquences dans<br />

les langues bantu des groupes C20, C30, H10 et B70. Elle décrit ce phénomène et ses répercussi<strong>on</strong>s sur<br />

le plan ph<strong>on</strong>ique, morphologique et sémantique.<br />

Elle m<strong>on</strong>tre que dans tous les cas, la réduplicati<strong>on</strong> est progressive, elle se fait de la gauche vers<br />

la droite. Dans les parlers C20 et C30, le t<strong>on</strong> haut est l’élément obligatoire de la réduplicati<strong>on</strong>, il se<br />

réalise sur le segment rédupliqué. Il s’agit là d’une c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong> aux études existant sur l’implicati<strong>on</strong><br />

du t<strong>on</strong> dans la réduplicati<strong>on</strong> (Myers & Carlet<strong>on</strong> 1996, Mutaka & Hyman 1990, Walsh 1992…).<br />

Sel<strong>on</strong> les langues, les éléments réduplicables s<strong>on</strong>t : la première syllabe du mot (1 et 2), le<br />

thème (7) ou de tout le mot (6). Sur le plan sémantique, la réduplicati<strong>on</strong> de la syllabe entraîne<br />

généralement le sens « véritable… » (Intensif), celle du thème corresp<strong>on</strong>d au sens « faire sans<br />

méthode… » dans les parler H10 et C30, à « qui a subit… » dans les parlers C20, celle du mot renvoie à<br />

« véritable… » en B70, à « à la manière de… » en C20 et C30 et à « plusieurs fois… » La dérivati<strong>on</strong> qui<br />

en résulte se fait de nom à nom (1, 2, 3), de nom à adverbe de manière (6 et 3), de verbe à adjectif (7),<br />

de verbe à nom (5 et 8) et d’adjectif simple à adjectif intensifié (10).<br />

1. Mbochi (C20) : moro “pers<strong>on</strong>ne” > mó-moro “véritable pers<strong>on</strong>ne”<br />

2. Beembe (H10): bɔ́ɔmɔ́ “peur” > mu-bɔ́ -bɔɔmɔ “véritable peureux”<br />

3. Teke (B70) : mbuuru “pers<strong>on</strong>ne” > mbuuru-mbuuru “véritable pers<strong>on</strong>ne”<br />

4. Beembe (H10): butsúku “matin” > butsúku- butsúku “matinalement”<br />

5. Beembe (H10): kudyaata “marcher” > ma-dyaata-dyaata “fait de marcher sans méthode”<br />

6. Mbochi (C20) : abɔ́ɔ “mains” > abɔ́ɔ- abɔ́ɔ “à l’uniss<strong>on</strong>, ensemble”<br />

7. Mbochi (C20) : idima “s’éteindre”> idimá - dima “éteint”<br />

8. Lingala (C30) : koláta “porter” > bi-láta-láta “fait de porter sans méthode”<br />

9. Lingala (C30) : mabé “mauvais” > mabé- mabé “très mauvais”<br />

10. Mbochi (C20) : obé “mauvais” > obé- obé “très mauvais”<br />

PS


Abstract : Arguments for a Desemanticizati<strong>on</strong> of Verbs into Future Tense Markers in<br />

some <strong>Bantu</strong> Langauges<br />

According to Bybee (1994), desemanticiati<strong>on</strong> theory begins with the observati<strong>on</strong> that<br />

grammatical morphemes develop gradually out of lexical morphemes or combinati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

lexical morphemes. Thus, the source meaning of lexical morphemes determines the<br />

grammaticalizati<strong>on</strong> path that the grammatical morpheme will travel in its semantic<br />

development. C<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s involving movement verbs for example are found to be the<br />

sources of markers not <strong>on</strong>ly of future, but also of past and progressive.<br />

In this paper, we go bey<strong>on</strong>g the listing of the grammatical morphemes which the verb « go »<br />

could evolve into to argue that future markers in some <strong>Bantu</strong> languages of Camero<strong>on</strong> evolved<br />

from c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s which signal movement towards a goal which requires that the verb stem<br />

bears appropriate tense and directi<strong>on</strong>al marking. We go further to dem<strong>on</strong>strate that in these<br />

languages a lexical morpheme that often occurs in an envir<strong>on</strong>ment in which a certain<br />

inference is made can come to be associated with that inference to such an extent that the<br />

inference becomes part of the explicit meaning of the grammatical morpheme. In this light,<br />

five verbs namely the verb “to go”, “to do”, “to sleep”, “to stay/remain”, and “to last” with the<br />

evoluti<strong>on</strong> of the language have gradually underg<strong>on</strong>e the process of desemantizati<strong>on</strong>; that is in<br />

additi<strong>on</strong> to their lexical meaning, they have received a grammatical functi<strong>on</strong> and have<br />

eventually developed into a grammatical morpheme. Based <strong>on</strong> the source determinati<strong>on</strong><br />

hypothesis, we advocate that the development of future markers in these languages is<br />

characterized by the dynamic coevoluti<strong>on</strong> of meaning and form.<br />

References<br />

- Bybee, Joan L., Revere P., William P. (1994). The Evoluti<strong>on</strong> of Grammar: tense, aspect and<br />

modality in the languages of the world. The University of Chicago Press. U.S.A.<br />

- Pius Tamanji (2010). Variati<strong>on</strong> Theory: Grammaticalizati<strong>on</strong> of African languages. Course<br />

taught to Master students. Department of African <strong>Languages</strong> and Linguistics, University of<br />

Yaounde I, Camero<strong>on</strong>.<br />

PS


L’applicatif en kik<strong>on</strong>go véhiculaire (H10A) et en civili (H12): c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s, f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong>s discursives et variati<strong>on</strong> diatopique<br />

Par Guy N’DOULI (Université Libre de Bruxelles, ULB)<br />

gndouli@ulb.ac.be<br />

Le kik<strong>on</strong>go véhiculaire est un parler classifié par Maho en H10A . Il est pratiqué en République du C<strong>on</strong>go (C<strong>on</strong>go‐Brazzaville), en RD<br />

C<strong>on</strong>go et en Angola respectivement sel<strong>on</strong> les gloss<strong>on</strong>ymes suivants: kituba / munukutuba; kik<strong>on</strong>go ya léta / m<strong>on</strong>okotuba et<br />

kik<strong>on</strong>go. Le civili, fiote, fiot ou kivili est une langue bantoue vernaculaire classée en H12 par Guthrie. Des études descriptives<br />

menées sur ces deux langues ( Fehderau 1962, Lumwamu 1973), pour le kik<strong>on</strong>go véhiculaire; (Ndamba 1977), pour le civili, <strong>on</strong>t<br />

menti<strong>on</strong>né l’applicatif essentiellement comme morphème de dérivati<strong>on</strong>. Le reflexe du suffixe applicatif Proto‐<strong>Bantu</strong> *‐ıd‐<br />

(Meeussen, 1967), rec<strong>on</strong>struit en Proto‐Niger‐C<strong>on</strong>go (Voeltz, 1977), doit avoir plusieurs f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong>s syntaxiques : bénéfactif ><br />

maléfactif > instrument > locatif > prépositi<strong>on</strong>nel > directif > cause ou rais<strong>on</strong> (Schadeberg 2003 : 74). En Angola, il est représenté<br />

par «‐il‐» ou «‐el‐». Mbiavanga (2008 : 337). Notre étude c<strong>on</strong>cerne les variantes kik<strong>on</strong>go véhiculaire de Pointe‐Noire, de Boma et<br />

du Bandundu tout autant que le civili de Pointe‐Noire.<br />

Objectifs : Cette recherche vise les objectifs ci‐après: 1) Déceler les différents rôles sémantiques qu’assigne l’extensi<strong>on</strong> à s<strong>on</strong><br />

objet. 2. Paramétrer les c<strong>on</strong>textes de promoti<strong>on</strong> d’un argument périphérique au statut d’objet 3) Esquisser une sous‐classificati<strong>on</strong><br />

et établir une répartiti<strong>on</strong> spatiale des différentes variantes du kik<strong>on</strong>go‐véhiculaire aussi bien en f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong> de la réalisati<strong>on</strong> dudit<br />

morphème que de s<strong>on</strong> emploi ; sachant que *el‐ rec<strong>on</strong>struit par Schadeberg (2003: 71‐89) n’est plus assez productif.<br />

Résultats préliminaires :<br />

Pour des rais<strong>on</strong>s d’espace, nous présent<strong>on</strong>s ici la c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> du bénéfactif et les problématiques scientifiques soulevées.<br />

1) Bénéfactif (en kik<strong>on</strong>go véhiculaire de Pointe‐Noire « kituba » et en civili de Pointe‐Noire)<br />

(a) kituba (Pointe‐Noire) (b)kituba<br />

Lemvuk‐a samu na munu Lemvuk‐il‐a munu<br />

Pard<strong>on</strong>ner‐FV pour de moi Pard<strong>on</strong>ner‐APPL‐FV O1<br />

Pard<strong>on</strong>ne‐moi.<br />

(c) civili (d)civili<br />

Lémvùk‐à mù cí‐bìlà cí‐áàmì Ndemvukila<br />

pard<strong>on</strong>ner‐FV Pour 7‐compte 7‐POSS N‐lemvuk‐il‐a<br />

pard<strong>on</strong>ner‐FV pour compte m<strong>on</strong> O1‐Pard<strong>on</strong>ner‐APPL‐FV<br />

Pard<strong>on</strong>ne‐moi. Pard<strong>on</strong>ne‐moi<br />

(e) kituba (Pointe‐Noire) (f)kituba<br />

Mu‐ana me‐yidik‐a inzo samu na ndeke Mu‐ana me‐yidik‐il‐a ndeke inzo<br />

1‐enfant PRF‐fabriquer‐FV 9‐mais<strong>on</strong> pour de 9‐oiseau 1‐enfant PRF‐fabriquer‐FV 9‐oiseau 9‐mais<strong>on</strong><br />

L’enfant a fabriqué un nid pour le compte de l’oiseau L’enfant a fabriqué un nid pour l’oiseau<br />

(g) civili<br />

Mú‐áànà ù‐à‐váng‐a lí‐áànzì mù cíbìlà cìnúnì<br />

1‐enfant PV1 –PRF‐fabriquer‐FV 5‐nid pour 5‐compte 5‐oiseau<br />

L’enfant a fabriqué un nid pour l’oiseau<br />

(h) civili<br />

Mú‐áànà ù‐à‐váng‐íl‐a núnì lí‐áànzì<br />

1‐enfant PV1 –PRF‐fabriquer‐APPL‐FV ø9a‐oiseau 5‐nid<br />

L’enfant a fabriqué un nid pour l’oiseau<br />

En 1(a+b) nous av<strong>on</strong>s des én<strong>on</strong>cés à l’impératif. En kituba (1a) le pr<strong>on</strong>om « munu » est relié au verbe par le biais de la locuti<strong>on</strong><br />

prépositi<strong>on</strong>nel « samu na », il fait f<strong>on</strong>cti<strong>on</strong> d’argument oblique ; alors qu’en 1b « munu » est promu au rang d’objet et, suit<br />

immédiatement le verbe (VO). Il se produit exactement la même chose en 1c où la locuti<strong>on</strong> prépositi<strong>on</strong>nel « mù cíbìlà» fait le<br />

lien entre le verbe et l’argument périphérique « cíáàmì» qui, en 1d est promu au statut d’objet. Dans ce cas (impératif), l’accord du<br />

verbe se fait avec l’objet promu «N‐» antéposé au verbe (1d) (OV). Les c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s à deux objets (1e+f+g+h) observent la<br />

hiérarchie entre animé « ndeke », «núnì » et inanimé «lí‐áànzì », « inzo ». En 1e l’objet « inzo » suit immédiatement le verbe et<br />

l’argument oblique « ndeke » est rattaché au groupe verbal par la locuti<strong>on</strong> prépositi<strong>on</strong>nel « samu na ». En 1g, « mù cíbìlà » établit<br />

le lien entre l’objet direct «lí‐áànzì » et l’argument oblique «núnì ». En (1f+h), les arguments obliques « ndeke » et «núnì » s<strong>on</strong>t<br />

élevés au rang d’objet et précèdent immédiatement le verbe au détriment des objets «lí‐áànzì » et « inzo » qui s<strong>on</strong>t placés après.<br />

Avec le changement des rôles syntaxiques, il se pose des problèmes également d’accords –que nous développer<strong>on</strong>s lors de notre<br />

présentati<strong>on</strong>. Les exemples tirés des variantes de Bandundu et de Boma ser<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>fr<strong>on</strong>tés à ceux‐ci pour déterminer les variati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Résultats attendus et méthodologie<br />

À la suite de l’identificati<strong>on</strong> des c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s de l’applicatif, une étude plus fine aux niveaux morphosyntaxique et discursif est utile<br />

pour paramétrer les différents usages. Ainsi, chercher<strong>on</strong>s‐nous à vérifier l’hypothèse suivante : « Les applicatifs […] permettent de<br />

promouvoir au statut d’objet un terme qui, en l’absence de dérivati<strong>on</strong> applicative, pourrait figurer comme terme oblique »<br />

(Creissels 2006, Tome 2 : 73). Le corpus est c<strong>on</strong>stitué des c<strong>on</strong>tes que nous av<strong>on</strong>s recueillis lors de nos premières missi<strong>on</strong>s de<br />

terrain, des transcripti<strong>on</strong>s des journaux radio, de textes religieux (la bible en kituba), des c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>s officielles scannées.<br />

Références bibliographiques<br />

1. Creissels D. 2006. Syntaxe générale, une introducti<strong>on</strong> typologique 2 : la phrase, Lavoisier, Paris.<br />

2. Fehderau H. W. 1962. Descriptive grammar of kituba language, a dialectal survey. (P. C. Eds.) Leopoldville.<br />

3. Lumwamu F. 1985. Recherches sur la koine k<strong>on</strong>go. Paris: Thèse de Doctorat d’Etat, Université Paris IV Sorb<strong>on</strong>ne.<br />

4. Matsinhe & Mbiavanga, 2008, A preliminary explorati<strong>on</strong> of verbal affix ordering in kik<strong>on</strong>go, a <strong>Bantu</strong> language of Angola,<br />

Mortimer House, Language Matters 39 (2),PP. 332‐358, Routledge, L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>.<br />

5. Meeussen AE. 1967. <strong>Bantu</strong> grammatical rec<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s. Africana Linguistica 3: 79‐121.<br />

6. Ndamba J. 1977. Syntagme nominal et groupe nominal en vili. Paris : Université Paris III, Nouvelle Sorb<strong>on</strong>ne.<br />

7. Schadeberg T. C., 2003, Derivati<strong>on</strong>. IN N. Derek, & P. Gérard (Eds.), The <strong>Bantu</strong> Languagues (pp. 71‐89) L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong> and New<br />

York: Routledge.<br />

8. Voeltz EFK. 1977. Focus in Aghem: A study of its formal correlates and typology. In Hyman LM (ed.) Aghem grammatical<br />

structure. Los Angeles: Department of Linguistics, University of Southern California, pp. 137‐197.<br />

PS


Noun class frequency across text genres in Bakola. What implicati<strong>on</strong> from a cultural<br />

linguistics point of view?<br />

(Emmanuel NGUE UM - University of Yaoundé I)<br />

Noun categorizati<strong>on</strong> seems to be <strong>on</strong>e of the most appealing features across bantu languages<br />

from a descriptivist point of view. For this reas<strong>on</strong>, it has also been <strong>on</strong>e of the most explored<br />

aspects, both as a grammatical and as a semantic phenomen<strong>on</strong>. W<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as the morphological<br />

features which underlie noun classificati<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong> languages are somehow a you-know-itwhen-you-see-it<br />

phenomen<strong>on</strong>, and thus subject very scarcely to any reputable c<strong>on</strong>troversy, the<br />

semantic face of noun classificati<strong>on</strong> is a questi<strong>on</strong> yet to receive a definitive answer (C<strong>on</strong>tini<br />

Morava 1997, Katamba, 2003, Amidu, 2007). Many scholarly works have sought to uncover<br />

the “real” meaning behind noun classificati<strong>on</strong> ever since the early works <strong>on</strong> <strong>Bantu</strong> noun<br />

classificati<strong>on</strong> (Richards<strong>on</strong>, 1967; Deny and Creider, 1976), most of which are mostly<br />

grounded <strong>on</strong> qualitative and historical oriented methodologies, such as inducti<strong>on</strong> or the<br />

recovery of an ancestral system of noun classificati<strong>on</strong> which would expectedly yield a<br />

transparent meaningful system (Herbert, 1985). So far, <strong>on</strong>ly a few research works have<br />

addressed the issue drawing from quantitative analysis. One of such attempts is C<strong>on</strong>tini<br />

Morava’s database of Swahili which comprises a compilati<strong>on</strong> of existing dicti<strong>on</strong>aries and<br />

discourse data. The purpose of this paper is to go bey<strong>on</strong>d Morava’s attempt, by applying a<br />

quantitative approach to noun categorizati<strong>on</strong> in a <strong>Bantu</strong> language whose empirical resource<br />

will be a purely discourse data. More precisely, the research will address noun class frequency<br />

across text genres in Bakola, a <strong>Bantu</strong> A language spoken by hunter-gat<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>rs in the southern<br />

regi<strong>on</strong> of Cameroun. The relative frequency of noun class from <strong>on</strong>e genre to another is<br />

expected, from a cultural linguistics perspective, to shed more light <strong>on</strong> how cognitive schemas<br />

and categories embedded in noun classificati<strong>on</strong> are related to the cultural life of the<br />

community. According to Palmer 1996, Palmer & Sharifan 2007, cultural linguistics draws <strong>on</strong><br />

cognitive anthropology and cognitive linguistics to explore the relati<strong>on</strong>ship between language,<br />

culture, and c<strong>on</strong>ceptualizati<strong>on</strong>. The analysis will be based <strong>on</strong> an oral corpora collected within<br />

the framework of a documentati<strong>on</strong> project. Fifteen hours of oral texts which have been<br />

transcribed ph<strong>on</strong>etically will be added tagging <strong>on</strong> every single noun to allow for automatic<br />

scanning and extracti<strong>on</strong> using ELAN. The statistics provided after an extracti<strong>on</strong> process<br />

within a given genre will be the empirical basis for a culturally oriented analysis.<br />

References<br />

Amidu, A. A. Semantic Assignment Rules in <strong>Bantu</strong> Classes. Köln: Rüdiger Köppe Verlag.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>tini-Morava, E. (1997). “Noun Classificati<strong>on</strong> in Swahili: A cognitive-semantic analysis<br />

using a computer database in Herbet, R. K. African Linguistics at the Crossroads. Köln:<br />

Rüdiger Köppe Verlag, p. 599-628.<br />

Denny, J. P. & C. Creider (1976) “The semantic of noun classes in Proto <strong>Bantu</strong>”. Studies in<br />

African Linguistics, 7, p. 1-30.<br />

Herbert, R. K. (1985). Gender systems and semanticity: two ccase histories from <strong>Bantu</strong>. In<br />

Fisiak, J. (ed), Historical Semantics/Historical Word-Formati<strong>on</strong>, p. 171-197. Berlin:<br />

Mout<strong>on</strong> de Gruyter.<br />

Katamba, F. (2003) “<strong>Bantu</strong> nominal morphology” in Nurse, D. And Philipps<strong>on</strong>, G. The <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

<strong>Languages</strong>. L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>: Routledge, p. 103-120.<br />

Palmer, G.B. (1996). Toward a Theory of Cultural Linguistics. Austin : University of Texas<br />

Press.<br />

Palmer, G.B. & Sharifian, F. (2007). “Applied Cultural Linguistics. An Emerging Paradigm”.<br />

In Sharifian, F. and Palmer, G.B (eds). Applied Cultural Linguistics, 1-14.<br />

Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins Publishing Company.<br />

Richards<strong>on</strong>, I. (1967). “Linguistic evoluti<strong>on</strong> and <strong>Bantu</strong> noun class systems. La classificati<strong>on</strong><br />

nominale dans les langues Négro-Africaines, p. 373-390. Paris: CNRS.<br />

PS


Noun Phrase Structure in Shimwela<br />

Julius John Taji<br />

Department of Foreign <strong>Languages</strong> & Linguistics<br />

University of Dar es Salaam, Tanzania<br />

juliustaji@gmail.com<br />

This paper employs the c<strong>on</strong>cept of word order to analyze the structure of noun phrases in<br />

Shimwela, a <strong>Bantu</strong> language spoken in Lindi regi<strong>on</strong>, Tanzania. The language is classified by<br />

Guthrie (1948) as P. 22 and is also referred to as Kimwera (Nyagali, 1990), or Mwera (Johns<strong>on</strong><br />

1919; Guthrie, op. cit; LoT, 2009). Data for the paper were collected through questi<strong>on</strong>naires,<br />

focus group discussi<strong>on</strong>s, unstructured interviews and documentary reviews. The sample, which<br />

was deliberately selected, c<strong>on</strong>stituted four informants who were competent in Shimwela. The<br />

collected data were then analyzed by using a thematic analysis approach w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>by major c<strong>on</strong>cepts<br />

of the study were obtained and described.<br />

The findings show that several elements may be stacked in a Shimwela NP. Some of these<br />

occupy fixed positi<strong>on</strong>s while others are flexible. Elements which occupy fixed positi<strong>on</strong>s include<br />

dem<strong>on</strong>stratives, distributives, possessives, intensifiers, and interrogatives. The dem<strong>on</strong>stratives<br />

and the distributives strictly occur at the pre-head positi<strong>on</strong>, while the possessives occur<br />

immediately after the head noun. Also, the intensifiers occur after the adjectives they intensify,<br />

while the interrogatives and parts of the dem<strong>on</strong>stratives occur at the end of NP. Elements which<br />

are flexible include numerals, quantifiers, adjectives, relative c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s and associative<br />

c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s. These may exchange positi<strong>on</strong>s in the slot between the possessive and the<br />

dem<strong>on</strong>strative particle or interrogative.<br />

Finally, the findings reveal that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is a limit in the stacking of dependents in a Shimwela NP.<br />

The highest limit of dependents in Shimwela NP is six but in ordinary speech the normal load<br />

seems to be four, with dem<strong>on</strong>stratives and possessives appearing as the most frequently<br />

occurring dependents.<br />

PS


Parameterising Case: other evidence from <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

Jenneke van der Wal, University of Cambridge<br />

Nouns in <strong>Bantu</strong> do not show any case marking like in German or Latin. However, having no mor‐<br />

phological marking does not entail that <strong>Bantu</strong> languages do not have abstract Case at all.<br />

W<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as Diercks (2012) explicitly proposes that <strong>Bantu</strong> languages do not have abstract Case fea‐<br />

tures, I show in this presentati<strong>on</strong> that Case surprisingly does play a role in some languages,<br />

t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>by supporting the thesis that Case is parameterised.<br />

In his (2012) article ‘Parameterizing Case: evidence from <strong>Bantu</strong>’, Diercks shows that a uni‐<br />

formly applying theory of abstract Case –a fundamental comp<strong>on</strong>ent of the Principles and Pa‐<br />

rameters framework‐ is not supported by data from <strong>Bantu</strong> languages. He proposes that Case<br />

is subject to parameterisati<strong>on</strong>: some languages have Case, and others do not. Specifically,<br />

“<strong>Bantu</strong> languages do not have uninterpretable Case features in their feature inventories”.<br />

Part of the evidence for this claim is found in locative inversi<strong>on</strong>. When the verb agrees<br />

with a preverbal locative, like ‘(at) the river’ in (2), the questi<strong>on</strong> is how the postverbal subject<br />

(‘seven cows’) gets Case, assuming that agreement is linked to Case. Although several analyses<br />

have been proposed (e.g. Carstens 2005), the most straightforward analysis is that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

simply aren’t any uninterpretable Case features to be checked.<br />

(2) Pho muho‐ni pha‐tuluka ng'ombe sabaa za ku‐n<strong>on</strong>a.<br />

16.DEM river‐LOC 16SM.PST‐emerge 10.cows seven of INF‐be.fat<br />

‘From the river emerged seven fat cows.’ Digo (Diercks 2012)<br />

However, in this presentati<strong>on</strong> I present clear counterexamples to Diercks’ claim. If Case does<br />

play a role in the grammar, we expect verb agreement with the (nominative) subject irrespec‐<br />

tive of its positi<strong>on</strong> in the sentence. This is exactly the case in languages with Agreeing Subject<br />

Inversi<strong>on</strong>, w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> the verb agrees with the post‐verbal subject (3).<br />

(3) Ju‐híkití Marî:a.<br />

1SM‐arrive.PERF 1.Maria<br />

‘Mariahascome’ Matengo (Y<strong>on</strong>eda 2011)<br />

Furthermore, we expect subjects of infinitival clauses to be ungrammatical, as new data in<br />

(4a) c<strong>on</strong>firm. Instead, the “subject” must be object marked <strong>on</strong> the main clause verb (4b).<br />

(4) a. * ki‐m‐pheela namarokolo okhuma ‐OM<br />

1SG.SM‐PRES.CJ‐want 1.Hare<br />

‘I want Hare to leave’<br />

INF.exit<br />

b. mwi‐ni‐m‐pheela namarokolo okhuma? +OM<br />

2PL.SM‐PRES.CJ‐1OM‐want 1.Hare INF.exit<br />

‘do you want Hare to leave?’ Makhuwa<br />

After presenting evidence that abstract Case plays a role in languages with Agreeing Subject<br />

Inversi<strong>on</strong>, I will discuss the c<strong>on</strong>sequences for this parameterisati<strong>on</strong> within the <strong>Bantu</strong> lan‐<br />

guages. Building <strong>on</strong> Carstens (2005) and Baker (2008), I reassess the interacti<strong>on</strong> between<br />

agreement, Case and positi<strong>on</strong>, showing that the languages with Agreeing Inversi<strong>on</strong> do not<br />

form a uniform group either: agreement is linked to Case, but t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is interesting parametric<br />

variati<strong>on</strong> with respect to the link between agreement and movement (Makhuwa vs Matengo).<br />

In sum, the sensitivity to Case may be unexpected from the perspective of <strong>Bantu</strong> lan‐<br />

guages Diercks describes, but postulating a Case Parameter does predict such variati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Diercks, M. 2012. Parameterizing Case: Evidence from <strong>Bantu</strong>. Syntax 15:3.<br />

PS


Dialectal Variati<strong>on</strong>s in Limbum.<br />

Limbum as an Eastern Grass-fields <strong>Bantu</strong> language is made up of three significant dialects<br />

labeled as North, Central, and SouthLimbum. The differences between Limbum dialects are<br />

ph<strong>on</strong>ological. Although many languages are spoken in the area, the dialectal differences are<br />

due to influences from two neighboring languages. To the north, Limbum has been<br />

influenced by Mbembe w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as to the South, Limbum has been influenced by Lamnso. The<br />

central dialect which has been selected as the standard variety by Wimbum Literacy<br />

Associati<strong>on</strong>(WILA) has been more stable. In this paper, we will discuss the prosodic features<br />

that characterize the two dialects of North and the South Limbum. Special attenti<strong>on</strong> will be<br />

paid <strong>on</strong> the influence of Mbembe as it is a n<strong>on</strong>-<strong>Bantu</strong> language. Since details of language<br />

prosody depend <strong>on</strong> ph<strong>on</strong>ology, it will be interesting to see that ph<strong>on</strong>emically, we have<br />

switches between Mbembe and Limbum c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants and <strong>on</strong>e vowel shift instead of syllable<br />

or vowel length. Since t<strong>on</strong>es are <strong>on</strong> the vowels and the prosodic pitch doesn’t have to obscure<br />

the t<strong>on</strong>es, how the c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant changes create a prosodic effect is the questi<strong>on</strong> that we will<br />

attempt to answer.<br />

In order to have a clear view of the dialectal differences between the two Limbumdialects<br />

that have resulted through the influence of neighboring languages, we will first of all show<br />

how the central and the northern dialects are ph<strong>on</strong>emically similar when c<strong>on</strong>trasted with the<br />

way the ph<strong>on</strong>emes are realized in the South dialect. Further, we will c<strong>on</strong>trast other ph<strong>on</strong>emes<br />

of the three dialects in order to show the realizati<strong>on</strong>Mbembeph<strong>on</strong>emes vis-à-vis central and<br />

south Limbum.<br />

The influence of Lamnso <strong>on</strong> south Limbum is characterized by fricativizati<strong>on</strong>, palatalizati<strong>on</strong>,<br />

labializati<strong>on</strong>, nasalizati<strong>on</strong> of c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants and some vowel shifts:As far as fricativizati<strong>on</strong> is<br />

c<strong>on</strong>cerned, the affricate /tʃ/ as is with the central and Northdialect is realized as a fricative /ʃ/<br />

in the South dialectas in the following:<br />

Central Dialect Northern Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

ncìi /ntʃì:/ ncìi /ntʃì:/ nshìi /nʃì:/ beads<br />

cu / tʃū/ cu / tʃū/ shu / ʃū/ sit<br />

cɛʼ / tʃɛ̀ʔ/ cɛʼ / tʃɛ̀ʔ/ shɛʼ / ʃɛ̀ʔ/ cloth<br />

ca / tʃá/ ca / tʃá/ sha / ʃá/ this<br />

It is with taking note of the fact that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is neither a t<strong>on</strong>e change, stress nor any influence of<br />

the fricatives <strong>on</strong> the following vowel.<br />

The <strong>on</strong>ly area w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is a remarkable change in the stress pattern is when /b/with<br />

followed by/ i/ is palatalized in Southern Limbum as can be seen in the following examples.<br />

Central Dialect Northern Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

bii / bī:/ bii / bī:/ jwii / ʤwī:/ dance<br />

rbì / ɾbì/ rbì / ɾbì/ rjwè / ɾʤwè/ cola nut<br />

As seen above, the bilabial is maintained through a change from /b/ to the semi-vowel /w/.<br />

Further investigati<strong>on</strong>s may be needed to see if Lamnso bilabials are realized with a<br />

combinati<strong>on</strong> of a palatal, semi-vowels in some envir<strong>on</strong>ments w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> / i/ is found. :<br />

PS


Another instance of palatlizati<strong>on</strong> can be seen in southern Limbum when the velar /g/<br />

followed by /i/is relized as /dz/ as in the example below<br />

Central Dialect Northern Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

ŋgìʼ / ŋgìʔ/ ŋgìʼ / ŋgìʔ/ ndzɛ̀ʼ /ndzɛ̀ʔ/ pumpkin seeds<br />

In other instances, the /i/<strong>on</strong>ly triggers the inserti<strong>on</strong> of the palatal fricative /z/as in:<br />

Central Dialect Northern Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

mdip / mdīp/ mdip / mdīp/ mdzɛp / mdzɛ̄ p/ water<br />

mbii / mbī:/ mbii / mbī:/ mbzee / mbzē:/ palm nuts<br />

It is also important to note that <strong>on</strong>ly the /i/in a m<strong>on</strong>osyllabic word triggers this shift from<br />

velar to palatal ph<strong>on</strong>emes. We can also see <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> that t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> are vowel shifts from high to low.<br />

The fricative /z/ is a loan c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant as the Northern and Central Limbum do not make use of<br />

it anyw<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>. All the three dialects make use /ʒ/ which is realized orthographically as ʼzhʼ.<br />

With labializati<strong>on</strong>, northern and central Limbum semi-vowel palatal /j/is realized in southern<br />

Limbum as a semi-vowel bilabial /w/ as in the examples that follow.<br />

Central Dialect Northern Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

fyɛp / fjɛ́p/ fyɛp / fjɛ́p/ shwɛp /ʃwɛ́p/ blow<br />

fyɛ̀pte / fjɛ̀ptē/ fyɛ̀pte / fjɛ̀ptē/ shwɛ̀pte/ʃwɛ́ptē/ deflate<br />

fyɛpshi / fjɛ́pʃī/ fyɛpshi / fjɛ́pʃī/ shwɛpsi/ʃwɛ́psī/ blow<br />

fyèni / fjèni/ fyèni / fjèni/ shwèni /ʃwɛ̀nī/ sell<br />

This bilabial realizati<strong>on</strong> of a palatal can <strong>on</strong>ly be seen when the palatal is preceded by labial<br />

fricative /f/. Franzen (1995) noticed that in the Southern Limbum, labializati<strong>on</strong> takes place<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly in the case of palatalized /f/w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as in the case of palatalized /b/and /m/the palatal semivowel<br />

/j/is found,<br />

With nasalizati<strong>on</strong>, the palatal /ɲ/ is realized in Southern Limbum as the alveola /n/ as in the<br />

following:<br />

Central Dialect Northern Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

nyʉ̀ʉ / ɲɨ̀:/ nyùu / ɲù:/ nʉ̀ʉ / nɨ̀:/ sun<br />

nyʉʉ / ɲɨ̄:/ nyuu / ɲū:/ nʉ̀ʉ / nɨ̄:/ bees<br />

We notice <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> that the nasal is depalatalized in Southern Limbum w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>as Northern and<br />

Central Limbum maintain the palatal nasal in all envir<strong>on</strong>ments w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> it is found. The vowel<br />

shift in Northern Limbumas canbe seen <str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is the single vowel difference between Southern<br />

and Northern Limbum. See more examples below.<br />

Ph<strong>on</strong>emicdifferences between Northernand the Southern and Central Limbum can be seen<br />

through processes of glotalizati<strong>on</strong>,velarizati<strong>on</strong>andlibializati<strong>on</strong>. This takes place with many<br />

c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant. The <strong>on</strong>ly vowel shift is with the back high vowels from /ɨ/to /u/as we have<br />

observed above.<br />

PS


Labial /f/ can be glotalized in Northern Limbum as can be observed through the following:<br />

Northern Dialect Central Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

ha /há/ fa/fá/ fa/fa/ give<br />

àhaa /àhá:/ àfaa/àfá:/ àfaa/afa:/ in this are<br />

The alveolar fricative /s/can also be glotalzed as in<br />

Northern Dialect Central Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

hò /hɔ̀/ sò/sɔ̀/ sò/sɔ̀/ you and I<br />

hèʼni /hèʔnī/ sèʼni/sèʔni/ sèʼni/sèʔni/ now<br />

herna /héɾnā/ serna/séɾna/ serna/séɾna/ t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

In situati<strong>on</strong>s w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> we have the velar /ɣ/in Southern and Central Limbum, it is realized a the<br />

glottal /h/ as in the single examine below.<br />

Northern Dialect Central Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

àho /àhɔ̄ / àgho /àɣɔ̄ / àgho /àɣɔ̄ / with:<br />

The realizati<strong>on</strong> of this glottal as seen above seems to be intervocalic. At word initial positi<strong>on</strong>,<br />

the velar is maintained.<br />

Velarizati<strong>on</strong> takes place with Southern Limbum w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> labial ph<strong>on</strong>emes like /v/and /w/ as<br />

used in Southern and Central Limbum are realized in Southern Limbum with the use of the<br />

velar /ɣ/ as can be seen below.<br />

Northern Dialect Central Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

ghù /ɣù / vʉ̀ /vɨ̀ / vʉ̀/vɨ̀ / come<br />

ghup /ɣūp / vʉp /vɨ̄p / vʉp/vɨ̄p / b<strong>on</strong>e<br />

ghèe /ɣè: / wèe /wè: / wèe/wè: / you<br />

wooghèe/wō:ɣè:/ woowèe/wō:wè:/ woowèe/wō:wè:/ them<br />

From these examples we can also c<strong>on</strong>clude that the velarizati<strong>on</strong> process is limited to<br />

envir<strong>on</strong>ments w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>by the velar /ɣ/is followed by /u/and /e/vowel ph<strong>on</strong>emes.<br />

Libializati<strong>on</strong>in Northern Limbum takes place when the corresp<strong>on</strong>ding ph<strong>on</strong>eme in the<br />

Southern and Central dialect is the palatal /j/as in the following:<br />

Northern Dialect Central Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

wuu /wu:/ yuu /ju:/ yuu /ju:/ thing<br />

It is not obvious that this is the general pattern with the labializati<strong>on</strong>. We may say that this<br />

can <strong>on</strong>ly take place if the vowel is a back vowel and its t<strong>on</strong>e is mid. This is because a word<br />

like yuu – buy which bears a high t<strong>on</strong>e will be /jú:/ in all the dialects.<br />

Vowel difference between the Southern, Central and Northern Limbum as we have seen<br />

above can <strong>on</strong>ly be seen in the shift of the mid high vowel ph<strong>on</strong>eme /ɨ/to high back /u/ as in.<br />

PS


Northern Dialect Central Dialect Southern Dialect<br />

ŋkuu<br />

tuʼ<br />

/ŋkú:/<br />

/tūʔ/<br />

ŋkʉʉ/ŋkɨ̀ ́:/<br />

tʉʼ/tɨ̄ʔ/<br />

ŋkʉʉ/ŋkɨ̀ ́:/<br />

tʉʼ/tɨ̄ʔ/ night<br />

chief<br />

kù<br />

ŋgup<br />

/kù/<br />

/ŋgū p/<br />

kʉ̀ /kɨ̀/<br />

ŋgʉp/ŋgɨ̄p/<br />

kʉ̀/kɨ̀/<br />

ŋgʉp/ŋgɨ̄p/<br />

rope<br />

fowl<br />

The vowel shift does not depend <strong>on</strong> the preceding or following c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant. Northern Limbum<br />

seems to prefer a six vowel system instead the seven vowel system of the general Limbum<br />

alphabet.<br />

From the above, we can witness that the changes in the ph<strong>on</strong>emes do not affect the t<strong>on</strong>es or<br />

create a stress <strong>on</strong> the syllables. If any prosodic features are to be examined in the various<br />

dialects of Limbum, more will be seen in with Southern Limbum than with Northern Limbum<br />

which has been influenced by a n<strong>on</strong>-<strong>Bantu</strong> language. This t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g>fore suggests that studying the<br />

prosodic effects <strong>on</strong> the Northern dialect can be focused <strong>on</strong> the questi<strong>on</strong> of the vicinity of the<br />

vowel ph<strong>on</strong>emes as well as the t<strong>on</strong>es. The sounds c<strong>on</strong>trasted above are merely differ from<br />

each other by <strong>on</strong>e articulatory feature. Moreover, any stress pattern will be examined under<br />

ph<strong>on</strong>otactics like voicing or devoicing. Though the Northern dialect is not revealing anything<br />

about c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ant borrowing, t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is the need to check is Mbembe from which it has derived<br />

its influence makes more use velar, palatal and glottal ph<strong>on</strong>emes than labial ph<strong>on</strong>emes.<br />

Southern Limbum makes use of borrowed c<strong>on</strong>s<strong>on</strong>ants and clusters more than Northern<br />

Limbum which has borrowed from a n<strong>on</strong>-phylum neighbor. This raises a questi<strong>on</strong> of whether<br />

the prosodic features can <strong>on</strong>ly be seen in the influence of a n<strong>on</strong>-related language. In some <strong>on</strong>e<br />

of the situati<strong>on</strong>s a l<strong>on</strong>g vowel has been seen in Southern Limbum as being realized by a semivowel.<br />

PS


A typology of <strong>Bantu</strong> subject inversi<strong>on</strong><br />

C<strong>on</strong>temporary research in comparative <strong>Bantu</strong> has highlighted the high degree of morphosyntactic<br />

microvariati<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong>. While early work <strong>on</strong> the topic has typically focussed <strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong><br />

type and variati<strong>on</strong> between two language groups (e.g. ‘symmetric’ vs. ‘asymmetric’ <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages), recent work has shown the complexity of interrelated parameters of variati<strong>on</strong>, and how<br />

these are instantiated in different languages – resulting in a large range of patterns and language<br />

groups. A well-known area of variati<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong> are locative inversi<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s (Bresnan and<br />

Kanerva 1989 and much following work), w<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> different languages (e.g. Chichewa, Herero,<br />

Ndebele, or Sotho) show different morphosyntactic and thematic restricti<strong>on</strong>s. However, we show<br />

that locative inversi<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s are just <strong>on</strong>e type of inversi<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong>: t<str<strong>on</strong>g>here</str<strong>on</strong>g> is a wider microtypology<br />

of subject inversi<strong>on</strong> in <strong>Bantu</strong> which includes formal locative inversi<strong>on</strong> (LI), semantic<br />

locative inversi<strong>on</strong> (SLI), instrument inversi<strong>on</strong> (II), subject-object reversal (SOR), default agreement<br />

inversi<strong>on</strong> (DAI) and agreeing inversi<strong>on</strong> (AI). The talk will develop such a typology and propose<br />

1. a set of descriptive parameters which describe the similarities and differences between the<br />

c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong> types in detail (Table 1),<br />

2. a comparis<strong>on</strong> of selected <strong>Bantu</strong> languages which differ with respect to <strong>on</strong>e or more of these<br />

parameters (Table 2), and<br />

3. a set of underlying structural properties which account for (some of) the variati<strong>on</strong> observed.<br />

LI SLI II SOR DAI AI<br />

P1 Verb-logical subject order P P P P P P<br />

P2 Logical subject cannot be omitted P P P P P P<br />

P3 No object marker P P P P P P<br />

P4 Post-verbal/thetic focus P P P P P P<br />

P5 Prosodic marking P P P P P P<br />

P6 Locative grammatical subject P O O O O O<br />

P7 Locative subject agreement P O O O P O<br />

P8 Referential subject agreement P P P P O O<br />

P9 Thematic restricti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> topic P (LOC) P (LOC) P (INS) P (TH) O O<br />

Table 1: Parameters P1 to P9 for <strong>Bantu</strong> inversi<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s<br />

LI SLI II SOR DAI AI<br />

Dzamba (C32) P ? ? P ? ?<br />

Kagulu (G11) P ? ? P P P<br />

Swahili (G42) P P ? P P P<br />

Luyia (JE32) P P ? ? ? ?<br />

Chichewa (N31) P O ? O ? O<br />

Kimatuumbi (P13) O O O O O P<br />

Herero (R31) P O ? O P O<br />

Tswana (S40) O O ? O P O<br />

Zulu (S42) O P P O P O<br />

Table 2: Inversi<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s in nine <strong>Bantu</strong> languages<br />

The results from the comparis<strong>on</strong> show the complex and detailed variati<strong>on</strong> between different <strong>Bantu</strong><br />

languages, but also highlight the problem that for many languages, complete data are not easily<br />

available (cf. ‘?’ in Table 2). However, based <strong>on</strong> our research so far, we propose that the variati<strong>on</strong><br />

encountered results from three underlying domains of differences related to nominal morphosyntax,<br />

verbal-functi<strong>on</strong>al morphosyntax, and verbal-thematic restricti<strong>on</strong>s. In particular, variati<strong>on</strong> results<br />

from: 1) The status of locative phrases as nominal or prepositi<strong>on</strong>al, 2) restricti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> the verbal<br />

licensing of arguments related to agreement and case, and 3) thematic restricti<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> the predicates<br />

available in the inversi<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s. We will show that P1 to P5 characterise the c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s<br />

as inversi<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>s (in distincti<strong>on</strong> to, for example, passives), P6 reflects the status of locative<br />

phrases, P7-8 are related to different properties of subject licensing, and P9 reflects thematic<br />

restricti<strong>on</strong>s. Overall, the talk shows how the interacti<strong>on</strong> of underlying structural differences results<br />

in complex surface variati<strong>on</strong> and in a fine-grained typology of different <strong>Bantu</strong> languages.<br />

Bresnan, Joan, and J<strong>on</strong>ni M. Kanerva. 1989. Chichewa locative inversi<strong>on</strong>: a case study of factorizati<strong>on</strong> in grammar.<br />

Linguistic Inquiry 20 (1):1-50.<br />

Pl

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!